all | frequencies |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
exhibits | applications |
---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
manuals |
app s | submitted / available | |||||||
---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
1 2 |
|
User Manual | Users Manual | 1.12 MiB | June 12 2012 / November 12 2012 | |||
1 2 |
|
User Manual 1 | Users Manual | 4.43 MiB | ||||
1 2 |
|
User Manual 10 | Users Manual | 3.98 MiB | ||||
1 2 |
|
User Manual 11 | Users Manual | 2.84 MiB | ||||
1 2 |
|
User Manual 12 | Users Manual | 3.90 MiB | ||||
1 2 |
|
User Manual 13 | Users Manual | 2.61 MiB | ||||
1 2 |
|
User Manual 14 | Users Manual | 4.00 MiB | ||||
1 2 |
|
User Manual 15 | Users Manual | 4.45 MiB | ||||
1 2 |
|
User Manual 16 | Users Manual | 1.69 MiB | ||||
1 2 |
|
User Manual 17 | Users Manual | 2.54 MiB | ||||
1 2 |
|
User Manual 18 | Users Manual | 3.26 MiB | ||||
1 2 |
|
User Manual 19 | Users Manual | 3.50 MiB | ||||
1 2 |
|
User Manual 2 | Users Manual | 2.39 MiB | ||||
1 2 |
|
User Manual | Users Manual | 2.49 MiB | ||||
1 2 |
|
User Manual 21 | Users Manual | 2.56 MiB | ||||
1 2 |
|
User Manual 3 | Users Manual | 4.11 MiB | ||||
1 2 |
|
User Manual 4 | Users Manual | 2.20 MiB | ||||
1 2 |
|
User Manual 5 | Users Manual | 3.35 MiB | ||||
1 2 |
|
User Manual 6 | Users Manual | 3.68 MiB | ||||
1 2 |
|
User Manual 7 | Users Manual | 2.92 MiB | ||||
1 2 |
|
User Manual 8 | Users Manual | 4.85 MiB | ||||
1 2 |
|
User Manual 9 | Users Manual | 3.16 MiB | ||||
1 2 | Cover Letter(s) | |||||||
1 2 | Cover Letter(s) | |||||||
1 2 | External Photos | |||||||
1 2 | ID Label/Location Info | |||||||
1 2 | Test Report | |||||||
1 2 | Test Setup Photos | |||||||
1 2 | Attestation Statements | November 12 2012 | ||||||
1 2 | Cover Letter(s) | November 12 2012 | ||||||
1 2 | Cover Letter(s) | June 12 2012 / November 12 2012 | ||||||
1 2 | ID Label/Location Info | June 12 2012 / November 12 2012 |
1 2 | User Manual | Users Manual | 1.12 MiB | June 12 2012 / November 12 2012 |
C4FM FDMA 144/430 MHz DUAL BAND DIGITAL TRANSCEIVER FTM-400DR OPERATING MANUAL YAESU MUSEN CO., LTD. Tennozu Parkside Building 2-5-8 Higashi-Shinagawa, Shinagawa-ku, Tokyo 140-0002 Japan YAESU USA 6125 Phyllis Drive, Cypress, CA 90630, U.S.A. YAESU UK LTD. Unit 12, Sun Valley Business Park, Winnall Close Winchester, Hampshire, SO23 0LB, U.K. YAESU HK LTD. Unit 1306-1308, 13F., Millennium City 2, 378 Kwun Tong Road, Kwun Tong, Kowloon, Hong Kong FCC ID: K6620345X40 IC: 511B-20345X40 Before Using This Equipment Contents Before Using This Equipment ................................. 3 Safety Precautions (Be Sure to Read) ....................... 3 Before Transmitting Radio Waves .............................. 8 Accessory and Option ................................................ 9 Attaching Accessory Items ....................................... 10 Connecting the Panel Screen to the Main Unit .... 10 Connect the accessory microphone (MH-48). .... 10 Setting up the Panel Screen with the accessory bracket. ................................................................11 Names for various parts, Functional Parts and their Functions. ................................................................ 12 Description for Panel Screen ............................... 12 Description about the Screen............................... 13 Description of Microphone (MH-48) ..................... 16 Using the microSD Memory Card ............................. 17 Usable microSD memory cards. ......................... 17 Precautions for when using a microSD memory card. .................................................................... 18 Installing/removing microSD memory card .......... 18 Formatting the microSD Memory Card ................ 19 Basic Operation ...................................................... 20 Communication......................................................... 20 Changing the Beep Sound. ................................. 20 Using the Timer Function ..................................... 21 The ALTITUDE function for measuring altitude. .. 22 Locking Keys and Switches ................................. 22 Changing Transmission Output............................ 24 Adjusting Microphone Sensitivity (MIC GAIN) ..... 24 Other Settings........................................................... 25 Adjusting Time ..................................................... 25 Muting Sounds ..................................................... 26 Adjusting Squelch Level....................................... 26 Manually switching frequency steps .................... 27 Resetting applied settings .................................... 27 Repeater Operation ................................................ 28 Repeater Operation .................................................. 28 Communicating Via the Repeater ........................ 28 Communicating Via the Repeater Using a Tone Signal Other Than the 88.5Hz Tone Signal .......... 28 Using Memory ......................................................... 30 Wide variety of Memory Functions ........................... 30 Registering to Memory ......................................... 30 Split Memory ........................................................ 31 Recalling a Memory Channel ............................... 31 Recalling the Home Channel ............................... 32 Returning to the Previous Frequency .............. 32 Deleting Memory .................................................. 32 Changing the display method of Memory Tags. ....................................................................... 33 Scanning Function ................................................. 34 Using the Scanning Function.................................... 34 VFO Scan ............................................................ 34 Canceling Scanning ........................................ 34 Setting a Reception Method When Scanning Stops ............................................................... 34 Memory Scanning ................................................ 35 Programmable Memory Scan (PMS) ................... 37 Writing into a Programmable Memory ............. 37 Performing Programmable Memory Scan ....... 39 Useful Functions .................................................... 41 Dual Reception (DW) Functions ............................... 41 Dial Dual Reception VFO mode Home channel ......................... 41 Memory Dual Reception Memory channel Home Channel ............... 42 Using the DTMF Function......................................... 42 Sending the Registered DTMF Code ....................... 43 Sending a DTMF Code Manually ............................. 44 Communicating with a Specific Remote Station . 45 Using the Tone Squelch Function ............................. 45 Selecting a Tone Frequency ................................ 46 Searching for the Frequency of the Tone Squelch Used by the Remote Station ................................ 46 Selecting a DCS Code ......................................... 47 Searching for the Frequency of the DCS Used by the Remote Station .............................................. 47 Notification of Call from a Remote Station by the Bell............................................................................ 48 Calling Only a Specific Station New Pager Function .................................................................... 48 Flow of Operation to Use the Pager Function ...... 48 Setting the Code of Your Station .......................... 49 Turning on the New Pager Function .................... 49 Calling a Specific Station ..................................... 50 Being Called by the Remote Station (Standby Operation) ............................................................ 51 Functions Used as Needed.................................... 52 Setup Menu .............................................................. 52 Settings for the Setup Menu ................................ 52 Setup Menu Operations List ................................ 52 Apply settings to contents displayed on screen. . 59 Setting the Background Color of the Screen ....... 60 Setting the Frequency Width for Band Scope ...... 60 Adjusting the LCD Backlight Brightness Level ..... 61 Adjusting LCD Contrast ....................................... 61 Switching between Time and Voltage display ...... 62 Adjusting volume respectively to A/B Bands. ...... 62 Setting the Display Method for Memory Channels .............................................................. 63 Setting the Squelch Type for transmission ........... 63 Setting the display format for the Clock Function 64 Setting the Time Zone .......................................... 65 Setting the Automatic Repeater Shift ................... 65 Setting the Clock Shift of the Microcomputer ....... 66 Setting the Program Keys on the Microphone ..... 66 Setting the Bandwidth to Scope ........................... 67 Setting the unit of measurement to be displayed . 67 Automatically Turning Off the Power APO Function....................................................... 68 Restricting the Continuous Transmission Time TOT Function ....................................................... 68 Setting PIN Code for a BLUETOOTH headset .... 69 Selecting Datum for GPS function. ..................... 69 B e f i o r e U s n g T h s E q u p m e n t i i 1 FCC ID: K6620345X40 IC: 511B-20345X40 Contents Setting the GPS Device to Use ............................ 70 Setting Time for Accessing GPS .......................... 70 Communicating by crossing A Band and B band frequencies .......................................................... 71 Setting USB Camera to Use. .............................. 71 Setting operations of BLUETOOTH Headset to Use....................................................................... 72 Setting Operations of the Voice Announcement Function ............................................................... 73 Writing Group ID to microSD Memory Card ......... 74 Registering Preset ............................................... 75 Recalling the Registered Preset. ........................ 75 Deleting Memory Channels.................................. 76 Sorting Registered Memory Channels in Order. . 76 Deleting Settings Configured for APRS Function. ............................................................. 77 The Clone Function For copying settings to another FTM-400DR ............................................ 77 FTM-400DR Specifications .................................... 79 B e f i o r e U s n g T h s E q u p m e n t i i 2 FCC ID: K6620345X40 IC: 511B-20345X40 Before Using This Equipment Safety Precautions (Be Sure to Read) Be sure to read the safety precautions to use this product safely. We are not liable for failures and other problems caused due to misuse or use of this product by you or a third party as well as the damages caused through use of this product by you or a third party except in the case where we are ordered to pay for damages under the laws. Types and Meanings of Symbols DANGER Indicates an imminently hazardous situation which, if not avoided, could result in death or serious injury. WARNING Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided, could result in death or serious injury. CAUTION Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided, may result in minor or moderate injury or only property damage. Types and Meanings of Legends Indicates a prohibited item not to be done in order to use this product safely. For example, indicates that the product should not be disassembled. Indicates an obliged item to be done in order to use this product safely. For example, indicates that the power plug should be removed. DANGER B e f i o r e U s n g T h s E q u p m e n t i i Do not use this product in an area where use of it is prohibited, e.g., inside the hospital, airplane, or train. This product can affect electronic or medical devices. Do not use this product while riding a bicycle or driving a car. Accidents can result. Be sure to stop the bicycle or car at a safe place before using this product. Those who are carrying a medical device such as a cardiac pacemaker should not perform transmission near it. When performing transmission, use an external antenna and keep away from the external antenna as far as possible. The radio wave emitted from this product can cause the medical device to malfunction and result in an accident. Do not use this product or the battery charger in a place where inflammable gas is generated. A fire or explosion can occur. 3 FCC ID: K6620345X40 IC: 511B-20345X40 Safety Precautions (Be Sure to Read) Do not perform transmission in a crowded place for the safety of the persons carrying a medical device such as a cardiac pacemaker. The radio wave emitted from this product can cause the medical device to malfunction and result in an accident. Do not touch the liquid leaking from the battery pack with bare hands. The liquid that has stuck to your skin or entered in your eye can cause chemical burn. In such a case, consult the doctor immediately. Do not solder or short-circuit the terminal of the battery pack. A fire, leak, overheating, explosion, or ignition can result. Do not carry the battery pack together with a necklace or hair pin. A short circuit can result. If it starts thundering when the external antenna is used, immediately turn off this product and disconnect the external antenna from it. A fire, electrical shock, failure can result. B e f WANING Do not use this product at a voltage other than the specified power supply voltage. A fire or electric shock can result. Do not use the battery pack for any model other than the specified mode. A fire, leak, overheating, explosion, or ignition can result. This product has a waterproof structure and conforms to IPX5 when the included antenna and battery pack are installed and rubber caps are securely attached to the MIC/SP jack, EXTDC IN jack, DATA terminal, and micro SD slot. If this product gets wet, wipe it with a dry cloth, etc. without leaving it as it is. Leaving this product in a wet condition can degrade its performance, shorten its life, or cause a failure or electrical shock. Do not perform transmission for a long period. The main body can overheat, resulting in a failure or burn. Do not disassemble or make any alteration to this product. An injury, electric shock, or failure can result. Do not handle the battery pack or charger with wet hands. Do not insert or remove the power plug with wet hands. An injury, leak, fire, or failure can result. If smoke or strange odor is emitted from the main body, battery pack, or battery charger, immediately turn off this product, remove the battery pack, and remove the power plug from the outlet. A fire, leak, overheating, damage, ignition, or failure can result. Contact the shop from which you purchased this product or our Amateur Customer Support. Do not use the battery pack which is externally damaged or deformed. A fire, leak, hating, explosion, or ignition can result. Do not use any battery charger which is not specified by us. A fire or failure can result. Keep the terminals of the battery pack clean. If stained, a fire, leak, overheating, explosion, or ignition can result. i o r e U s n g T h s E q u p m e n t i i 4 FCC ID: K6620345X40 IC: 511B-20345X40 Safety Precautions (Be Sure to Read) If charging of the battery pack cannot be completed after lapse of the specified time, immediately remove the power plug of the battery charger from the outlet. A fire, leak, overheating, explosion, or ignition can result. CAUTION Do not dangle or throw this product by holding its antenna. This product can hit and injure someone. In addition, doing so can result in a main body failure or damage. Do not use this product in a crowded place. The antenna can hit someone, resulting in a injury. Do not place this product in a place subject to direct sunlight or near a heater. This product can deform or discolor. Do not place this product in a humid or dusty place. A fire or failure can result. During transmission, keep the antenna away from you as far as possible. Long-time exposure to electromagnetic waves can have a negative impact on your health. Do not clean the case with thinner or benzene. Use a soft, dry cloth to clean the case. If you do not use this product for a long period, turn it off and remove the battery pack for safety. Do not give a strong shock to or throw this product. A failure can result. Keep magnetic cards and video tape away from this product. The data recorded on cash cards or video tape can be erased. Do not use the earpiece microphone, earphones, or headphones at an extremely high volume level. Hearing impairment can result. Keep this product out of reach of children. An injury, etc. can result. Install the hand strap and belt click securely. If they are installed improperly, they can fall down, resulting in an injury or damage. Do not place a heavy thing on the power cord of the battery charger. The battery cord can be damaged, resulting in a fire or electric shock. Do not use the included battery charger to charge any battery pack which is not specified by us. A fire can result. Do not perform transmission near the TV or radio. Radio disturbance can occur in this product, TV, or radio. Do not use any products other than the options specified by us. A failure can result. When the battery charger is not in use, remove its power plug from the outlet B e f i o r e U s n g T h s E q u p m e n t i i 5 FCC ID: K6620345X40 IC: 511B-20345X40 Safety Precautions (Be Sure to Read) Charge the battery pack within the temperature range from 5C to 35C. Charging the battery pack outside this temperature range can cause leak, overheating, decrease in performance, or reduction in service life can result. When unplugging the power cord of the battery charger, be sure to hold the power plug. Pulling the power cord can damage it and cause a fire or electronic shock. Before discarding the worn battery pack, affix tape or the like to its terminals. When using this product in a hybrid or fuel-saving car, be sure to check with the automobile manufacturer if the it can be used in that car. Noise generated by an onboard electrical device (inverter, etc.) can disable normal reception by this product. B e f i o r e U s n g T h s E q u p m e n t i i 6 FCC ID: K6620345X40 IC: 511B-20345X40 Safety Precautions (Be Sure to Read) About Waterproo ng Feature Conforming to IPX5 When the included antenna and battery pack are installed and the MIC/SP jack, EXT DC IN jack, DATA terminal, and micro SD slot are securely covered with rubber caps, this product can withstand continuous 30-minute immersion in water at depth of 1 m. To ensure this waterproofing feature, be sure to check the following points before use.
Check for damages, deterioration, and dirt. Antenna rubber, key switch rubber, MIC/SP jack, EXT DC IN jack, DATA terminal, micro SD slot rubber cap, and battery pack joint.
Cleaning When this product is contaminated with seawater, sand, or dirt, rinse with fresh water, and then wipe with a dry cloth immediately.
Recommended maintenance interval It is recommended that you ask for maintenance of this product when one year has passed since purchase or previous maintenance or when any damage or deterioration is found. Note that the maintenance service is subject to fees.
Do not immerse this product in the following liquids:
Sea, pool, hot spring, water containing soap, detergent, or bath additive, alcohol, or chemicals
Do not leave this product for a long time in the following places:
Bathroom, kitchen, or humid place
Other precautions Since this product is not totally waterproof, it cannot be used in water. B e f i o r e U s n g T h s E q u p m e n t i i 7 FCC ID: K6620345X40 IC: 511B-20345X40 Before Transmitting Radio Waves If you are informed that the radio waves emitted from your amateur station are interfering with reception by the TV, radio, etc., of a neighbor, you should stop emitting the radio waves and check whether any problem of interference and its degree if it exists. B e f i o r e U s n g T h s E q u p m e n t i i 8 FCC ID: K6620345X40 IC: 511B-20345X40 Accessory and Option
B e f i o r e U s n g T h s E q u p m e n t i i 9 FCC ID: K6620345X40 IC: 511B-20345X40 Attaching Accessory Items Connecting the Panel Screen to the Main Unit Connect the Panel to the Main Unit. Precaution
Make sure to turn off the Main Unit when connecting the Panel Screen to the Main Unit. 1 Connect the accessory cable to the Main Unit. Connect the cable to the
[CONTROL] port of the Main Unit. B e f i o r e U s n g T h s E q u p m e n t i i 2 Connect the cable to the Panel Screen. Connect the cable to the
[CONTROL] port of the Panel Screen. Connect the accessory microphone (MH-48). 1 Insert the microphone (MH-48) into the MIC port of the Main Unit. As shown in the image on the right, connect the accessory microphone (MH-48) to the MIC port of the Main Unit. Reference When removing the microphone, pull it out while pressing [PUSH ]. 10 FCC ID: K6620345X40 IC: 511B-20345X40 Attaching Accessory Items Setting up the Panel Screen with the accessory bracket. Set the Panel Screen up with the accessory bracket. Precaution The bracket can be shaped by hand to fit where the Panel Screen is to be set. Be careful not to injure yourself when manipulating the bracket into the desired shape. 1 Choosing where to set the Panel Screen. Decide where to set the Panel Screen. 2 Attach the bracket to the Panel Screen. As shown on the figure, attach the bracket to the panel using the enclosed screws. 3 Attach the bracket using double-sided adhesive tape. Remove the protective film on one side of the enclosed double-sided adhesive tape and paste it to the bottom of the bracket. 4 Attach the Panel Screen to the desired location. Remove the protective film on the remaining side of the double-sided adhesive tape and paste the Panel Screen to the desired location of the vehicle. B e f i o r e U s n g T h s E q u p m e n t i i 11 FCC ID: K6620345X40 IC: 511B-20345X40 Names for various parts, Functional Parts and their Functions. Description for Panel Screen O Pressing O shortly switches between operating bands. When selecting operating band, press the O shortly to fast forward the MHz indication. Pressing and holding O over 1 second switches the operating band in units of 5MHz v The volume can be adjusted with v. P Power can be switched ON/OFF by pressing and holding P over 1 second. M Pressing the M shortly changes the view of the Display. Pressing P shortly while the power is ON switches the key lock ON/OFF. Reference See pages xx for details on the view of the Display. Pressing and holding M over 1 second displays the Setup Menu. F Pressing F shortly displays the Function Menu. Pressing and holding F over 1 second switches to the Memory Recording Mode. B e f i o r e U s n g T h s E q u p m e n t i i D Pressing D shortly switches the ARTS D ON/OFF. Pressing and holding D over 1 second stores ARTS D Group information of your station to the microSD memory card. Pressing D while transmitting sends ARTS D Group information of your station to the destination station.
% Pressing the % shortly switches between Analog/Digital Mode. Pressing and holding % over 1 second starts WiRES X. 12 FCC ID: K6620345X40 IC: 511B-20345X40 Names for various parts, Functional Parts and their Functions. Description about the Screen
[V/M]
[SQL]
Tapping [V/M] switches between VFO channels and Memory Channels. Squelch level can be adjusted by tapping
[SQL]. Tapping [MUTE] mutes reception tone.
[MUTE]
[SCOPE] Tapping [SCOPE] switches the Band Scope Function ON/OFF. When the Band Scope Function is ON, it appears as follows:
Operating Frequency VOL Level/SQL Level S Meter/Destination Station Information Band Scope Area B e f Pressing M shortly switches to the next screen. ARTS/GMS Screen
[BACK]
[LIST]
Returns to the previous screen. Displays the list of received messages. i o r e U s n g T h s E q u p m e n t i i 13 FCC ID: K6620345X40 IC: 511B-20345X40 Names for various parts, Functional Parts and their Functions. BACK TRACK Screen
[Compass Unit] Tapping [Compass Unit] saves
[L1]
[L2]
current location information. Tapping [L1] displays location information registered to L1. Tapping [L2] displays location information registered to L2. B e f i o r e U s n g T h s E q u p m e n t i i
[TX]
Tapping [TX] transmits the current location information/ID/TAG of your station to the destination station.
[RCVD] Tapping [RCVD] selects BACK TRACK ON/OFF for the destination station. When the BACK TRACK is ON, it appears in White. When the BACK TRACK is OFF, it appears in Grey. When a signal from the destination station with its location information is received, it appears in orange. NAVIGATION Screen
[Heading UP]
Tapping [Heading UP] switches between Heading Up and Nose Up.
[DESTINATION] Tapping [DESTINATION] displays
[CLEAR]
[CURRENT]
[LOCATION]
the Point List to start navigation. Tapping [CLEAR] stops navigation. Tapping [CURRENT] displays the current location information. The following screen appears when displaying the Point List.
[BACK] Tapping [BACK] returns to the previous
[NAVI]
[EDIT]
screen and puts the navigation on standby. Tapping [NAVI] returns to the previous screen and starts navigation. Tapping [EDIT] allows you to edit names of Point List. Tap [DEL] allows you to delete Point List.
[DEL]
[SORT] Tapping [SORT] sorts Point Memory in the predetermined order. 14 FCC ID: K6620345X40 IC: 511B-20345X40 Names for various parts, Functional Parts and their Functions. ALTITUDE Screen
[CLEAR]
Tapping [CLEAR] deletes data being displayed.
[Altitude Scale] Tapping [Altitude Scale] allows you to change measurement unit of altitude being displayed.
[Distance Scale] Tapping [Distance Scale] allows you to change the measurement unit of distance being displayed. Tapping [CURRENT] displays detailed location information.
[CURRENT]
[LOCATION]
TIMER/CLOCK Screen
[MODE]
Tapping [MODE] toggles through
[CLOCK], [LAP COUNTER], [DOWN COUNTER]. LAP Timer Screen
[START]
[STOP]
[LAP]
[RESET]
Tapping [START] starts the Counter. Tapping [STOP] stops the Counter. Tapping [LAP] displays LAP value measured by Counter. Tapping [RESET] resets LAP value measured by Counter.
[RECALL] Tapping [RECALL] will display LAP value Down Timer Screen measured by Counter.
[SETUP]
[RESET]
Tapping [SETUP] displays setting screen for time measurement. Tapping [RESET] returns to time measurement display screen. 15 B e f i o r e U s n g T h s E q u p m e n t i i FCC ID: K6620345X40 IC: 511B-20345X40 Names for various parts, Functional Parts and their Functions. GPS INFO Screen
[CURRENT]
Tapping [CURRENT] displays detailed location information.
[LOCATION MEMORY]
Save present location information to memory.
[1] Recieving Satellite Number
[1] Signal Strength High
[1] (Halftone 20%) Signal Strength Medium
[1] (Halftone 50%) Signal Strength Low Description of Microphone (MH-48) Raises the frequency up one step.
[UP]
[DOWN] Lowers the frequency down one step.
[1] to [0]
Input numbers and alphabet. Switch between VFO/MEMEORY of operating band. Registers frequency to memory. Switches operating band to A band. Switches operating band to B band. Adjust DQL level. Switch the view of DISPLAY. Sets SQL to OFF. Moves to frequency set as HOME. RPT SHIFT TX POWER Locks keys [UP] and [DOWN] to prevent miss operation. Lights the lamp on the Microphone.
[A]
[B]
[C]
[D]
[P1]
[P2]
[P3]
[P4]
[LOCK]
[LAMP]
B e f i o r e U s n g T h s E q u p m e n t i i Reference Functions for [P1] to [P4] can be changed in [OPTION] [10 MIC PRG KEY] of the Setup Menu. 16 FCC ID: K6620345X40 IC: 511B-20345X40 Using the microSD Memory Card Using a microSD memory card allows for the following functions.
The function to backup this units information.
The function to save Memory Data.
The function to save the Set Mode.
The function to save data other than images.
The function to save the GPS Log Data.
The function to save photo data captured with the optional camera mounted on microphone (MH-85A11U). Usable microSD memory cards. This unit supports microSD memory cards and microSDHC memory cards. However, operation of commercially sold microSD cards and microSDHC memory cards are not guaranteed. Refer to the following list for supported microSDHC memory cards. B e f i o r e U s n g T h s E q u p m e n t i i 17 FCC ID: K6620345X40 IC: 511B-20345X40 Using the microSD Memory Card Precautions for when using a microSD memory card.
Do not bend or place heavy objects on top of microSD memory cards.
If a microSD memory card has been formatted with a different device, may obstruct the proper storage of data. Reformat a memory card with this unit if it has been formatted with a different device.
Do not remove a microSD memory card or turn off the power of this unit while data is being saved to a microSD memory card.
Do not insert objects other than a microSD memory card into the microSD memory card slot.
Do not forcefully remove an inserted microSD memory card.
Do not use microSD memory cards other than those that are specified. Please contact our Amateur Customer Support for information about specified products. Installing/removing microSD memory card 1 Press and hold P over 1 second. Turn off the power of the main unit. Insert microSD memory card. 2 As shown in the figure to the right, insert the microSD memory card into the slot until it clicks into place. Caution Be careful not to insert the microSD memory card in the wrong direction. Do not touch the terminal of the microSD card. SDCARD appears in the upper left corner of the screen. B e f i o r e U s n g T h s E q u p m e n t i i 18 FCC ID: K6620345X40 IC: 511B-20345X40 Using the microSD Memory Card Formatting the microSD Memory Card Follow the instructions below when formatting a new microSD memory card. Precaution Formatting a microSD memory card will erase all saved data. Check the data saved to the microSD memory card in use, before formatting the card. 1 Press and hold M over 1 second. Set Mode screen appears. 2 Tap [SD]. 3 Tap [1 BACKUP]. 4 Tap [FORMAT]. 5 Press F.
[SD CARD PUSH F KEY!] appears on screen.
[FORMAT? PUSH F KEY!] appears on screen. Reference Tap [BACK] to cancel format. 6 Press F. Once format is finished, [SD CARD PUSH F KEY!]
Formatting starts. appears on screen. 7 Press and hold M over 1 second. Exit from Set Mode. B e f i o r e U s n g T h s E q u p m e n t i i 19 FCC ID: K6620345X40 IC: 511B-20345X40 Basic Operation Turn on the power. Communication 1 Press and hold P over 1 second. 2 Adjust volume with [VOL]. 3 Tap [SQL]. Adjust Squelch 4 Adjust frequency using O. Reference The frequency can also be adjusted using [UP],
[DOWN], and [0] to [9] on the microphone. 5 Speak by pressing [PTT] on the microphone. 6 Press and hold P over 1 second. Turn off the power. Reference The type of radio is set automatically. The type of radio can also be changed manually (See page xx). The frequency can also be selected with the [UP] and [DOWN] on the microphone. Changing the Beep Sound. The operation confirmation sound (Beep Sound), heard when keys are operated, can be changed. 1 Press and hold M over 1 second. 2 Tap [CONFIG]. 3 Tap [8 BEEP] and select desired Beep Sound. The Setup Menu appears. The Beep Sound will change in the following order each time [8 BEEP] is tapped.
[OFF] [LOW] [HIGH]
4 Press and hold M over 1 second The Beep Sound is set and the screen returns to the previous screen. i B a s c O p e r a t i o n 20 FCC ID: K6620345X40 IC: 511B-20345X40 Using the Timer Function This unit is equipped with a Lap Timer and Down Timer. Precaution
Adjust the internal clock beforehand when using the timer function.(See page 000). Communication The Lap Timer appears. Using the Lap Timer 1 Press M shortly. Press M shortly until clock appears. 2 Tap [MODE]. 3 Tap [START]. 4 Tap [LAP]. 5 Tap [STOP]. The Timer starts. The Timer stops. Tapping [RESET] deletes Lap Time. Tapping [RECALL] displays Lap Time that has been recorded in the past. 6 Press M shortly. Exits Timer Screen and returns to the previous screen. The Lap Time is recorded every time [LAP] is tapped. Using the Down Timer 1 Press M shortly. Press M shortly a few times until clock appears. 2 Tap [MODE] twice Down Timer appears. 3 Tap [SETUP]. 4 Set time with O. Rotate O and set [TIME] for time measurement. Tapping [SETUP] applys the selected time.
[MINUTE] can be set in the same way. The setting screen for time measurement appears. i B a s c O p e r a t i o n 21 FCC ID: K6620345X40 IC: 511B-20345X40 Communication 5 Tap [START]. The Down Timer starts. Tap [STOP] to pause timer if you want to stop it in the middle. When the set time is reached, [00:0000] appears in green. 6 Press M shortly. Exits Timer Screen and returns to the previous screen. The ALTITUDE function for measuring altitude. The altitude of present location or change of altitude according to traveled distance can be displayed as a graph. Precaution
In order to use the ALTITUDE function, connect the optional GPS antenna unit.
In order to display the ALTITUDE screen, set to [ALTITUDE:ON] of [DISPLAY] [1 DISPAY SELECT] in the Top Menu beforehand. 1 Press M shortly. Press M shortly a few times until ALTITUDE screen appears. 2 Altitude appears. 3 Press M shortly. Press M shortly a few times until the screen returns to the previous one. The present altitude appears on the display. Tapping [CLEAR] deletes accumulated data of altitude change. Tapping [LOCATION MEMORY] saves information on present location. Locking Keys and Switches Oand switches can be locked to prevent accidental changes in radio frequency during movement. 1 Press P shortly.
[LOCK] appears on the display and the screen returns to the previous one. Reference To Unlock, press [PTT] shortly again.
[UNLOCK] appears on the display and the screen will return to the previous one. Reference Conditions for automatic Lock can be changed in the Setup Menu (See page 000). i B a s c O p e r a t i o n 22 FCC ID: K6620345X40 IC: 511B-20345X40 Switching type of radio (mode) and conducting communication In factory settings, this unit is set in [AUTO] mode and automatically selects the optimum mode (type of radio) according to frequency. The type of radio (mode) can be manually changed and conduct communication. Using this unit, communication can be conducted in 4 forms: [AUTO (FM)], [FM],
[NARROW FM], and [AM]. Select the desired mode and conduct communication with the following steps. 1 Press and hold M over 1 second. 2 Tap [TX/RX]. 3 Tap [MODE] and select desired Mode. The Setup Menu appears. The Mode changes in the following order each time
[MODE] is tapped.
[AUTO (FM)]: Automatically switches to the optimal type of radio according to frequency band.
[FM]: Only changes the selected frequency band to FM Mode.
[Narrow FM]: Only changes the selected frequency band to NFM Mode.
[AM]: Only changes the selected frequency band to AM Mode. Reference Mode can also be selected by pressing v. 5 Press and hold M over 1 second. The Mode is set and the screen returns to the previous one. 6 Set frequency with O. Select frequency for communication. 7 Speak by pressing [PTT] on the microphone. Speak with about 5cm between microphone and mouth. 8 Release [PTT]. Returns to reception state. i B a s c O p e r a t i o n 23 FCC ID: K6620345X40 IC: 511B-20345X40 Switching type of radio (mode) and conducting communication Changing Transmission Output The transmission output can be lowered for when communicating with a transceiver near by, or to reduce battery consumption. 1 Press F. 2 Tap [Tx PWR] and select desired transmission output. The Transmission Output changes in the following order, each time [Tx PWR] is tapped.
[HI (5.0W)] [LOW (OOW)] [MID (OOW)]
Reference Sensitivity can also be selected by pressing O. Reference Avoid long periods of continuous transmission. Doing so causes temperature of the unit to rise, and may lead to malfunction or burning injuries due to over heating. The current Output level is indicated under [Tx PWR] on the display.
[OFF] appears on the display for frequencies where signal cannot be transmitted. This unit is set to [HI] in Factory setting. The Setup Menu appears. Adjusting Microphone Sensitivity (MIC GAIN) The Microphone Sensitivity can be adjusted. 1 Press and hold M over 1 second. 2 Tap [TX/RX]. 3 Tap [AUDIO]. 4 Tap [3 MIC GAIN] and select desired Sensitivity. The Sensitivity changes in the following order each time [3 MIC GAIN] is tapped.
[MIN] [LOW] [NORMAL] [HIGH] [MAX]
Reference Sensitivity can also be selected by pressing the O. Factory Setting: NORMAL 5 Press and hold M over 1 second. The MIC GAIN is set and the screen returns to the previous one. i B a s c O p e r a t i o n 24 FCC ID: K6620345X40 IC: 511B-20345X40 [DATA & TIME ADJUST] screen appears. Other Settings Adjusting Time This Unit is equipped with an internal clock. Not only does this clock display time, but also has a timer for automatically turning power ON and OFF at times set by the user. Adjust the time before using this function. 1 Press and hold M over 1 second. Setup Mode appears. 2 Tap [CONFIG]. 3 Tap [1 DATA & TIME ADJUST]. 4 Tap [SET]. 5 Set Month. 6 Tap [SET]. 7 Set Day. 8 Tap [SET]. 9 Repeat Step 5 to Step 6. Set [YEAR], [HOUR], [MINUTE]. 10 Press and hold M over 1 second. The cursor moves to [MONTH]. Tap [+] or [] to select Month. Tap [+] or [] to select Day. The cursor moves to [DAY]. The Date is set and the screen returns to the previous one. Note The Date/Time appears in the upper right corner of the screen. Reference The accuracy of the clock is within 30 seconds per month at room temperature. The accuracy varies depending on the use conditions such as temperature. The accuracy may degrade when the battery is low or if it is the first time using this unit. Readjust the time under these circumstances. The calendar can display dates from January 1st, 2000 A.D. to December 31st, 2099 A.D. i B a s c O p e r a t i o n 25 FCC ID: K6620345X40 IC: 511B-20345X40 Other Settings Muting Sounds If the sounds from A Band and B Band overlap and become difficult to hear during Dual frequency reception, the sound for bands other than operating band can be muted. 1 Press and hold M over 1 second. 2 Tap [TX/RX]. 3 Tap [AUDIO]. 4 Tap [2 SUB BAND MUTE] and select Mute ON. Mute is switched [ON] and [OFF] each time [2 SUB The Setup Menu appears. BAND MUTE] is tapped. Reference Mute can also be selected by pressing the O. 5 Press and hold M over 1 second. The Mute ON is set and the screen returns to the previous one. Reference Tap [MUTE] displayed on the bottom of the screen to switch the Mute Function to OFF. Mute is switched [ON] and [OFF] each time [MUTE] is tapped. Adjusting Squelch Level You can mute the raspy noise heard when no signal is being received. The squelch level can be adjusted separately for two broadcasts (NFM and AM) received on the A-band and B-band. When the squelch level is increased, the noise is more liable to disappear but, in some cases, it becomes difficult to receive weak signals. Adjust the squelch level as required. 1 Tap [SQL]. 2 Adjust Squelch level with O. Adjust the Squelch level by rotating the upper O for A Band, and lower O for B Band. Reference Squelch level can be adjusted from 0 to 8. Factory Setting: Level 1 3 Tap [SQL]. The Squelch level is set and the screen returns to the previous one. i B a s c O p e r a t i o n 26 FCC ID: K6620345X40 IC: 511B-20345X40 Other Settings The Setup Menu appears. Manually switching frequency steps In factory settings, this unit is set to [AUTO (Step)] mode and automatically selects the optimum frequency step according to reception frequency. These frequency steps can be manually changed. 1 Press and hold M over 1 second. 2 Tap [CONFIG]. 3 Tap [7 FM AM STEP] and select [AUTO]. 4 Set frequency with O. The frequency step changes in the following order, each time O is rotated.
[AUTO] [5.00KHz] [6.25KHz] [10.00KHz] [12.50KHz] [15.00KHz]
[20.00KHz] [25.00KHz] [50.00KHz] [100.00KHz]
[AUTO] appears in orange. Reference Mode can also be selected by pressing the v. The selected frequency changes from orange to green and set as current setting. 5 Tap [7 FM AM STEP]. 6 Press and hold M over 1 second. The frequency step is set and the screen returns to the previous one. i B a s c O p e r a t i o n The Setup Menu appears. Resetting applied settings Settings and memory content can be returned to factory settings. 1 Press and hold M over 1 second. 2 Tap [RESET/CLONE]. Reset screen appears. 3 Tap items to reset. Select items to reset.
[1 FACTORY RESET]: Returns all applied setting to factory settings.
[2 PRESET]: Registers the preset screen.
[3 RECALL PRESET]: Displays the preset screen.
[4 MEM CH RESET]: Erases only the registered memory channels.
[5 MEM CH SORT]: Sorts memory registered to A/B Bands.
[6 ARPS RESET]: Returns setting for ARPS to factory settings.
[7 CLONE]: Copy settings of this unit to another transceiver.
* Settings applied in the Setup Menu are not erased. 4 Tap [OK?]
Settings and memory are reset and returned to factory settings. Reference Tap [Cancel] to cancel Resetting. 27 FCC ID: K6620345X40 IC: 511B-20345X40 Repeater Operation Repeater Operation Communicating Via the Repeater FTM-400DR supports an ARS (Automatic Repeater Shift) function which allows you to perform communication automatically just by setting the reception frequency to the repeater frequency (439.000 to 440.000 MHz). 1 Set the reception frequency to repeater frequency. 2 Perform transmission while pressing [PTT]. During transmission, a 88.5Hz tone signal and a radio wave whose frequency is 5 MHz lower than the reception frequency are emitted. Reference Pressing F and then taping [REV] produces the reverse state where the transmission frequency and the reception frequency are temporarily reversed, allowing you to check whether you can communicate with the remote station directly. The [ ] on the display blinks while in the REVERSE state. Pressing F then tapping [REV] again cancels the REVERSE state. Press and hold M over 1 second to change the Setup Menu. This allows you to use the repeater more conveniently.
[CONFIG] [4 AUTO RPT SHIFT] You can deactivate the ARS function.
[CONFIG] [5 RPT SHIFT] You can set the repeater shift direction.
[CONFIG] [6 RPT SHIFT FREQ] You can change the repeater shift step. Communicating Via the Repeater Using a Tone Signal Other Than the 88.5Hz Tone Signal 1 Set the reception frequency to repeater frequency. 2 Press and hold M over 1 second. 3 Tap [CONFIG]. 4 Tap [5 RPT SHIFT] and select []. Switches between [OFF] [] [+] each time [5 RPT SHIFT] is tapped. Reference Factory Setting: OFF The frequency appears in orange. 5 Tap [6 RPT SHIFT FREQ]. 6 Set frequency with O. Rotate the O and select the desired tone frequency. 7 Tap [6 RPT SHIFT FREQ]. The selected frequency will change from orange to green and be applied as the current setting. Reference Frequency can also be selected by pressing the O. R e p e a t e r O p e r a t i o n 28 FCC ID: K6620345X40 IC: 511B-20345X40 Repeater Operation The tone frequency is set and the screen returns to the previous one. 8 Press and hold M over 1 second. 9 Perform transmission while pressing [PTT]. During transmission, the tone signal that has been set and radio wave whose frequency is 5 MHz lower than the reception frequency are emitted. Reference The settings can be stored in the memory. (Storing in the memory (See page 000)). R e p e a t e r O p e r a t i o n 29 FCC ID: K6620345X40 IC: 511B-20345X40 Using Memory Wide variety of Memory Functions FTM-400DR provides the following various types of memory channels in addition to the regular memory channels (500 channels each for both A and B band.
[Skip Search Memory] that allow you to skip unwanted frequencies during VFO scanning. 9 sets of [memory channels for Programmable Memory Scanning (PMS)]
respectively for both A band and B band. An operating frequency, operation mode (type of radio), and other operational information can be stored for each regular memory channel, or PMS memory channel. Operating frequency Repeater information Antenna squelch information Operation mode Tone information Memory skip information Transmission Output Memory tag DCS information Registering to Memory Precaution Content stored in memory can be erased due to incorrect operation, static electricity, or electrical noise. Memory content can also be erased during malfunction or repair. Content that is stored in memory should be written on paper or backed up on a microSD memory card. i U s n g M e m o r y The FTM-400DR allows you to use 500 memory channels respectively for both A band and B band. 1 Switch to VFO mode. 2 Select frequency with O. Select the frequency to register to the memory. 3 Press and hold F over 1 second. 4 Tap [MW]. The register to memory screen appears. The character entry screen appears. Reference Memory can also be named (See page 000). 5 Tap [ENT]. The memory write operation is completed, and the registered frequency appears on screen. Reference Tap [Cancel] to cancel registering to memory. Reference 145.000MHz is registered to memory channel 1 in factory settings. Although this frequency can be changed, it cannot be erased. The frequency which has previously been registered to a memory channel can be overwritten with a new frequency. When you intend to register a new frequency into the memory, an unregistered memory channel is displayed. 30 FCC ID: K6620345X40 IC: 511B-20345X40 Wide variety of Memory Functions Split Memory Two different frequencies, one for reception and other for transmission can be registered to a memory channel. 1 Register reception frequency to the memory. Reference Refer to the [Registering to Memory] above, for registering frequency. 2 Select transmission frequency in VFO mode. 3 Press F for longer than a second. 4 Tap [Reception Frequency]. Select the reception frequency to spcify from the The register to memory screen appears. memory list. 5 Tap [TX IN]. The character entry screen appears. Reference The radio frequency can also be named (See page 000). 6 Tap [ENT]. Registration to memory completes and the frequency appears on screen. When you recall the memory channel of which you registered two different frequencies, one for reception and the other for transmission, the @ icon appears on screen. i U s n g M e m o r y Recalling a Memory Channel Recall a registered memory channel in the following procedure:
1 Tap [V/M]. The Memory mode is selected, and the memory channel you used last appears on screen. 2 Select a memory channel with O. Select the memory channel to use. Remark Pressing and holding O over 1 second skips channels quickly in step of 10 channels. Tapping [V/M] againreturns to VFO Mode. Reference Unregistered memory channels are skipped. By default, the priority memory channel used as the priority channel for the dual receive function was set to the memory channel 1. P appears at the upper right of the memory channel number
(See page 000). 31 FCC ID: K6620345X40 IC: 511B-20345X40 Wide variety of Memory Functions Recalling the Home Channel 1 Press D shortly. Home Channels appear on screen. Reference Selecting the frequency with O returns to VFO Mode. Returning to the Previous Frequency The frequency selected before recalling the home channel appears on screen. 1 Press D shortly. Changing a Home Channel Frequency You can change a default home channel frequency. 1 Switch to VFO mode. 2 Set frequency with O. 3 Press and hold F over 1 second. Write to memory screen appears. 4 Tap [] or [] and select [HOME]. 5 Tap [MW]. It can also be selected by pressing O. The character entry screen appears. Reference The radio frequency can also be named (See page 000). 6 Tap [ENT]. Writing to memory l completes and the changed frequency appears on screen. i U s n g M e m o r y Deleting Memory 1 Press M 1M for longer than a second. 2 Tap [MEMORY]. 3 Tap [3 MEM EDIT]. The Setup Menu appears. Reference It can also be selected by pressing O. 4 Tap the memory to delete. 5 Tap [DEL]. 6 Tap [OK?]. Memory is deleted. The deletion confirmation screen appears. Reference Tapping [Cancel] cancels deletion. To continue deleting memory, repeat steps 4 through 6. 7 Press and hold M over 1 second. Returns to the previous screen. 32 FCC ID: K6620345X40 IC: 511B-20345X40 Precaution
Memory channel 1 cannot be deleted. Wide variety of Memory Functions Reference The memory channel specified as a home channel cannot be deleted. Before deleting it, specify another memory channel as a home channel. Changing the display method of Memory Tags. The display method of name and frequency assigned to memory tags can be changed. 1 Switch to Memory Mode. Display a memory channel to change the display method for the memory tag. The Setup Menu appears. 2 Press and hold M over 1 second. 3 Tap [MEMORY]. 4 Tap [2 ALPHA TAG SIZE] and select size. Size switches between [SMALL] and [LARGE] each time [2 ALPHA TAG SIZE] is tapped. 5 Press and hold M over 1 second. The selected size is set and the screen returns to the previous one. Reference Factory Setting: SMALL i U s n g M e m o r y 33 FCC ID: K6620345X40 IC: 511B-20345X40 Scanning Function Using the Scanning Function The FTM-400DR supports the following four scan modes:
(1) VFO Scan
(2) Memory Scan
(3) Programmable Memory Scan
(4) Selected Memory Channel Scan The Function Menu appears. VFO Scan 1 Switch to the VFO mode, and then select a band to scan. 2 Press F shortly. 3 Tap [SCAN]. Scanning (SCAN) starts toward higher frequencies. Reference Pressing and holding [UP] or [DOWN] over 1 second also starts scanning. When a signal is received during scanning, a beep is emitted and scanning pauses for 5 seconds and then resumes. The scan direction (HIGH/LOW) can be set in the
[SCAN] [2 SCAN DIRECTION] of the Setup Menu. The operation to perform when scanning stops can be set in the [SCAN] [3 SCAN RESUME] of the Setup Menu. Canceling Scanning To chancel scanning, tap [SCAN] or [PTT] on the microphone. Reference For the operation to perform when scanning stops, see Setting a Reception Method When Scanning Stops on page (See page 000). Setting a Reception Method When Scanning Stops When scanning stops, you can select one of the following three reception methods:
(1) The signal is received for the specified period of time, and then scanning resumes. You can specify this period of time to 1 second, 3 seconds, or 5 seconds.
(2) The signal is received until it fades out. Two seconds after the signal fades out, scanning resumes. BUSY appears on screen.
(3) Scanning stops and the current frequency is received. HOLD appears on screen. i S c a n n n g F u n c t i o n 34 FCC ID: K6620345X40 IC: 511B-20345X40 Using the Scanning Function The Setup Menu appears. 1 Press and hold M over 1 second. 2 Tap [SCAN]. 3 Tap [3 SCAN RESUME] and select desired reception method. The reception method changes in the following order each time [3 SCAN RESUME] is tapped.
[BUSY] [HOLD] [1sec] [3sec] [5sec]
Reference It can also be selected by pressing O. Factory Setting: 5 seconds 4 Press and hold M over 1 second. The reception method when scanning stops is set and the screen returns to the previous one. Reference The reception method selected here is also applied to [VFO Scanning], [Programmable Memory Scanning], [Memory Scanning], and [Dual Reception]. Memory Scanning Frequencies registered to the memory can be scanned in the order of memory channel number. 1 Switch to Memory mode and recall a memory channel. 2 Press F shortly. 3 Tap [SCAN]. Scanning (SCAN) is performed toward higher memory The Function Menu appears. channel numbers. When a signal is received during scanning, a beep is emitted and scanning pauses for 5 seconds and then resumes. Reference Pressing and holding [UP] or [DOWN] over 1 second also starts scanning. To stop scanning, tap [SCAN] or [PTT] on the microphone. Reference Even during scanning, you can adjust the squelch by tapping [SQL]. Tapping [SQL] again terminates squelch adjustment. For the operation to perform when scanning stops, see Setting a Reception Method When Scanning Stops on page (See page 000). i S c a n n n g F u n c t i o n 35 FCC ID: K6620345X40 IC: 511B-20345X40 Using the Scanning Function Setting the Scan Method. The scanning method to scan all memory channels or only selected memory channels can be set in the Setup Menu. ALL MEM: Scans all memory channels SELECT MEM: Only scans selected memory channels 1 Press and hold M over 1 second. 2 Tap [MEMORY]. 3 Tap [MEM SCAN TYPE] and then select The Setup Menu appears.
[SELECT MEM]. The scanning method switches between [ALL MEM]
and [SELECT MEM] each time [MEM SCAN TYPE] is tapped. Reference The scanning method can also be selected by pressing the O. 4 Press and hold M over 1 second. The scanning method is set and the screen returns to the previous one. Specifying a Skip/Selected Memory Channel You can specify two types of memory channels to scan: memory channels to skip and selected memory channels to scan, for effective memory scanning. Skip memory channel: You can specify memory channels that need not be scanned during memory scanning. Selected memory channel: When [MEM SCAN TYPE] is set to [SELECT MEM], only the specified memory channels are scanned during memory scanning. Memory channels to skip and selected memory channels to scan can be specified in the 2 methods following.
(1) Collectively select memory channels in the Memory Write screen.
(2) Individually select memory channels when scanning.
(1) Collectively specifying memory channels in the Memory Write screen. 1 Press and hold F over 1 second. The Memory Write screen appears. 2 Tap the memory to select. Select memory by tapping it. 3 Tap [SKIP/SEL]. The scanning method switches between [SKIP],
[SELECT], and [OFF], each time [SKIP/SEL] is tapped. Reference The scanning method can also be selected by pressing the O. To continue selecting memory channels, repeat steps 2 through 3. i S c a n n n g F u n c t i o n 36 FCC ID: K6620345X40 IC: 511B-20345X40 5 Press and hold F over 1 second. Returns to the previous screen. Using the Scanning Function
(2) Individually select memory channels when scanning 1 Switch to Memory mode and then recall the memory channels to specify as memory channels to skip or selected memory channels to scan. The Function Menu appears. 2 Press F shortly. 3 Tap [SKIP/SEL] and set [SKIP] or [SEL]. The scanning method switches between [SKIP] and
[SEL] each time [SKIP/SEL] is tapped. Reference The scanning method can also be selected by pressing the O. 4 Press F shortly. The memory channels to skip/selected memory channels to scan are set and the screen returns to the previous one. Scanning only memory channels selected in the specified memory. 1 Switch to Memory mode and then recall the memory channels selected for scanning. 2 Tap [SCAN]. Only the memory channels selected in the specified memory are scanned. Reference Pressing and holding [UP] or [DOWN] over 1 second also starts scanning. Scanning (SCAN) is performed toward higher memory channel numbers. When a signal is received during scanning, a beep is emitted and scanning pauses for 5 seconds and then its frequency is recieved. To cancle scanning, tap [SCAN] or [PTT] on the microphone. Programmable Memory Scan (PMS) Writing into a Programmable Memory 9 sets of PMS memory channels (L1/U1 to L9/U9) are available. Specify the lower limit frequency of the frequency range you want to san for L, and the upper limit frequency for U. Enter a number between 1 and 9 for . Use the same number for the lower and upper limit. i S c a n n n g F u n c t i o n 37 FCC ID: K6620345X40 IC: 511B-20345X40 Using the Scanning Function 1 Switch to VFO mode. 2 Select a frequency with O. Select a frequency for the lower limit. Caution Make sure to set the frequency set for the lower limit (P1L) lower than the frequency set as the upper limit (P1U). 3 Press and hold F over 1 second. Memory Write screen appears. 4 Tap [] or [] to select [P1L]. 5 Tap [MW]. It can also be selected by pressing O. The character entry screen appears. Reference The radio frequency can also be named (See page 000). 6 Tap [ENT]. 7 Set frequency with O. Select a frequency for the upper limit. 8 Press and hold F over 1 second. 9 Tap [] or [] to select [P1U]. 10 Tap [MW]. It can also be selected by pressing O. The character entry screen appears. Reference The radio frequency can also be named (See page 000). Writing to the programmable memory ends and the screen returns to the previous one. Example: Specification of the lower limit frequency 433.200 MHz and the upper limit frequency 433.700 MHz for PMS Lower limit: L1 Upper Limit: U1 Precaution The difference between the upper limit frequency and the lower limit frequency for PMS must be 100 kHz or more. i S c a n n n g F u n c t i o n 38 FCC ID: K6620345X40 IC: 511B-20345X40 Using the Scanning Function Performing Programmable Memory Scan The programmable memory allows you to scan the specified frequency range in the same frequency band. 1 Switch to Memory mode. Recall the PMS memory storing the lower limit frequency or upper limit frequency. 2 Press F shortly. 3 Tap [SCAN]. Programmable memory scanning starts. Reference Pressing and holding [UP] or [DOWN] over 1 second also starts scanning. When a signal is received during scanning, scanning pauses for 5 seconds. The scanning resumes 5 seconds after signal has been received. To cancel scanning, tap [SCAN] or [PTT] on the microphone. Precaution
When the lower/upper limit frequency is not properly specified, program memory scanning is not performed properly. Reference If PMS memory channels have already been assigned to L1/U1 to L9/U9, selecting a PMS number in the VFO scanning procedure described on page 56 allows you to skip step 1 described above. When a skip memory () is specified for L or U or when the lower/upper limit frequency is not properly specified, program memory scanning is not performed properly. Even during scanning, you can adjust the squelch in the following procedure:
Tap [SQL] Adjust squelch with v Tap [SQL]
i S c a n n n g F u n c t i o n 39 FCC ID: K6620345X40 IC: 511B-20345X40 Searching for a Signal Using a Signal Strength Graph Band Scope Function During mono band reception in the VFO mode, use states of channels (strengths of channel signals) around the current frequency set as center [] can be graphically displayed on screen. 1 Tap [V/M]. 2 Tap [SCOPE]. 3 Turn the O knob to move the icon to the signal The mode switches to Mono Band. The SCOPE screen appears. position. The signal at the center frequency can be received. 4 Tap [SCOPE]. The Band Scope is deactivated. Reference When band scope channel is 5, numeric values representing signal strengths are displayed in the graph. The band scope channel interval is the same as the VFO frequency step. The band scope channel interval can be changed in Setup Menu, [Display] [3 BAND SCOPE]. i S c a n n n g F u n c t i o n 40 FCC ID: K6620345X40 IC: 511B-20345X40 Useful Functions Dual Reception (DW) Functions This FTM-400DR supports the following two dual reception functions:
(1) Dial dual reception
(2) Memory dual reception The signal of the specified memory channel (Home Channel) is checked at intervals of about 5 seconds. If this signal is detected, it is received. Example: Checking Home Channel while receiving [145.500MHz]. Frequency being received The signal of the Home Channel is checked at intervals of about 5 seconds. If the signal of the Home Channel is received, the decimal point blinks. Dial Dual Reception VFO mode Home channel 1 Adjust to frequency desired for reception. Adjust to the frequency to receive using O knob. 2 Press F shortly. 3 Tap [DW]. If [DW] is not displayed in the Function menu, tap
[NEXT]. The Function Menu appears. 4 Dual reception starts. When a signal of the home channel is received, the frequency changes to that of the The signal of home channel is received around every 5 seconds. home channel. To cancel the dual reception, press F shortly again and tap [DW]. U s e f u l F u n c t i o n s 41 FCC ID: K6620345X40 IC: 511B-20345X40 Dual Reception (DW) Functions Memory Dual Reception Memory channel Home Channel 1 Switch to Memory Mode. 2 Adjust to the memory channel to recieve. Adjust to the memory channel to receive using O knob. 3 Press F shortly. 4 Tap [DW]. The Function Menu appears. If [DW] is not displayed in the function menu, tap
[NEXT]. 5 Dual reception starts. When a signal of the home channel is received, the frequency changes to that of the The signal of home channel is received around every 5 seconds. home channel. To cancel the dual reception, press F shortly again and tap [DW]. Precaution
Make sure to set home channel prior to using memory dual reception. Reference If a signal of dual reception is received , its frequency is received for 5 seconds and then dual reception resumes. Even while receiving the home channel, dual reception can be canceled by pressing [PTT] on the microphone and can perform transmission using that frequency. The operation to perform when dual reception is running can be set in the [SCAN] [1 DUAL WATCH STOP] of the Setup Menu. Using the DTMF Function. DTMF (Dual Tone Multi Frequency) tones refer to the tones (beep boop beep) heard from the receiver of the push-button phone. You can register the telephone number for phone patch connection to the public telephone line, etc. with a DTMF code comprising up to 16 characters (for up to 9 channels). 1 Press ad hold M over 1 second. 2 Tap [SIGNALING]. 3 Tap [4 DTMF MEMORY]. The Setup Menu appears. The DTMF Memory screen appears. Reference This can also be selected by pressing the O. U s e f u l F u n c t i o n s 42 FCC ID: K6620345X40 IC: 511B-20345X40 4 Tap a channel to select. Select a number (1-9) to which the DTMF code is to Using the DTMF Function. be registered. 5 Tap the DTMF Code to register. Tap the numerical keypad and enter the DTMF code o register. Reference The DTMF code can also be entered using the numerical keypad on the Microphone. Tap [Cancel] if an incorrect number is entered. The DTMF code is registered to the selected number. 6 Tap [ENT]. 7 Press and hold M over 1 second. Returns to the previous screen. The Setup Menu appears. Sending the Registered DTMF Code 1 Press and hold M over 1 second. 2 Tap [SIGNALING]. 3 Tap [3 AUTO DIALER] and select [ON]. Tapping [3 AUTO DIALER] switches between [ON]
and [OFF]. Reference This can also be selected by pressing the O. 4 Press and hold M over 1 second. Returns to the previous screen. 5 Press F shortly. 6 Tap [DTMF]. The Function Menu appears. If [DTMF] is not displayed in the function menu, tap
[NEXT]. Tapping [DTMF] switches through registered DTMF Codes. 7 Press F shortly. Returns to the previous screen. 8 Press [PTT]. Pressing [PTT] on the Microphone automatically sends DTMF code. 9 Release [PTT]. Even after [PTT] on the microphone is released, sending of the DTMF signal continues until it is completed. U s e f u l F u n c t i o n s 43 FCC ID: K6620345X40 IC: 511B-20345X40 Sending a DTMF Code Manually 1 Press and hold M over 1 second. 2 Tap [SIGNALING]. 3 Tap [3 AUTO DIALER] and select [OFF]. The Setup Menu appears. Tapping [3 AUTO DIALER] switches between [ON]
and [OFF]. 4 Press and hold M over 1 second. Returns to the previous screen. 5 Select a number from [1] through [9] while pressing
[PTT]
Tap the numerical keypad and enter the DTMF code to send. 6 Release [PTT]. Even after [PTT] on the microphone is released, sending of the DTMF signal U s e f u l F u n c t i o n s continues until it is completed. Reference A DTMF code is a combination of two frequencies. 697Hz 770Hz 852Hz 941Hz 1209Hz 1 4 7
1336Hz 2 5 8 0 1477Hz 3 6 9
1633Hz A B C D 44 FCC ID: K6620345X40 IC: 511B-20345X40 Communicating with a Specific Remote Station Using the Tone Squelch Function The tone squelch opens the squelch only when a signal containing the specified frequency tone is received. Use of the digital code squelch (DCS) opens the squelch only when a signal containing the specified DCS code is received. The tone squelch function blocks monitoring of communications between other stations even when waiting for call by a specific station for a long time. 1 Press F shortly. 2 Tap [SQL] to select a squelch type. The Function Menu appears. The squelch type changes in the following order each time [SQL] is tapped:
[NOISE] [T-TX] [T-TRX] [T-REV]
[D-TRX PRGM] [PAGER] [JR] [D-TX]
[TT/DR] [DT/TR]
The display for [SQL] changes according to the selected squelch type. 3 Press F shortly. The squelch type is set and the screen returns to the previous one. Reference The tone squelch setting or the DCS setting is also effective for scanning. If scanning is performed with the tone squelch or the DCS function turned on, it stops only when a signal containing a tone of the specified frequency or a signal containing the specified DCS code is received. Display Operation NOISE T-TX T-TRX T-REV D-TRX PRGM PAGER JR D-TX TT/DR DT/TR XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX. XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX. XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX. XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX. XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX. Turns on a new pager function (PAG appears). When using FTM-400DR with your friends, specifying personal codes
(each code is composed of two tones) allows calling a specific station. Turns on the no-communication squelch function of the JR radio (JR appears). Mutes the 2280 MHz no-communication signal tone which is heard when no communication is performed. XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX. XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX. XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX. C o m m u n c a i t i n g w i t h a S p e c i f i c R e m o t e S t a t i o n 45 FCC ID: K6620345X40 IC: 511B-20345X40 The Setup Menu appears. Using the Tone Squelch Function Selecting a Tone Frequency The Tone frequency can be selected from 50 frequencies between 67.0Hz to 254.1Hz. 1 Select the operating frequency. 2 Press and hold M over 1 second. 3 Tap [SIGNALING]. 4 Tap [1 TONE SQL FREQ]. 5 Select a frequency with the O. 6 Press O shortly. 7 Press and hold M over 1 second. Returns to the previous screen. The tone frequency is set and it appears in green. The tone frequency appears in orange. Reference The tone frequency set using the above-described procedure is also effective when only the tone is sent out. By default, the tone frequency is set to 88.5Hz. Searching for the Frequency of the Tone Squelch Used by the Remote Station The frequency of the tone squelch used by the remote station can be searched for and displayed. 1 Press F shortly. The Function Menu appears. 2 Tap [SQL] and select [T-TRX]. 3 Press F shortly. 4 Tap [SQL]. Search for the tone frequency starts. When a coincident frequency is detected, a beep is emitted and search stops temporarily. The detected tone frequency blinks. Tap until the [SQL] display switches to [T-TRX]. C o m m u n c a i t i n g w i t h a S p e c i f i c R e m o t e S t a t i o n Reference For the operation to perform when scanning stops, see Selecting a Reception Method When Scanning Stops on page (See page 000). 46 FCC ID: K6620345X40 IC: 511B-20345X40 Using the Tone Squelch Function The Setup Menu appears. Selecting a DCS Code You can select a DCS code from among 104 DCS codes (023 to 754). 1 Selecting the operating frequency. 2 Press and hold M over 1 second. 3 Tap [SIGNALING]. 4 Tap [2 DCS CODE]. The DCS code number appears in orange. 5 OSelect DCS code number with the O. 6 OPress O shortly. The DCS code is set and DCS code number appears in green. 7 Press and hold M over 1 second. Returns to the previous screen. Reference By default, the DCS code is set to 023. Searching for the Frequency of the DCS Used by the Remote Station The DCS code used by the remote station can be searched for and displayed. 1 Press F shortly. The Function Menu appears. 2 Tap [SQL] and select [D-TRX]. 3 Press F shortly. 4 Tap [SQL]. Search for the DCS code starts. When a coincident DCS code is found, a beep is Tap until the [SQL] display switches to [D-TRX]. emitted and search stops temporarily. The found DCS code blinks. Reference For the operation to perform when scanning stops, see Selecting a Reception Method When Scanning Stops on page (See page 000). C o m m u n c a i t i n g w i t h a S p e c i f i c R e m o t e S t a t i o n 47 FCC ID: K6620345X40 IC: 511B-20345X40 Notification of Call from a Remote Station by the Bell Call from a remote station (reception of a signal containing a coincident tone or DCS) can be notified by the bell sound and the b icon blinking on on screen. 1 Press and hold M over 1 second. 2 Tap [SIGNALING]. 3 Tap [7 BELL RINGER]. 4 Turn the O to select a number of times the bell The set value for BELL RINGER appears in orange. The Setup Menu appears. rings. The number of times the bell rings changes in the following order, each time O is rotated.
[OFF] [1time] [3times] [5times] [8times]
[CONTINUE]
The number of times the bell rings is set and appears in green. 5 Press O shortly. 6 Press and hold M over 1 second. Returns to the previous screen. Calling Only a Specific Station New Pager Function When using FTM-400DR with your friends, specifying personal codes (each code is composed of two CTCSS codes) allows only a specific station to be called. Even if the called person is not near his or her FTM-400DR, the information on the screen indicates that he or she has been called. Flow of Operation to Use the Pager Function Set the same code as that of the remote station. Determine a frequency. Perform transmission/reception. Confirm reception according to the information on the screen and the bell sound C o m m u n c a i t i n g w i t h a S p e c i f i c R e m o t e S t a t i o n 48 FCC ID: K6620345X40 IC: 511B-20345X40 Calling Only a Specific Station New Pager Function The Setup Menu appears. The code number appears in orange. The Pager Code Settings screen appears. Setting the Code of Your Station Set the personal code (your code) used to be called by other stations. 1 Press and hold M over 1 second. 2 Tap [SIGNALING]. 3 Tap [5 PAGER CODE]. 4 Tap [RX CODE 1]. 5 Select code with the O. 6 Press O shortly. 7 Tap [RX CODE 2]. 8 Turn the O to select a code. 9 Press O shortly. 10 Press and hold M over 1 second. Turn the O to select a code. Turn the O to select the first code from among 1-50 Turn the O to select the second code from among 1-50. The second code is set and appears in green. The first code is set and appears in green. The code number appears in orange. The code of your station is set and the screen returns to the previous one. Reference Factory Setting: [05 47]
The first and second codes contained in your personal code may be inverted, i.e., 05 47 and 47 05 are recognized as being the same code. If the same personal code (group code) is specified for all persons, all persons can be called at the same time. The Function Menu appears. Turning on the New Pager Function 1 Press F shortly. 2 Tap [SQL] and select [PAGER]. 3 Press F shortly. 4 Tap [SQL]. Now, you can call or wait a remote station using Tap until the [SQL] display switches to [PAGER]. C o m m u n c a i t i n g w i t h a S p e c i f i c R e m o t e S t a t i o n the new pager function. 49 FCC ID: K6620345X40 IC: 511B-20345X40 The Setup Menu appears. The Pager Code Settings screen appears. Calling Only a Specific Station New Pager Function Calling a Specific Station 1 Press and hold M over 1 second. 2 Tap [SIGNALING]. 3 Tap [5 PAGER CODE]. 4 Tap [TX CODE 1]. 5 Turn the O to select a code. 6 Press O shortly. 7 Tap [TX CODE 2]. 8 Turn the O to select a code. Turn the O to select the first code from among 1-50 Turn the O to select the second code from among 1-50. The first code is set and appears in green. The code number appears in orange. The code number appears in orange. The second code is set and appears in green. 9 Press O shortly. 10 Press and hold M over 1 second. 11 Tap [SQL]. 12 Press [PTT] on the microphone. This starts calling the remote station. The code of remote station is set and the screen returns to the previous one. C o m m u n c a i t i n g w i t h a S p e c i f i c R e m o t e S t a t i o n 50 FCC ID: K6620345X40 IC: 511B-20345X40 Calling Only a Specific Station New Pager Function Being Called by the Remote Station (Standby Operation) If you use the new pager function at the same frequency as that of the remote station,
[PAG] displayed on the screen changes to [PIN], allowing you to check that you have been called by the remote station. Blinks When called C o m m u n c a i t i n g w i t h a S p e c i f i c R e m o t e S t a t i o n 51 FCC ID: K6620345X40 IC: 511B-20345X40 Functions Used as Needed Setup Menu Settings for the Setup Menu The Setup Menu is a menu for selecting and setting various functions from a list for convenient use. Resetting the settings for the Setup Menu Settings for the Setup Menu can be reset to Factory Settings through the following operation:
1 Press and hold M over 1 second. 2 Tap [RESET/CLONE]. 3 Tap [1 FACTORY RESET]. 4 Tap [OK?]. 5 The FTM-400DR reboots. Setting content are reset and the FTM-400DR turns Tapping [Cancel] cancels resetting. The Setup Menu appears. off once. Shortly afterwards, the FTM-400DR automatically restarts. Setup Menu Operations List Set Mode Number / Items Function Description Selectable Items
(Bold Letter are Factory Setting Values) F u n c t i o n s U s e d a s N e e d e d DISPLAY 1 DISPLAY SELECT Screen display setting for when M is pressed shortly. NAVIGATION: ON / OFF TIMER/CLOCK: ON / OFF ALTITUDE: ON / OFF GPS INFORMATION: ON / OFF GREEN / BLUE / ORANGE /
PURPLE / GRAY NARROW / WIDE Setting for screen background color. Setting for screen display when SCOPE is executed. Setting for frequency bandwidth Setting for LCD brightness Setting for LCD contrast 3 / 2 / 1 / 0 / +1 / +2 / +3 Setting for display content (Time/Voltage) MIN / 2 / 3 / 4 / 5 / 6 / MAX TIME / VDD Reception mode switching AUTO / FM / NARROW FM / AM VOICE & DATA / FULL RATE (T.B.D.) 2 BACKGROUND COLOR 3 BAND SCOPE 4 LCD BRIGHTNESS 5 LCD CONTRAST 6 TIME/VDD TX/RX 1 MODE DIGITAL 1 DIGITAL MODE 52 FCC ID: K6620345X40 IC: 511B-20345X40 Set Mode Number / Items Function Description Selectable Items
(Bold Letter are Factory Setting Values) TX/RX Setup Menu DIGITAL 2 SQL TYPE 3 SQL CODE 4 PROFILE SEL 5 PROFILE DIGITAL 6 DISTINATION MODE 7 DISTINATION CALL 8 POSITION DATA VOICE 9 POSITION DATA ONLY AUDIO 1 MIX/SEPARATE 2 SUB BAND MUTE 3 MIC GAIN Setting for Reception Audio Setting for Sub Band Mute Adjustment for microphone Input MEMORY 1 MEMORY CH DISPLAY Setting for memory channel display 2 ALPHA TAG SIZE 3 MEM EDIT 4 MEM SCAN TYPE SIGNALING 1 TONE SQL FREQ 2 DCS CODE 3 AUTO DIALER 4 DTMF MEMORY 5 PAGER CODE 6 PRG REV TONE 7 BELL RINGER Setting for the display size of memory channel tag Transitions to Memory Editor screen Memory channel setting for when memory is scanned Setting for tone frequency Setting for DCS Code Setting for automatic transmission of DTMF Code Registration of DTMF Code Setting for pager individual code Output setting for the Bell Function OFF / CODE / BREAK CODE: 001 to 126 DIGTAL / APRS / GSMS PROFILE: XXXXXXXXXX CQ / CALLSIGN / GROUP 10 characters for each CALL1 to CALL8 ON / OFF ON / OFF MIX / SEPARATE OFF / ON
(Mutes SUB BAND for both transmission and reception) MIN / LOW / NORMAL / HIGH / MAX ALL / INBAND
(ALL: Displays all memory channels INBAND: Only displays memory channels within BAND) SMALL / LARGE F u n c t i o n s U s e d a s N e e d e d ALL MEM / SELECT MEM 67Hz to 254.1Hz Default 88.5Hz 023 to 754 OFF / ON 1 to 9 channels 16 characters each RX CODE1 (05), CODE (47) TX CODE1 (05), CODE2 (47) 300Hz to 3000Hz OFF / 1time / 3times / 5times / 8times /
CONTINUOUS 53 FCC ID: K6620345X40 IC: 511B-20345X40 Setup Menu Set Mode Number / Items Function Description Selectable Items
(Bold Letter are Factory Setting Values) SIGNALING 8 SQL EXPANTION OFF / ON Setting for separate Squelch Type in transmission and reception. 9 WX ALERT OFF / ON For USA models only WiRES X 1 DUAL WATCH STOP 2 SCAN DIRECTION 3 SCAN RESUME CONFIG 1 DATE & TIME ADJ AUTO / HOLD UP / DOWN BUSY / HOLD / 1sec / 3 sec / 5sec Setting for the internal clock function of the FTM-400DR Date 'xx-xx-xx (xxx) Time xx: xx 2 DATE & TIME FORMAT Setting for display format of the internal clock function 3 TIME ZONE Setting for Time Zone 4 AUTO RPT SHIFT 5 RPT SHIFT 6 RPT SHIFT FREQ 7 FM AM STEP Setting for automatic repeater shift Setting for repeater shift direction Setting for repeater shift width DATE: yyyy/mm/dd /
yyyy/dd/mm / mm/dd/yyyy /
dd/mm/yyyy TIME: 24 hour / 12 hour UTC13h (0.5h Step) UTC+900 TOKYO OFF / ON OFF / / +
0.00 - 99.95MHz This default setting is based on Band specification(50KHz step). Setting for channel step AUTO / 5.00KHz / 6.25KHz /
8 BEEP 9 CLOCK TYPE Setting for beep sound output Setting for clock shift 10 MIC PRG KEY Setting for P button on microphone 8.33KHz / 9.00KHz / 10.00KHz / 12.50KHz /
15.00KHz / 20.00KHz / 25.00KHz /
50.00KHz / 100.00KHz / 200.00KHz OFF / LOW / HIGH A / B A: Clock shift operation AUTO B: Clock Clock shift operation forced ON P1: OFF / BAND SCOPE / SCAN / HOME /
DCS CODE / TONE FREQ / RPT SHIFT /
REVERSE / TX POWER /
SQL OFF / T-CALL (CE) / VOICE /
WiRES / PRG FREQ or WX / S.LIST /
MSG / REPLY / M.EDIT P2: OFF / BAND SCOPE / SCAN / HOME /
DCS CODE / TONE FREQ /
RPT SHIFT / REVERSE /
TX POWER / SQL OFF / T-CALL /
VOICE / WiRES / PRG FREQ or WX /
S.LIST / MSG / REPLY / M.EDIT F u n c t i o n s U s e d a s N e e d e d 54 FCC ID: K6620345X40 IC: 511B-20345X40 Set Mode Number / Items Function Description CONFIG 10 MIC PRG KEY Setting for P button on microphone 11 RX COVERRAGE Setting for bandwidth during Scope operation 12 UNIT 13 APO 14 TOT Setting for APO operation time Setting for Time Out timer 15 BLUETOOTH PAIRING Setting for DIAL 16 GPS DATUM 17 GPS DEVICE 18 GPS LOG 19 .X-BAND REPEATER DATA operation of PIN Code Select a datum used for GPS Function Setting for access time to GPS INTERNAL / EXTERNAL ON / OFF 1 / 2 / 5 / 10 / 30 / 60 seconds Execute .X-BAND REPEATER 1 COM PORT SETTING Setting for COM PORT SPEED: 4800 / 9600 / 19200bps Setup Menu Selectable Items
(Bold Letter are Factory Setting Values) P3: OFF / BAND SCOPE / SCAN / HOME /
DCS CODE / TONE FREQ /
RPT SHIFT / REVERSE / TX POWER /
SQL OFF / T-CALL / VOICE / WiRES /
PR FREQ or WX / S.LIST / MSG /
REPLY / M.EDIT P4: OFF / BAND SCOPE / SCAN / HOME /
DCS CODE / TONE FREQ / RPT SHIFT /
REVERSE / TX POWER / SQL OFF /
T-CALL / VOICE / WiRES / PRG FREQ or WX / S.LIST / MSG / REPLY / M.EDIT NORMAL / WIDE
(NORMAL: Displays Ham Band only WIDE: Displays all bands) METRIC / INCH OFF / 0.5 hour to 12.0 hour
(0.5 hour Step) OFF / 5min to 30min (5min Step) depending on specification BLUETOOTH PAIRING: Select PIN Code with DIAL operation WGS-84 / TOKYO MEAN OUTPUT: OFF (camera) /
GPS OUT / PACKET OUT / WAYPOINT INPUT: OFF / WP FORMAT: NMEA6 / NMEA7 / NMEA8 /
NMEA9 WP FILTER: ALL / MOBILE / FREQ /
OBJ/ITEM / DIGI / VOIP / WEATHER /
YAESU / C RINGER / R RINGER APRS: MAIN BAND / SUB BAND /
A-BAND FIX / B-BAND FIX /
A=TX/R=RX / A=RX/R=TX DATA: MAIN BAND / SUB BAND / A-BAND FIX / B-BAND FIX / A=TX/R=RX /
A=RX/R=TX F u n c t i o n s U s e d a s N e e d e d 55 2 DATA BAND SELECT Setting for band selection of APRS/DATA 3 DATA SPEED 4 DATA SQUELCH Setting for APRS/DATA transmission port rate Setting for digital repeater route APRS: 1200 bps / 9600 bps DATA: 1200 bps / 9600 bps APRS: RX BAND / TX/RX BAND DATA: RX BAND / TX/RX BAND TX: ON / OFF FCC ID: K6620345X40 IC: 511B-20345X40 Setup Menu Set Mode Number / Items Function Description Selectable Items
(Bold Letter are Factory Setting Values) APRS 1 APRS COMPASS 2 APRS DISTINATION 3 APRS FILTER NORTH UP / HEADING UP Operation Setting for APRS compass Display of Model Code APY100 (Fixed) Setting for filter function Mic-E: ON / OFF POSITION: ON / OFF WEATHER: ON / OFF OBJECT: ON / OFF ITEM: ON / OFF STATUS: ON / OFF OTHER: ON / OFF RANGE LIMIT: ON / OFF ALTNET: ON / OFF OFF / ON OFF / ON BEACON: OFF / 3 sec / 5 sec /
10 sec / HOLD MYPACKET: OFF / ON BEACON: OFF / LCD COLOR /
WHITE-BLUE / SKY-BLUE /
MARINE-BLUE / GREEN /
YELLOW-GREEN / ORANGE /
AMBER / WHITE MOBILE: OFF / LCD COLOR /
WHITE-BLUE / SKY-BLUE /
MARINE-BLUE / GREEN /
YELLOW-GREEN / ORANGE /
AMBER / WHITE OBJ/ITEM: OFF / LCD COLOR /
WHITE-BLUE / SKY-BLUE /
MARINE-BLUE / GREEN /
YELLOW-GREEN / ORANGE /
AMBER / WHITE CAL RING: OFF / LCD COLOR /
WHITE-BLUE / SKY-BLUE /
MARINE-BLUE / GREEN /
YELLOW-GREEN / ORANGE /
AMBER / WHITE RNG RING: OFF / LCD COLOR /
WHITE-BLUE / SKY-BLUE /
MARINE-BLUE / GREEN /
YELLOW-GREEN / ORANGE /
AMBER / WHITE MY PACKET: OFF / LCD COLOR /
WHITE-BLUE / SKY-BLUE /
MARINE-BLUE / GREEN /
YELLOW-GREEN / ORANGE /
AMBER / WHITE 4 APRS MODEM 5 APRS MUTE 6 APRS POP-UP Setting for APRS port rate ON/OFF setting for B Band AF Mute when setting the APRS Setting for Beacon type to display as Pop-Up 7 APRS POP-UP COLOR Setting for background color of beacon that appears on Pop-up. F u n c t i o n s U s e d a s N e e d e d 56 FCC ID: K6620345X40 IC: 511B-20345X40 Set Mode Number / Items Function Description Selectable Items
(Bold Letter are Factory Setting Values) Setup Menu APRS 8 APRS RINGER Setting for bell sound for when there is a incoming beacon. 9 APRS RINGER (CALL) Call Sign setting for 10 APRS TXDELAY 11 APRS UNITS CALL RINGER Setting for the data delivery delay time Unit setting for APRS display 12 BEACON INF SELECT Setting for transmission beacon information 13 BEACON STATUS TXT Input setting for Status Text 14 BEACON TX Switching between automatic and manual transmission of beacon TX BEACON: ON / OFF RX BEACON: ON / OFF MY PACKET: ON / OFF CALL RINGER: ON / OFF RNG RINGER: 1-100 / OFF 1 to 8 stations 100ms / 150ms / 200ms / 250ms / 300ms /
400ms / 500ms / 750ms / 1000ms POSITION: mm/ss DISTANCE: km / mile SPEED: km/h / knot / mph ALTITUDE: m / ft BARO: hPa/mb/mmHg/inHg TEMP: C / F RAIN: mm / inch WIND: m/s / mph / knot AMBIGUITY: OFF / 1-4digit SPD/CSE: ON / OFF ALTITUDE: ON / OFF SELECT: TEXT1-5 / OFF TX RATE: 1/1-1/8 1/2 (FREQ) -
1/8(FREQ), TEXT1-TEXT5 AUTO: OFF / ON / SMART INTERVAL: 30sec-60min Default 5min PROPORTIONAL: ON / OFF DECAY: ON / OFF LOW SPEED: 1-99 (5km/h or 3mph) RATE LIMIT: 5-180sec Default 30sec 15 DIGI PATH SELECT 16 DIGI PATH 1 17 DIGI PATH 2 18 DIGI PATH 3 19 DIGI PATH 4 20 DIGI PATH FULL 1 21 DIGI PATH FULL 2 22 PROFILE 23 MY POSITION SET 24 MY POSITION 25 MY SYMBOL Setting for digital repeater route Address setting for digital repeater route Position setting of your station Manual position setting of your station Setting for the symbol of your station OFF / WIDE1-1 / WIDE1-1.WIDE2-1 /
PATH1-PATH4 / FULL1 / FULL2 ADDR1: ADDR2: No Input ADDR1: ADDR2: No Input ADDR1: ADDR2: No Input ADDR1: ADDR2: No Input ADDR1: -ADDR8: No Input ADDR1: -ADDR8: No Input xxxxxx-xx GPS / MANUAL /
POINT MEM GR1-1to GR4-4 Latitude: x xxxx' xx"
Longitude: x xxxxx' xx"
ICON1/> Car /
ICON2: [/R] REC.Vehicle /
ICON3: [/-] House QTH (VHF) /
USER: [YY] Yaesu Radios F u n c t i o n s U s e d a s N e e d e d 57 FCC ID: K6620345X40 IC: 511B-20345X40 Setup Menu Set Mode Number / Items Function Description Selectable Items
(Bold Letter are Factory Setting Values) APRS 26 POSITION COMMENT Setting for position comments 27 SmartBeaconing Setting for Smart Beaconing 28 SORT FILTER Setting for Sort Function and Filter Function 29 VOICE ALERT Setting for Voice Alert Function OPTION 1 BLUETOOTH Setting for BLUETOOTH headset. 2 VOICE MEMORY Setting for Voice Memory Function Off Duty / En Route / In Service /
Returnings / Committed / Special /
Priority / Custom 0 to 6 / Emergency!
STATUS: OFF / TYPE1 / TYPE2 / TYPE3 LOW SPEED: 2-30 Default 5 HIGH SPEED: 3-70 Default 70 SLOW RATE: 1-100min Default 30min FAST RATE: 10-180 Default 120sec TURN ANGLE: 5-90 Default 28 TURN SLOPE: 1-255 Default 26 TURN TIME: 5-180sec Default 30sec SORT: TIME / CALLSIGN / DISTANCE FILTER: ALL / MOBILE /
FREQUENCY / OBJ/ITEM /
DIGIPEATER / VOIP / WEATHER /
YAESU / OTHER PKT /
CALL RINGER / RNG RINGER /
1200bps / 9600bps V.ALERT: NORMAL / TONE SQL / DCS /
RX-TSQL / RX-DCS TSQL: 67.0Hz ~ 254.1Hz
(Default 100.0Hz) DCS: DCS023 ~ DCS754
(Default DCS023) AUDIO: AUTO / FIX MODE: MIX / SEPARATE BATTERY: NORMAL / SAVE VOX: ON /OFF GAIN: HIGH / LOW PLAY/REC: FREE 5min / LAST30sec ANNOUNCE: AUTO / MANUAL LANGUAGE: JAPANESE / ENGLISH VOLUME: HIGH / MID / LOW Write to SD / Read from SD /
FORMAT: To selection screen Write to SD / Read from SD /
FORMAT: To selection screen SD 1 BACK UP 2 GROUP ID RESET/CLONE 1 FACTORY RESET 2 PRESET Reset all settings to Factory Settings Resets all settings to Factory Settings
(Was ALL RESET in past models). To confirmation screen. Registers Preset screen Registration of Preset screen OK? / Cancel?
Recall Preset screen OK? or Cancel?, after selecting from a list. 3 RECALL PRESET Recalls Preset screen F u n c t i o n s U s e d a s N e e d e d 58 FCC ID: K6620345X40 IC: 511B-20345X40 Set Mode Number / Items Function Description Selectable Items
(Bold Letter are Factory Setting Values) Setup Menu RESET/CLONE 4 MEM CH RESET 5 MEM CH SORT 6 APRS RESET 7 CLONE Erases memory channels ALL MEM CH CLEAR: Only erases memory channels and keeps MENU content. To confirmation screen. Sorts memory channels. Sort A/B band memory channels. To confirmation screen. Resets APRS settings. Reset APRS settings. To confirmation screen. This radio other (TX) /
This radio other (RX) To selection screen Copies the setting content of your radio to other. The Setup Menu appears. Apply settings to contents displayed on screen. Setting content displayed on screen when M is pressed shortly. 1 Press and hold M over 1 second. 2 Tap [DISPLAY]. 3 Tap [1 DISPLAY SELECT]. 4 Tap an item to display. Select the screen to display from [NAVIGATION]
The display settings for the screen appears.
[TIMER/CLOCK] [ALTITUDE] [GPS INFOR]. Tapping an item switches between [ON] and [OFF]. 5 Set other screens. Repeat Step 4 to set other screens. 6 Press and hold M over 1 second. The displayed screen is set and the screen returns to the previous one. Reference Factory Settings: All screens are set to [OFF]. F u n c t i o n s U s e d a s N e e d e d 59 FCC ID: K6620345X40 IC: 511B-20345X40 Setup Menu Setting the Background Color of the Screen The background color for the screen can be selected from the following 5 colors:
Green Blue Orange Purple Grey 1 Press and hold M over 1 second. 2 Tap [DISPLAY]. 3 Tap [2 BACKGROUND COLOR] and select a The Setup Menu appears. background color. The background color changes in the following order each time [2 BACKGROUND COLOR] is tapped.
[GREEN] [BLUE] [ORANGE] [PURPLE]
[GRAY]
4 Press and hold M over 1 second. The background color is set and the screen returns to the previous one. Reference Factory Settings: All screens are set to [GREEN]. Setting the Frequency Width for Band Scope The frequency band width to be displayed when Band Scope is operated can be set. 1 Press and hold M over 1 second. 2 Tap [DISPLAY]. 3 Tap [3 BAND SCOPE] and select frequency band The Setup Menu appears. width. Frequency band width switches between [NARROW]
and [WIDE] each time [3 BAND SCOPE] is tapped. NARROW: Frequency band width appears in a narrow search width. WIDE: Frequency band width appears in a wide search width. 4 Press and hold M over 1 second. The frequency band width is set and the screen returns to the previous one. Reference Factory Setting: [NARROW]
F u n c t i o n s U s e d a s N e e d e d 60 FCC ID: K6620345X40 IC: 511B-20345X40 The Setup Menu appears. Adjusting the LCD Backlight Brightness Level The brightness level of the LCD backlight can be adjusted. 1 Press and hold M over 1 second. 2 Tap [DISPLAY]. 3 Tap [4 LCD BRICHTNESS]. 4 Tap [] or [+] to adjust brightness. Select the brightness from [MIN], [2], [3], [4], [5], [6], The LCD Brightness Setting screen appears. and [MAX]. The selected brightness can be confirmed on screen. 5 Press and hold M over 1 second. The LCD Brightness is set and the screen returns to the previous one. Reference Factory Setting: [MAX]
The Setup Menu appears. Adjusting LCD Contrast The contrast level of the screen can be adjusted. 1 Press and hold M over 1 second. 2 Tap [DISPLAY]. 3 Tap [5 LCD CONTRAST]. 4 Tap [] or [+] to adjust contrast. Select the contrast from [3], [2], [1], [0], [+1], [+2], The LCD Contrast Setting screen appears. and [+3]. The selected contrast can be confirmed on screen. 5 Press and hold M over 1 second. The LCD contrast level is set the screen returns to the previous one. Reference Factory Setting: [0]
Setup Menu F u n c t i o n s U s e d a s N e e d e d 61 FCC ID: K6620345X40 IC: 511B-20345X40 Setup Menu Switching between Time and Voltage display The display on the top right of the screen can be switched between [Time Display] and
[Voltage Display]. 1 Press and hold M over 1 second. 2 Tap [DISPLAY]. 3 Tap [6 TIME/VDD] and select the display content. The display switchws between [TIME] and [VDD]
every time [6 TIME/VDD]. TIME: The Time appears. The Setup Menu appears. VDD: The voltage appears. 4 Press and hold M over 1 second. The display content is set and the screen returns to the precious one. Reference Factory Setting: [TIME]
Adjusting volume respectively to A/B Bands. The volume for A Band and B Band can be separately adjusted. Additionally, if your radio is connected to external speakers, the A/B Band Audio can be separated to left and right speakers. 1 Press and hold M over 1 second. 2 Tap [TX/RX]. 3 Tap [AUDIO]. 4 Tap [1 MIX/ SEPERATE] and select . Audio is switched between [MIX] and [SEPERATE]
The Setup Menu appears. each time [1 MIX/SEPERATE] is tapped. MIX: Simultaneously adjust volume for A Band and B Band. SEPERATE: Separately adjust volume for A Band and B Band. 5 Press and hold M over 1 second. The selected volume adjustment is set and the screen returns to the previous one. Reference Factory Setting: [MIX]
F u n c t i o n s U s e d a s N e e d e d 62 FCC ID: K6620345X40 IC: 511B-20345X40 Setting the Display Method for Memory Channels The display method for registered memory channels can be selected from the following 2 methods:
ALL: Displays all registered memory channels INBAND: Only displays memory channels within the band currently in use. Setup Menu The Setup Menu appears. 1 Press and hold M over 1 second. 2 Tap [MEMORY]. 3 Tap [1 MEMORY CH DISPLAY] and set the memory channels to display. Tapping [1 MEMORY CH DISPLAY] will switch between [ALL] and [INBAND]. 4 Press and hold M over 1 second. The display method for memory channels is set and the screen returns to the previous one. Reference Factory Setting: [ALL]
Setting the Squelch Type for transmission Preset squelch types can be used separately for transmission and reception. 1 Press and hold M over 1 second. 2 Tap [SIGNALING]. 3 Tap [8 SQL EXPANSION] and select between OFF/
The Setup Menu appears. ON. Tapping [8 SQL EXPANSION] switches between [ON]
and [OFF]. OFF: Use the same squelch type for transmission and reception. ON: Use separate squelch type for transmission and reception. 4 Press and hold M over 1 second. The squelch type for transmission and reception is set and the screen returns to the previous one. Reference Factory Setting: [OFF]
F u n c t i o n s U s e d a s N e e d e d 63 FCC ID: K6620345X40 IC: 511B-20345X40 The Setup Menu appears. The setting screen for date and time display appears. Setup Menu Setting the display format for the Clock Function The display format for the internal clock can be chosen from the following types:
Date Display: Month/Day/Year, Year/Month/Day, Day/Month/Year, Year/Day/Month Time Display: 24 Hour Display, 12 Hour Display 1 Press and hold M over 1 second. 2 Tap [CONFIG]. 3 Tap [2 DATA & TIME FORMAT]. 4 Tap [DATE]. 5 Tap format to be displayed. Select the display format for the Date. mmm/dd/yyyy: Date appears as Month/Day/Year yyy/mmm/dd: Date appears as Year/Month/Day dd/mmm/yyyy: Date appears as Day/Month/Year yyy/dd/mmm: Date appears as Year/Day/Month 6 Tap [BACK]. 7 Tap [TIME] and select the display format for time. The setting screen for date display format appears. Tapping [TIME] switches between [24 hour] and [12 hour]. 8 Press and hold M over 1 second. The Time and Date display format is set and the screen returns to the previous one. Reference Factory Setting: Date Display Format mm/dd/yyyy, Date Display Format 24 hour F u n c t i o n s U s e d a s N e e d e d 64 FCC ID: K6620345X40 IC: 511B-20345X40 Setup Menu Setting the Time Zone The internal clock can be set to time data from GPS (Coordinated Universal Time). On Factory Settings the internal clock is set to Japan Time (UTC+9:00 TOKYO) and does not need to be adjusted. The time zone can be adjusted in 0.5 hour units for up to 13 hours. 1 Press and hold M over 1 second. 2 Tap [CONFIG]. 3 Tap [3 TIME ZONE]. 4 Turn the O to adjust the time zone. Rotate the O and select the desired time zone for a The time zone appears in orange. The Setup Menu appears. oversea city. The time zone can be adjusted in 0.5 hour units for up to 13 hours. The time zone is set and displayed in green. 5 Press O shortly. 6 Press and hold M over 1 second. Returns to the previous screen. Reference Factory Setting: UTC+9:00 TOKYO Setting the Automatic Repeater Shift When using the repeater for communication, the automatic repeater shift function that automatically starts communication via the repeater can be set to ON/OFF. 1 Press and hold M over 1 second. 2 Tap [CONFIG]. 3 Tap [4 AUTO RPT SHIFT] and select between ON/
The Setup Menu appears. OFF. Tapping [4 AUTO RPT SHIFT] switches between [ON]
and [OFF]. ON: Automatically starts communication using repeater shift. OFF: Manually select tone frequency and start communication 4 Press and hold M over 1 second. The automatic repeater shift is set and the screen returns to the previous one. Reference Factory Setting: ON F u n c t i o n s U s e d a s N e e d e d 65 FCC ID: K6620345X40 IC: 511B-20345X40 Setup Menu Setting the Clock Shift of the Microcomputer You can set microcomputer clock signal so as not to receive as internal spurious by high frequency. Select [A] for normal time usage. 1 Press and hold M over 1 second. 2 Tap [CONFIG]. 3 Tap [9 CLOCK TYPE] and set A/B. The Setup Menu appears. Tapping [9 CLOCK TYPE] switches between [A] and
[B]. A: The clock shift function automatically switches between ON and OFF. B: The clock shift function is active at all times. 4 Press and hold M over 1 second. The clock type is set and the screen returns to the previous one. Reference Factory Setting: A Setting the Program Keys on the Microphone Assign functions to the program keys (P1 to P4) on the accessory microphone (MH-48). 1 Press and hold M over 1 second. 2 Tap [CONFIG]. 3 Tap [10 MIC PRG KEY]. The Setup Menu appears. The Microphone Program Keys setting screen appears. 4 Tap the Program key you would like to set. Tap the Program Key (P1 to P4) you would like to assign a function. The functions that can be assigned are displayed. If the function you would like to assign is not displayed, scroll the screen with [] and []. The function to assign to the program key is selected. 5 Tap the function you would like to assign. 6 Tap [BACK]. The screen returns to the program key (P1 to P4) selection. 7 Set functions for the other program keys. Repeat steps 4 to 6 and assign functions to other function keys. 8 Press and hold M over 1 second. The function is assigned to the program key and returns to the previous screen. Reference Factory Setting: P1: SQL OFF P2: HOME P3: RPT SHIFT P4: TX POWER F u n c t i o n s U s e d a s N e e d e d 66 FCC ID: K6620345X40 IC: 511B-20345X40 Setup Menu Setting the Bandwidth to Scope The Bandwidth for when scoping in VFO mode or Memory mode can be set. 1 Press and hold M over 1 second. 2 Tap [CONFIG]. 3 Tap [11 RX COVERAGE] to select NORMAL/WIDE. The Setup Menu appears. Tapping [11 RX COVERAGE] switches between
[NORMAL] and [WIDE]. NORMAL: Scopes Ham Band only. WIDE: Scopes all Bands. 4 Press and hold M over 1 second. The bandwidth to scope is set and the screen returns to the previous one. Reference Factory Setting: NORMAL The Setup Menu appears. Setting the unit of measurement to be displayed The unit of measurement can be set for displaying altitude, distance, and speed. 1 Press and hold M over 1 second. 2 Tap [CONFIG]. 3 Tap [12 UNIT] and select METRIC/INCH. Tapping [12 UNIT] switches between [METRIC] and
[INCH]. INCH: The unit of measurement appears in inch. METRIC: The unit of measurement appears in metric. 4 Press and hold M over 1 second. The unit of measurement is set and the screen returns to the previous one. Reference Factory Setting: METRIC F u n c t i o n s U s e d a s N e e d e d 67 FCC ID: K6620345X40 IC: 511B-20345X40 Setup Menu Automatically Turning Off the Power APO Function The FTM-400DR can be set so that it turns off automatically if you do not operate it for a certain period of time. You can change the time until the FTM-400DR is turned off automatically Use this function after setting the clock, referring to [Setting the Clock
(See page 21)]. 1 Press and hold M over 1 second. 2 Tap [CONFIG]. 3 Tap [13 APO]. The APO setting screen appears. 4 Tap [] or [+] to adjust the time. Specify the time until the FTM-400DR is turned off The Setup Menu appears. automatically in steps of 30 minutes. OFF / 30 min / 1 hour to 12 hours 5 Press and hold M over 1 second. The Auto Power Off function is set and the screen returns to the previous one. Reference Factory Setting: OFF Restricting the Continuous Transmission Time TOT Function The FTM-400DR can be set that it automatically returns to reception state after performing continuous transmission for a certain period of time. Accidental transmission of unnecessary radio waves and unwanted battery power consumption can be prevented (time-out timer function). 1 Press and hold M over 1 second. 2 Tap [CONFIG]. 3 Tap [14 TOT]. 4 Turn the O to set the time. The time display for TOT appears in orange. Turn the O to set the Time Out time in steps of 5 minutes. The Setup Menu appears. The time is set and displayed in green. OFF / 5 min to 30 min 5 Press O shortly. 6 Press and hold M over 1 second. Returns to the previous screen. Reference Factory Setting: 5 min F u n c t i o n s U s e d a s N e e d e d 68 FCC ID: K6620345X40 IC: 511B-20345X40 Setup Menu Setting PIN Code for a BLUETOOTH headset Using a BLUETOOTH headset requires setting its PIN code to the FTM-400DR. Reference The PIN code for a BLUETOOTH headset from our company is 6111. If the BLUETOOTH headset is not from our company, check the PIN code by refereeing to the instruction manual for that product. The Setup Menu appears. 1 Press and hold M over 1 second. 2 Tap [CONFIG]. 3 Tap [15 BLUETOOTH PAIRING]. PIN code input screen appears 4 Tap the numeric keys to input the PIN code. By tapping the numbers displayed on screen, input the 4 digit code. Reference Tap [Cancel] if incorrect number is entered. The PIN code is set. 5 Tap [ENT]. 6 Press and hold M over 1 second. Returns to the previous screen. Reference Factory Setting: 6111 Selecting Datum for GPS function. Select a datum used for the GPS function. 1 Press and hold M over 1 second. 2 Tap [CONFIG]. 3 Tap [16 GPS DATUM] to set a datum. The Setup Menu appears. Tapping [16 GPS DATUM] switches between [TOKYO MEAN] and [WGS 84]. WGS-84: The standard setting for worldwide standard. Select WGS-84 under normal operation. TOKYO MEAN: Enables reducing the error in positioning when using GPS in Japan
(Tokyo) 4 Press and hold M over 1 second. The datum for GPS is set and the screen returns to the previous one. F u n c t i o n s U s e d a s N e e d e d 69 FCC ID: K6620345X40 IC: 511B-20345X40 Setup Menu Setting the GPS Device to Use Before using the GPS function, select whether to use the internal GPS function of the FTM-400DR or a connected external GPS device. 1 Press and hold M over 1 second. 2 Tap [CONFIG]. 3 Tap [17 GPS DEVICE] and set the GPS device. Tapping [17 GPS DEVICE] switches between
[INTERNAL] and [EXTERNAL]. INTERNAL: Use the internal GPS function of the The Setup Menu appears. FTM-400DR. EXTERNAL: Use the connected external GPS device. 4 Press and hold M over 1 second. The GPS function (or device) is set and the screen returns to the previous one. Reference Factory Setting: INTERNAL The Setup Menu appears. Setting Time for Accessing GPS The time for accessing GPS for receiving signals and information can be set. 1 Press and hold M over 1 second. 2 Tap [CONFIG]. 3 Tap [18 GPS LOG]. 4 Tap [] or [+] to set the time. Set the time that the FTM-400DR accesses GPS. The FTM-400DR does not access GPS if [OFF] is tapped. The GPS LOG Time Setting screen appears. OFF/1 sec/2 sec/5 sec/10 sec/30 sec/60 sec 5 Press and hold M over 1 second. The access time to GPS is set and the screen returns to the previous one. Reference Factory Setting: 10 sec (when GPS antenna connected) OFF (when GPS antenna unconnected) F u n c t i o n s U s e d a s N e e d e d 70 FCC ID: K6620345X40 IC: 511B-20345X40 Setup Menu Communicating by crossing A Band and B band frequencies Audio can be transmitted with B Band (430MHz band) while receiving it with A Band
(144MHz band). Similarly, audio can be transmitted with A Band while receiving it with B Band. 1 Press and hold M over 1 second. 2 Tap [CONFIG]. 3 Tap [19 X-BAND REPEATER]. The Setup Menu appears. The X-BAND REPEATER confirmation screen appears. 4 Tap [OK?]. X-BAND REPEATER is activated. 5 Press and hold M over 1 second. Returns to the previous screen. To deactivate it, tap [Cancel]. Reference Factory Setting: OFF Setting USB Camera to Use. The FTM-400DR can capture images and video by connecting a USB camera and transmit/ receive them. You can set the picture size and quality for the USB camera you are going to use. 1 Press and hold M over 1 second. 2 Tap [OPTION]. 3 Tap [1 USB CAMERA]. The Setup Menu appears. The USB CAMERA setting screen appears. PICTURE SIZE: Set the picture size you will capture. PICTURE QUALITY: Set the image quality you will capture. 4 Tap [PICTURE SIZE] to set the picture size. Tapping [PICTURE SIZE] switches between [160 1120] and [320 240]. 5 Tap [PICTURE QUALITY] to set the picture quality. Tapping [PICTURE QUALITY] switches between
[NORMAL] and [HIGH]. 6 Press and hold M over 1 second. The picture settings for the USB Camera are set and the screen returns to the previous one. F u n c t i o n s U s e d a s N e e d e d 71 FCC ID: K6620345X40 IC: 511B-20345X40 Setup Menu Setting operations of BLUETOOTH Headset to Use You can set operations of the BLUETOOTH headset connected to the FTM-400DR. Setting content are as follows:
AUDIO: Set the audio output operation of the BLUETOOTH headset. BATTERY: Set the battery of the BLUETOOTH headset. VOX: Set the switching operation of the BLUETOOTH headset. GAIN: Set the VOX sensitivity of the BLUETOOTH headset. 1 Press and hold M over 1 second. 2 Tap [OPTION]. 3 Tap [2 BLUETOOTH]. 4 Tap [AUDIO] to set the audio output operation of the The BLUETOOTH Setting screen appears. The Setup Menu appears. headset. Tapping [AUDIO] switches between [AUTO] and [FIX]. AUTO: When the BLUETOOTH headset is connected, the audio is only heard through the headset. FIX: When the BLUETOOTH headset is connected, the audio is heard from both speakers and headset. 5 Tap [BATTERY] to set the battery usage condition of the headset. Tapping [BATTERY] switches between [NORMAL]
and [SAVE]. NORMAL: The battery save function for the BLUETOOTH headset is set to OFF. SAVE: The battery save function for the BLUETOOTH headset is set to ON. 6 Tap [VOX] to enable or disable the transmission and reception switching on the headset. Tapping [VOX] switches between [OFF] and [ON]. OFF: Transmission and reception cannot be switched on the BLUETOOTH headset. ON: Transmission and reception can be switched on the BLUETOOTH headset. Reference Selecting [ON] displays the option for selecting [GAIN]. 7 Tap [GAIN] to set the VOX sensitivity. Tapping [GAIN] switches between [HIGH] and [LOW]. HIGT: The VOX sensitivity for the BLUETOOTH headset is set to high. LOW: The VOX sensitivity for the BLUETOOTH headset is set to low. F u n c t i o n s U s e d a s N e e d e d 72 FCC ID: K6620345X40 IC: 511B-20345X40 8 Press and hold M over 1 second. The BLUETOOTH is set and the screenreturns to the previous one. Reference Factory Setting: AUDIO: AUTO BATTERY: NORMAL VOX: OFF GAIN: HIGH Setup Menu Setting Operations of the Voice Announcement Function You can set the operations of the Voice Announcement function equipped to the FTM-
400DR. Setting content are as follows:
PLAY/REC: Set conditions for Record/Play. ANNOUNCE: Set conditions for the Voice Announcement of frequency. LANGUAGE: Set the language to use for the Voice Announcement. VOLUME: Set the volume of the Voice Announcement. 1 Press and hold M over 1 second. 2 Tap [OPTION]. 3 Tap [3 VOICE MEMORY]. The VOICE MEMORY setting screen appears. 4 Tap [PLAY/REC] to set the Record/Play time. The Setup Menu appears. Tapping [PLAY/REC] switches between [FREE5min]
and [LAST30sec]. FREE5min: With 8 recording areas, the total of 5 minutes can be recorded. LAST30sec: Records the last 30 seconds before
[ STOP] is pressed. 5 Tap [ANNOUNCE] to set the Voice Announcement of frequency. Tapping [ANNOUNCE] switches between [AUTO],
[OFF], and [MANUAL]. AUTO: The frequency is announced by voice when
[VOICE] is tapped or Band is changed. OFF: The frequency is not announced by voice. MANUAL: The frequency is announced by voice when [VOICE] is tapped. F u n c t i o n s U s e d a s N e e d e d 73 FCC ID: K6620345X40 IC: 511B-20345X40 Setup Menu 6 Tap [LANGUAGE] to set the language for the Voice Announcement. Tapping [LANGUAGE] switches between [JAPANESE] and [ENGLISH]. JAPANESE: Announces the frequency in Japanese. ENGLISH: Announces the frequency in English. 7 Tap [VOLUME] to set the volume of Voice Announcement. Tapping [VOLUME] switches among [HIGH], [MID], and [LOW]. HIGH: The volume of Voice Announcement is set to [HIGH]. MID: The volume of Voice Announcement is set to [MEDIUM]. HIGH: The volume of Voice Announcement is set to [LOW]. 8 Press and hold M over 1 second. The settings for the Voice Announcement Function are set and the screen returns to the previous one. Reference Factory Setting: PLAY/REC: FREE 5 min ANNOUNCE: AUTO LANGUAGE: JAPANESE VOLUME: HIGH Writing Group ID to microSD Memory Card Group ID information registered to the FTM-400DR can be written to microSD memory card. Additionally, Group ID information saved to the microSD memory card can be read to the internal memory of the FTM-400DR. 1 Press and hold M over 1 second. 2 Tap [SD]. 3 Tap [2 GROUP ID]. 4 Tap an item to select. The GROUP ID Selection screen appears. The Setup Menu appears. Tap each item to select. Write to SD: Write group ID information registered to the FTM-400DR to microSD memory card. Read to SD: Read and register Group IDs saved to the microSD memory card to FTM-400DR. FORMAT: Format the microSD memory card. F u n c t i o n s U s e d a s N e e d e d The selected items are activated. To cancel the operation, tap [Cancel]. 5 Tap [OK?]. 6 Press and hold M over 1 second. Returns to the previous screen. Reference Factory Setting: FORMAT 74 FCC ID: K6620345X40 IC: 511B-20345X40 Setup Menu The Setup Menu appears. Registering Preset Only one current setting, such as frequency or memory channel can be registered to Preset. 1 Press and hold M over 1 second. 2 Tap [RESET/CLONE]. 3 Tap [2 PRESET]. 4 Tap [OK?]. 5 Press and hold M over 1 second. Returns to the previous screen. The PRESET screen is registered. To cancel the registration, tap [Cancel]. The Preset registration confirmation screen appears. The Setup Menu appears. Recalling the Registered Preset. The registered Preset screen can be recalled from the Setup Menu. 1 Press and hold M over 1 second. 2 Tap [RESET/CLONE]. 3 Tap [3 RECALL PRESET]. 4 Tap the Preset screen to recall. The list of registered Preset screens appears. Tap the Preset screen to recall from the list of Preset screens. The screen registered to Preset appears on screen. To cancel recalling, tap [Cancel]. F u n c t i o n s U s e d a s N e e d e d 75 FCC ID: K6620345X40 IC: 511B-20345X40 Setup Menu Deleting Memory Channels You can delete only registered memory channels. Information besides memory channel, such as menu content or setting items, cannot be deleted. Reference To reset all settings and information to Factory Settings, tap [RESET/CLONE] and then [1 FACTORY RESET]. Doing so resets all registered information to default settings. The memory channel deletion confirmation screen appears. The Setup Menu appears. 1 Press and hold M over 1 second. 2 Tap [RESET/CLONE]. 3 Tap [4 MEM CH RESET]. 4 Tap [OK?]. All memory channels are deleted. To cancel deletion, tap [Cancel]. 5 Press and hold M over 1 second. Returns to the previous screen. The Setup Menu appears. Sorting Registered Memory Channels in Order. You can sort the registered memory channels in order. 1 Press and hold M over 1 second. 2 Tap [RESET/CLONE]. 3 Tap [5 MEM CH SORT]. 4 Tap [OK?]. The memory channels are sorted in order of lowest frequency. To cancel sorting, tap [Cancel]. 5 The FTM-400DR restarts_. The FTM-400DR turns off once, then restarts automatically. F u n c t i o n s U s e d a s N e e d e d 76 FCC ID: K6620345X40 IC: 511B-20345X40 Setup Menu The Setup Menu appears. Deleting Settings Configured for APRS Function. You can delete all information for settings configured for the APRS function. 1 Press and hold M over 1 second. 2 Tap [RESET/CLONE]. 3 Tap [6 APRS RESET]. 4 Tap [OK?]. Settings information for the APRS Function are The deletion confirmation screen appears. deleted. To cancel deletion, tap [Cancel]. 5 Press and hold M over 1 second. Returns to the previous screen. The Clone Function For copying settings to another FTM-400DR Information registered to this FTM-400DR can be copied to other FTM-400DR. Additionally, information registered to other FTM-400DR can be copied to this FTM-400DR. 1 Turn off the FTM-400DR and connect the Clone Cable. Connect this FTM-400DR with another FTM-400DR with the Clone Cable. Turn on the power of both FTM-400DR. 2 Press P. 3 Press and hold M over 1 second. 4 Tap [RESET/CLONE]. 5 Tap [7 CLONE]. 6 Tap [This radio other (X)] for the sending FTM-400DR (copy source). Tap [This radio other (X)] for the receiving FTM-400DR (copy destination). 7 Tap [OK?]. Copying (Cloning) starts. Once copying (Cloning) is complete, [COMPLETE] appears on screen. 8 Turn off the power of FTM-400DR and disconnect the cable. To cancel Cloning, tap [Cancel]. F u n c t i o n s U s e d a s N e e d e d 77 FCC ID: K6620345X40 IC: 511B-20345X40 Setup Menu Reference If [ERROR] appears while copying (Cloning), check the connection of the Clone cable and restart the operation from the beginning. If copying (Cloning) is abnormally aborted due to power failure, the receiving FTM-400DR will be automatically reset all information. Check that there are no abnormalities with the power and restart operation from the beginning. F u n c t i o n s U s e d a s N e e d e d 78 FCC ID: K6620345X40 IC: 511B-20345X40 FTM-400DR Specifications General Frequency Range:
RX:
108 - 137 MHz, 137 - 174 MHz, 174 - 222 MHz, 222 - 420 MHz, 420 - 470 MHz, 800 - 999 MHz (Cellular Blocked) 144 - 148 MHz, 430 - 450 MHz 5/6.25/10/12.5/15/20/25/50/100 kHz F1D, F2D, F3E, F7W 50 , unbalanced 2.5 ppm (20 C to +60 C) TX:
Channel Steps:
Mode of Emission:
Antenna Impedance:
Frequency Stability:
Operating Temperature Range: 20 C to +60 C Supply Voltage:
Current Consumption (Approx.):
RX:
11 - 16 V DC (Negative Ground) 500 mA (Analog) 600 mA (Digital) 9.4 A (144 MHz / Analog) 9.5 A (144 MHz / Digital) 10.2 A (430 MHz / Analog) 10.3 A (430 MHz / Digital) TX:
Case Size (W H D):
Panel:
Rear Chassis:
Weight (Approx.):
Transmitter Output Power:
Modulation Type:
Maximum Deviation:
Spurious Radiation:
Modulation Distortion:
Microphone Impedance:
Receiver Circuit Type:
Intermediate Frequency:
140(W) 72(H) 20(D) mm (w/o knob & connectors) 140(W) 40(H) 125(D) mm (w/o connectors) 1150g (Panel + Rear Chassis + Connection Cable) 50 W (144 / 430 MHz), 20 W (144 / 430MHz) 5 W (144 / 430 MHz) Variable Reactance 5 KHz, better than 60 dB less than 3%
2 k Double-conversion super heterodyne (N-FM / AM) 1st: A- Band 47.25 MHz (N-FM / AM) 1st: B- Band 44.85 MHz (N-FM / AM) 2nd: 450 kHz (N-FM / AM) F T M
4 0 0 D R S p e c i f i c a t i o n s 79 FCC ID: K6620345X40 IC: 511B-20345X40 (10 dB S/N, AM)
(12 dB SINAD, N-FM)
(12 dB SINAD, N-FM)
(12 dB SINAD, N-FM)
(12 dB SINAD, N-FM)
(10 dB S/N, AM)
(12 dB SINAD, N-FM)
(12 dB SINAD, N-FM)
(12 dB SINAD, N-FM)
(12 dB SINAD, N-FM)
(12 dB SINAD, N-FM) 108 - 137 MHz: 0.80 V 137 - 140 MHz: 0.20 V 140 - 150 MHz: 0.16 V 150 - 174 MHz: 0.25 V 174 - 300 MHz: 0.80 V 300 - 336 MHz: 0.80 V 336 - 420 MHz: 0.25 V 420 - 470 MHz: 0.16 V 470 - 540 MHz: 0.30 V 540 - 800 MHz: 0.80 V 800 - 999 MHz: 0.80 V 12 kHz / 30 kHz (N-FM/AM) 4 W @ 13.8V, 10% THD (EXP SP) 4 16
(USA Version Cellular Blocked) FTM-400DR Specifications Sensitivity (for 12dB SINAD):
Selectivity (6dB/60dB):
Maximum AF Output:
AF Output Impedance:
F T M
4 0 0 D R S p e c i f i c a t i o n s 80 FCC ID: K6620345X40 IC: 511B-20345X40 1. Changes or modifications to this device not expressly approved by YAESU MUSEN could void the users authorization to operate this device. 2. This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions; (1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference including interference that may cause undesired operation. 3. The scanning receiver in this equipment is incapable of tuning, or readily being altered, by the User to operate within the frequency bands allocated to the Domestic public Cellular Telecommunications Service in Part 22. Part 15.21: Changes or modifications to this device not expressly approved by YAESU MUSEN could void the users authorization to operate this device. DECLARATION BY MANUFACTURER The Scanner receiver is not a digital scanner and is incapable of being converted or modified to a digital scanner receiver by any user. WARNING: MODIFICATION OF THIS DEVICE TO RECEIVE CELLULAR RADIOTELEPHONE SERVICE SIGNALS IS PROHIBITED UNDER FCC RULES AND FEDERAL LAW. F T M
4 0 0 D R S p e c i f i c a t i o n s 81 FCC ID: K6620345X40 IC: 511B-20345X40 Copyright 2012 YAESU MUSEN CO., LTD. All rights reserved. No portion of this manual may be reproduced without the permission of YAESU MUSEN CO., LTD. Printed in Japan FCC ID: K6620345X40 IC: 511B-20345X40
1 2 | User Manual 1 | Users Manual | 4.43 MiB |
FTM-400XDR/DE Operating Manual 144/430MHz 50W DUAL BAND TRANSCEIVER C4FM FDMA/FM Before Using Installation and Connection Basic Operations Using the Memory Scanning Using the GPS Function Using the APRS Function Using the GM Function Convenient Functions Functions to be used when Necessary Customize Menu Settings and User Preferences Appendix Application for FCC / IC FCC ID: K6620345X40 / IC: 511B-20345X40 Introduction Features of this radio 144/430 MHz dual band mobile radio equipped with standard C4FM digital communication modem Clear audio and data communication is achieved using the digital modem functions Wide band receive in the 108 MHz to 999 MHz range (wireless business, public service and air band) Transmit power 50 watts with cooling fan Full color 3.5-inch LCD, high luminance TFT touch panel controller Intuitive, user touch panel operation 500 memory channels in the Band A (band at the top of the display) and 500 channels in the Band B (band at the bottom of the display) The frequency and settings memories can be saved, using a micro-SD card. The data in the micro-SD card can easily be copied to other radios Diverse range of scanning functions (VFO scan, memory scan etc.) Built-in GPS receiver unit, location and movement information can be displayed and GPS data can be output to connected devices Incorporated APRS functions. Position, movement data and messages can be communicated to other stations, digipeaters and the Internet.
*Refer to the separate APRS Operating Manual GM (Group Monitor) function where in a group of frequently communicating members can be registered, and then position information and messages can be exchanged
*Refer to the separate GM Operating Manual Supports Yaesu WIRES-X Internet linking, providing communication with remote partners using the Internet
*Refer to the separate WIRES-X Operating Manual Bluetooth adaptor unit BU-2 (sold separately) permits hands-free operation Voice guide unit FVS-2 (sold separately) provides frequency voice announcement, and recording of received audio Camera-equipped microphone MH-85A11U (sold separately). Images taken with the camera can be transmitted to other stations, and also shown on the LCD display.
* The APRS, GM and WIRES-X Operating Manuals are not included with the product. Please download them from the Yaesu website. 2 Before UsingApplication for FCC / IC FCC ID: K6620345X40 / IC: 511B-20345X40 Important precautions for mobile radio operation The use of protective tape or covering is recommended to protect the wiring and the power cord inside the vehicle. When installing the unit inside a vehicle, locate the radio, antenna, co-axial cable, etc. Introduction at least 20 cm away from the following control equipment. Engine-related:
Transmission-related: Transmission and 4WD electronic control unit Others:
Fuel injection equipment and engine control ECS/EPS/ABS/ETACS/Fully automatic air-conditioner/
Auto-heater control unit/G sensor Install the antenna and co-axial cable away from the control unit and wiring harness. Place all cables so they do not entangle and impede the driver or passengers. Never place any equipment in a location where it may pose a danger to the passengers, where it may interfere with driving, or obstruct the driver field of view. Do not install any apparatus in such a way that it may interfere with the proper operation of the air bags. After installing the radio, check that the brake lamp, head lamp, turning indicator lights, wiper, etc. are working normally with the radio power switched on. Keep full attention on driving, do not operate the radio controls or look at the radio display while driving. Stop the vehicle at a safe location, before operating the radio controls or looking at the display. Do not drive the car in such a way that external sounds required for safe driving cannot be heard. Most areas and districts prohibit the use of earphones and headphones while driving. When using the radio transmitter, if it appears to have abnormal effects on the control equipment of the vehicle, stop the engine, turn off the power supply, and disconnect the power cord. Resolve the problem before continuing to operate the radio equipment. When using the radio in an electric or hybrid car, the receiver may experience high RF interference and noise from the inverters that are built into the electric vehicle. 3 Before UsingApplication for FCC / IC FCC ID: K6620345X40 / IC: 511B-20345X40 Introduction About the touch panel Precautions in using the touch panel The touch panel of the controller is designed to work with the slightest touch of a finger. The touch panel may not work when a protective film or sheet is adhered to the LCD. Use of a pointed fingernail or pen to operate the touch panel, or pressing too hard may damage or scratch the screen. Smart phone operations such as flicking, pinch in and pinch out are not possible. Maintaining the touch panel To clean the touch panel, switch off the power supply first before using a dry, soft cloth to wipe away dust and dirt from the touch panel. When the touch panel is really dirty, wet a soft cloth and wring it out thoroughly before using it to wipe the touch panel. When wiping the touch panel, be careful not to wipe too hard or scratch the surface with your nails. When the touch panel is scratched, it may become difficult to see the display. About registered trademarks and copyrights APRS is a registered trademark of Mr. Bob Bruninga of WB4APR. SmartBeaconing is supplied by HamHUD Nichetronix. Microsoft, Windows and Windows Vista are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and other countries. Other company and product names listed in this manual are trademarks and registered trademarks of their respective companies. Unauthorized reproduction or copying of a part or all of the copyrights owned by Yaesu Musen Co., Ltd. in any form whatsoever is strictly prohibited. 4 Before UsingApplication for FCC / IC FCC ID: K6620345X40 / IC: 511B-20345X40 Introduction How to read this manual In this manual, controller operations are expressed as follows:
Press
............................................Indicates that the key or switch is to be pressed quickly. Press for 1 second or longer .........Indicates that the key or switch is to be pressed for one second or longer. Touch [SQL] .......................................Indicates that the symbol on the touch panel screen is to be touched quickly. Touch [SQL] for 1 second or longer ...Indicates that the symbol on the touch panel screen is to be touched for one second or longer. Select [MODE] ...................................Indicates that the items are to be highlighted on the touch panel screen. The following symbols are also used in this manual:
Caution
...Explains information to avoid incorrect operation. Tip
...Explains operating hints and helpful advice. Also note: the actual product may differ from the drawings shown in this manual. 5 Before UsingApplication for FCC / IC FCC ID: K6620345X40 / IC: 511B-20345X40 Contents Introduction ................................................................. 2 Features of this radio ............................................. 2 Important precautions for mobile radio operation .. 3 About the touch panel ............................................ 4 About registered trademarks and copyrights ......... 4 How to read this manual ........................................ 5 Before Using ............................................................. 9 Safety Precautions (make sure to read these) ........... 9 Accessories .............................................................. 13 Name and Function of Each Component ................. 14 Controller ............................................................. 14 Front ................................................................ 14 Back ................................................................ 15 Left side ........................................................... 15 Main body ............................................................ 16 Front ................................................................ 16 Back ................................................................ 16 Microphone (MH-48A6JA) ................................... 17 Explanation of the screen .................................... 18 Installation and Connection .................................. 24 Installing the Radio ................................................... 24 Precautions during installation ............................. 24 Installation location when used in a mobile unit ......... 24 About the antenna................................................ 25 Install the antenna ........................................... 25 Installing the main body ....................................... 27 Installing the controller ......................................... 28 Connecting the Radio ............................................... 29 Connecting the controller to the main body ......... 29 Connecting the microphone ................................. 29 Connecting the antenna ....................................... 29 Connecting the Power Supply .................................. 30 Connecting the car battery .............................. 30 Connecting the external power supply equipment ......... 32 Setting Up the micro-SD Card .................................. 33 Micro-SD cards that can be used......................... 33 Things to note when using micro-SD cards ......... 33 Installing the micro-SD card ................................. 34 Removing the micro-SD card .......................... 34 Initializing the micro-SD card ............................... 35 Basic Operations .................................................... 36 Receiving .................................................................. 36 Turning the power on ........................................... 36 Switching the power off ................................... 36 Inputing the call sign ............................................ 37 Switching the operating band............................... 38 Adjusting the volume............................................ 38 Adjusting the squelch level .................................. 39 Tuning the radio ................................................... 40 Changing the frequency steps ........................ 41 Switching the operating mode.............................. 44 Switching the communication mode .................... 45 Switching the modulation mode ........................... 46 6 Displaying the band scope ................................... 47 Muting the audio .................................................. 48 Communicating......................................................... 49 Transmitting ......................................................... 49 Adjusting the transmit power ........................... 50 Adjusting the sensitivity of the microphone ..... 50 Communicating in the FM mode .......................... 51 Communicating using the repeater ...................... 52 Other Settings........................................................... 54 Changing the beep volume .................................. 54 Locking the knobs and switches .......................... 55 Adjusting the date and time ................................. 56 Adjusting the display brightness .......................... 58 Changing the background color of the frequency display area ........ 60 Reconfiguring the Settings ....................................... 61 Using the Memory .................................................. 62 Writing to the memory .......................................... 62 Recalling the memory .......................................... 63 Recalling the home channel................................. 63 Changing the frequency of the home channel ... 64 Erasing the memory ............................................. 65 Naming the memory............................................. 66 Changing the method of the memory tag display ....... 67 Split memory ........................................................ 68 Receiving Weather Broadcast Channels
(USA version only) ....... 70 Assigning the WX function to a programmable key on the microphone ....... 71 Recalling the weather channels ...................... 71 Listening the weather alert .............................. 71 Scanning ................................................................. 72 Signal Search ........................................................... 72 VFO scan ............................................................. 72 Setting the receive operation when the scanning stops .... 73 Memory scan ....................................................... 74 Selecting the scanning method ....................... 75 Setting the specified memories ....................... 75 Scan only the specified memory channels ...... 76 Setting the memories to be skipped ................ 77 Scanning the programmable memories (PMS) .... 79 Writing into the programmable memory .......... 79 Scanning the programmable memory ............. 80 Monitoring the Home Channel .................................. 81 Using the dual receive ..................................... 81 Setting the restart condition of dual receive .... 82 Using the GPS Function ........................................ 83 What is GPS? ........................................................... 83 Positioning Using GPS ............................................. 83 Positioning using an external GPS device ...... 84 Checking the satellite capture status .............. 86 Displaying the position information ...................... 87 Before UsingApplication for FCC / IC FCC ID: K6620345X40 / IC: 511B-20345X40 Displaying the current position information of your station ........ 87 Displaying the position information of the partner station in the digital mode ...... 87 Explanation of the position information screen ...... 88 Recording the position information
(GPS log function)....... 89 Checking the route using a personal computer ...... 90 Measuring the altitude.......................................... 90 Other settings....................................................... 92 Using the Smart Navigation Function ....................... 93 Displaying the Compass screen ...................... 93 Using the real-time navigation function ................ 94 Using the backtrack function ................................ 95 Saving the destination ..................................... 95 Displaying the position of the destination in real time ..... 97 Using the APRS Function ...................................... 98 What is the APRS Function? .................................... 98 Using the GM Function .......................................... 99 What is the GM Function? ........................................ 99 Basic Methods to use the GM function ................... 100 Convenient Functions .......................................... 102 Communicating with Specified Partner Stations..... 102 Using the tone squelch ...................................... 102 Setting the tone frequency ............................ 102 Using the tone squelch .................................. 103 Transmitting the tone signal .......................... 103 Using digital code squelch ................................. 104 Setting the DCS code .................................... 104 Using DCS .................................................... 105 Using the pager function .................................... 106 Setting the receive station code .................... 106 Activating the pager function ......................... 108 Recalling a specified station .......................... 108 Notification of an incoming call from a partner station using the bell ......110 Other squelch functions ......................................110 Using the DTMF Function........................................112 Registering the DTMF code ...........................112 Transmitting the registered DTMF code .........113 Sending out the DTMF code manually ...........114 Using the Timer Function.........................................115 Using the stopwatch function ..............................115 Displaying the timer / clock screen .................115 Using the lap timer .........................................116 Using the countdown timer .............................117 Using the APO function .......................................119 Using the TOT function ...................................... 120 Changing the Touch Key Function .......................... 121 Sending and Receiving Messages and Pictures .... 122 Viewing messages and pictures .................... 122 Sorting the messages and pictures ............... 123 Contents Downloading messages and images ................. 124 Sending messages and pictures ........................ 125 Creating and sending a message ................. 125 Sending saved pictures ................................. 129 Replying to a message or picture .................. 130 Forwarding messages and pictures .............. 132 Functions to be Used when Necessary .............. 134 Using the Bluetooth Headset .................................. 134 Mounting the Bluetooth unit BU-2.................... 134 Setting the Bluetooth headset operation ............ 136 Identifying the Bluetooth headset ...................... 137 Using the Bluetooth headset .............................. 139 Taking Pictures with the optional Camera
(Snapshot Function) ..... 140 Connecting the speaker microphone with camera...... 140 Taking pictures ................................................... 141 Viewing a saved picture ..................................... 143 Optional receive Audio Record and Playback ........ 144 Mounting the voice guide unit FVS-2............... 144 Using the voice memory .................................... 146 Setting the voice memory operation .............. 146 Recording the receive audio ......................... 147 Replaying the recorded audio ....................... 147 Erasing the recorded audio ........................... 148 Listening to the frequency voice announcement ........ 149 Setting the announce function operation ....... 149 Listening to the frequency voice announcement ....... 150 Copying the Radio Data to another Transceiver..... 151 Using the micro-SD card .................................... 151 Copying data to a micro-SD card .................. 151 Copying data from the micro-SD card ........... 152 Using the clone function..................................... 153 Using the Radio with an External Device Connected .......... 155 Connecting to a personal computer ................... 155 Sending position information to the computer .......... 156 Updating the firmware of the radio ................ 157 Using the radio as a transceiver for packet communication ......... 158 Other devices that can be connected ................ 162 Customize Menu Settings and User Preferences ......... 163 Set-up Menu Basic Operations............................... 163 Set-up Menu List .................................................... 164 Using the Set-up Menu ........................................... 171 Screen display settings ...................................... 171 Select the screen to be displayed ................. 171 Switching between COMPASS and POSITION INFORMATION screens .... 172 Setting the display background color ............ 172 Setting the band scope display width ............ 172 Setting the display brightness ....................... 173 7 Before UsingApplication for FCC / IC FCC ID: K6620345X40 / IC: 511B-20345X40 Contents Setting the display contrast ........................... 173 Switching the time display and the voltage display ...... 173 Transmit and receive settings ............................ 174 Setting the signal format ............................... 174 Setting the AMS transmission mode ............. 174 Setting the squelch type of the digital mode ...... 175 Setting the squelch code of the digital mode ...... 176 Setting the pop-up time for the partner station information ..... 177 Setting the display method for my position ... 178 Setting the Standby Beep ............................. 178 Displaying the version of the DSP program .. 178 Setting the sub-band mute ............................ 179 Setting the sensitivity of the microphone ....... 179 Memory channel settings ................................... 179 Setting the display method for the memory tag ...... 179 Setting the memory scan method ................. 179 Tone signal settings ........................................... 180 Setting the squelch tone frequency
(CTCSS) ....... 180 Setting the DCS code .................................... 180 Setting the transmission method of the DTMF code ...... 180 Registering the DTMF code .......................... 180 Recalling only specified stations ................... 180 Setting the user programmed reverse CTCSS tone ...... 180 Using the bell Notification of an incoming call from a partner station using the bell .... 181 Setting the squelch type separately for transmit and receive .... 181 Setting the weather alert operation
(USA Version Only) .... 182 Scan settings ..................................................... 182 Setting the signal reception method .............. 182 Setting the scanning direction ....................... 182 Setting the receive operation when the scanning stops ...... 183 Group monitor function settings ......................... 183 Settings on the functions and configuration ....... 183 Setting the date and time .............................. 183 Setting the display format for the date and time ...... 184 Setting the time zone .................................... 185 Setting the auto repeater shift ....................... 186 Setting the direction of the repeater shift ...... 186 Setting the shift width of the repeater ............ 187 Setting the frequency step ............................ 188 Setting the volume of the beep ..................... 188 Setting the clock shift of the CPU .................. 188 Setting the program key of the microphone .. 189 Expanding the receive range ........................ 190 8 Setting the unit display .................................. 191 Switching the power off automatically ........... 191 Limiting the continuous transmission time .... 191 Setting the PIN code of the optional Bluetooth headset ..... 191 Setting the geodetic reference system of the GPS function .... 192 Positioning using the external GPS device ... 192 Setting the interval for recording the GPS position information ... 192 Data communication settings ............................. 193 Setting the COM port .................................... 193 Setting the operating band of the APRS and data communication .... 196 Setting the baud rate of the APRS and data communication .... 197 Setting the output condition of the squelch detection and squelch terminal .... 198 APRS function settings ...................................... 199 Micro-SD card settings....................................... 199 Writing settings to the micro-SD card ............ 199 Writing group IDs to the micro-SD card ......... 200 Initializing the micro-SD card ........................ 200 Optional device settings ..................................... 200 Setting the image of the connected speaker microphone with camera ..... 200 Setting the operation of the Bluetooth headset ..... 201 Setting the voice memory operation .............. 201 Initialization and saving settings ........................ 201 Reconfiguring the settings ............................. 201 Registering the preset ................................... 201 Recalling the registered preset ..................... 202 Sorting the registered memory channels ...... 203 Copying saved data ...................................... 203 Call sign settings ................................................ 204 Changing the call sign ................................... 204 Appendix ............................................................... 206 Options List............................................................. 206 Maintenance ........................................................... 207 Care and maintenance....................................... 207 Replacing the fuse ............................................. 207 When you have difficulties ... ................................. 208 There is no power ......................................... 208 There is no sound ......................................... 208 There is no transmission ............................... 208 The keys or knobs will not operate ................ 208 About internal spurious signals .......................... 209 After-market Services ........................................ 209 Specification ........................................................... 210 Index ...................................................................... 212 Before UsingApplication for FCC / IC FCC ID: K6620345X40 / IC: 511B-20345X40 Before Using Safety Precautions (make sure to read these) Make sure to read this manual in order to use this radio safely and correctly. Note beforehand that the company shall not be liable for any damages suffered by the customer or third parties in using this product, or for any failures and faults that occur during the use or misuse of this product, unless otherwise provided for under the law. Type and meaning of the marks DANGER WARNING CAUTION This symbol indicates the possibility of death or serious injury being inflicted on the user and the surrounding people when these instructions are ignored and the product is handled wrongly. This symbol indicates the possibility of death or serious injury being inflicted on the user and the surrounding people when these instructions are ignored and the product is handled wrongly. This symbol indicates the possibility of physical impediments occurring or impediments being inflicted on the user and the surrounding people when these instructions are ignored and the product is handled wrongly. Type and meaning of symbols Prohibited actions that must not be carried out in order to use this radio safely. For example, Precautions that must be adhered to in order to use this radio safely. For example, signifies that the power supply is to be disconnected. signifies that disassembly is prohibited. DANGER Do not use the device in regions or aircrafts and vehicles where its use is prohibited such as in hospitals and aeroplanes. This may exert an impact on electronic and medical devices. Do not use this product while driving or riding a motorbike. This may result in accidents. Make sure to stop the car in a safe location first before use if the device is going to be used by the driver. Never touch the antenna during transmission. This may result in injury, electric shock and equipment failure. When an alarm goes off with the external antenna connected, cut off the power supply to this radio immediately and disconnect the external antenna from this radio. If not, this may result in fire, electric shock and equipment failure. 9 Before UsingApplication for FCC / IC FCC ID: K6620345X40 / IC: 511B-20345X40 Safety Precautions (make sure to read these) Do not operate the device when flammable gas is generated. Doing so may result in fire and explosion. Do not transmit in crowded places in consideration of people who are fitted with medical devices such as heart pacemakers. Electromagnetic waves from the device may affect the medical device, resulting in accidents caused by malfunctions. Do not touch any liquid leaking from the liquid display with your bare hands. There is a risk of chemical burns occurring when the liquid comes into contact with the skin or gets into the eyes. In this case, seek medical treatment immediately. WARNING Do not place the device in areas that may get wet easily (e.g. near a humidifier). This may result in fire, electric shock and equipment failure. When connecting a DC power cord, pay due care not to mix up the positive and negative polarities. This may result in fire, electric shock and equipment failure. Do not use DC power cords other than the one enclosed or specified. This may result in fire, electric shock and equipment failure. Do not bend, twist, pull, heat and modify the power cord and connection cables in an unreasonable manner. This may cut or damage the cables and result in fire, electric shock and equipment failure. Do not pull the cable when plugging and unplugging the power cord and connection cables. Please hold the plug or connector when unplugging. If not, this may result in fire, electric shock and equipment failure. Do not use voltages other than the specified power supply voltage. Doing so may result in fire and electric shock. Do not transmit continuously for long periods of time. This may cause the temperature of the main body to rise and result in burns and failures due to overheating. Do not dismantle or modify the device. This may result in injury, electric shock and equipment failure. Do not handle the power plug and connector etc. with wet hands. Also do not plug and unplug the power plug with wet hands. This may result in injury, liquid leak, electric shock and equipment failure. When smoke or strange odors are emitted from the radio, turn off the power and disconnect the power cord from the socket. This may result in fire, liquid leak, overheating, damage, ignition and equipment failure. Please contact our company amateur customer support or the retail store where you purchased the device. Keep the power plug pins and the surrounding areas clean at all times. This may result in fire, liquid leak, overheating, breakage, ignition etc. 10 Before UsingApplication for FCC / IC FCC ID: K6620345X40 / IC: 511B-20345X40 Safety Precautions (make sure to read these) Do not use the device when the power cord and connection cables are damaged, and when the DC power connector cannot be plugged in tightly. Please contact our company amateur customer support or the retail store where you purchased the device as this may result in fire, electric shock and equipment failure. Never cut off the fuse holder of the DC power cord. This may cause short-circuiting and result in ignition and fire. Do not use fuses other than those specified. Doing so may result in fire and equipment failure. Do not allow metallic objects such as wires and water to get inside the product. This may result in fire, electric shock and equipment failure. Refrain from using headphones and earphones at a loud volume. Continuous exposure to loud volumes may result in hearing impairment. Disconnect the power cord and connection cables before incorporating items sold separately and replacing the fuse. This may result in fire, electric shock and equipment failure. Follow the instructions given when installing items sold separately and replacing the fuse. This may result in fire, electric shock and equipment failure. Do not use the device when the alarm goes off. For safety reasons, please pull the power plug of the DC power equipment connected to the product out of the AC socket. Never touch the antenna as well. This may result in fire, electric shock and equipment failure due to thunder. CAUTION Do not place this device near a heating instrument or in a location exposed to direct sunlight. This may result in deformation and discoloration. Do not place this device in a location where there is a lot of dust and humidity. Doing so may result in fire and equipment failure. Stay as far away from the antenna as possible during transmission. Long-term exposure to electromagnetic radiation may have a negative effect on the human body. Do not wipe the case using thinner and benzene etc. Please use a soft and dry piece of cloth to wipe away the stains on the case. For safety reasons, switch off the power and pull out the DC power cord connected to the DC power connector when the device is not going to be used for a long period of time. If not, this may result in fire and overheating. Do not throw or subject the device to strong impact forces. This may result in equipment failure. Do not the put this device near magnetic cards and video tapes. The data in the cash card and video tape etc. may be erased. Do not turn on the volume too high when using a headphone or earphone. This may result in hearing impairment. 11 Before UsingApplication for FCC / IC FCC ID: K6620345X40 / IC: 511B-20345X40 Safety Precautions (make sure to read these) Keep out of the reach of small children. If not, this may result in injuries to children. Do not put heavy objects on top of the power cord and connection cables. This may damage the power cord and connection cables, resulting in fire and electric shock. Do not transmit near the television and radio. This may result in electromagnetic interference. Do not use optional products other than those specified by our company. If not, this may result in equipment failure. When using the device in a hybrid car or fuel-saving car, make sure to check with the car manufacturer before using. The device may not be able to receive transmissions normally due to the influence of noises from the electrical devices (inverters etc.) fitted in the car. Do not place the device on an unsteady or sloping surface, or in a location where there is a lot of vibration. The device may fall over or drop, resulting in fire, injury and equipment failure. Do not stand on top of the product, and do not place heavy objects on top or insert objects inside it. If not, this may result in equipment failure. Do not use a microphone other than those specified when connecting a microphone to the device. If not, this may result in equipment failure. Do not touch the heat radiating parts. When used for a long period of time, the temperature of the heat radiating parts will get higher, resulting in burns when touched. Do not open the case of the product except when replacing the fuse and when installing items sold separately. This may result in injury, electric shock and equipment failure. 12 Before UsingApplication for FCC / IC FCC ID: K6620345X40 / IC: 511B-20345X40 Accessories DTMF microphone MH-48A6JA Bracket for main body MMB-36 Bracket for the controller Controller cable
(3 m) DC power cable
(with fuse attached)
(USA, EXP version) DC power cable
(with fuse attached)
(European version) Spare fuse (15 A)
(USA, EXP version) Spare Fuse (15 A)
(European version) PC connection cable SCU-20 Operating Manual Warranty Card Quick Manual Microphone cord holder Stereo to Monaural Plug Tip Various optional parts are also available. Refer to Page 206 for details. 13 Before UsingApplication for FCC / IC FCC ID: K6620345X40 / IC: 511B-20345X40 Name and Function of Each Component Controller Front VOL knob (
) The volume will increase when the knob is turned in a clockwise direction and decrease when turned in an counter-clockwise direction. The upper end is for Band A use while the lower end is for Band B use. D/X key (
) The communication mode changes each time this key is pressed for a short time. Tip Refer to Page 45 for the communication mode. WIRES-X will start when this key is pressed for one second or longer. Touch panel display Band A DIAL knob (
) The frequency of the upper band in the dual band display can be adjusted. The frequency will increase when the knob is turned in a clockwise direction and decrease when turned in an counter-clockwise direction. Press the knob to enable setting the operating band frequency in 1 MHz units. Press the knob for one second or longer to enable setting the frequency in 5 MHz units. In memory mode when the knob is pressed for one second or longer, if a tag
(name) is attached to the memory channel, the tag and frequency displays will be reversed. This knob is also used to select the items during the set up and memory operations, group monitor operations, etc. Power supply/LOCK switch (
) Press this button for 2 seconds or longer to switch the power on and off. The key lock can be engaged or released by pressing the button quickly while the radio is turned on. DISP/SETUP key (
) The display screen will change each time the button is pressed quickly. Tip Refer to Page 20 for the display. Press the button for one second or longer to display the set-up menu. 14 Before UsingApplication for FCC / IC FCC ID: K6620345X40 / IC: 511B-20345X40 Name and Function of Each Component F/MW key (
) Press the button quickly to display the function menu. Press the button for 2 seconds or longer to change to the memory writing mode. Band B DIAL knob (
) The frequency of the upper band in the dual band display can be adjusted. Press the knob to enable setting the operating band frequency in 1 MHz units. Press the knob for one second or longer to enable setting the frequency in 5 MHz units. In memory mode when the knob is pressed for one second or longer, if a tag
(name) is attached to the memory channel, the tag and frequency displays will be reversed. GM key (
) Press this key to start the group monitor function. Back CONTROL jack Plug in the control cable into this jack to connect with the main body. Screw hole to attach the mounting bracket Left side EXT GPS jack Plug in a cable to connect with external GPS devices. 15 Before UsingApplication for FCC / IC FCC ID: K6620345X40 / IC: 511B-20345X40 Name and Function of Each Component Main body Front CONTROL jack Plug in the control cable into this jack to connect with the controller. MIC jack Plug in the provided microphone cable. DATA jack Connect MH-85A11U, the optional speaker microphone with camera.
* There is no audio output available from the FTM-400XDR/DE to the MH-85A11U speaker. micro-SD card slot Back ANT terminal Connect the co-axial cable for the antenna. 13.8 VDC Connect the provided DC power supply cable (with fuse attached). EXT SP jack Connect the optional external speaker. DATA jack Connect a cable for remote operation or the cable for connecting with the personal computer interface unit and the external terminal unit ( P.155 Page). Cooling fan 16 Before UsingApplication for FCC / IC FCC ID: K6620345X40 / IC: 511B-20345X40 Microphone (MH-48A6JA) Name and Function of Each Component
[UP]
[DWN]
[LOCK]
[LAMP]
Frequency is increased by 1 step. Frequency is decreased by 1 step. Locks / unlocks the [UP] and [DWN] keys and
[P1] to [P4] keys. Turns the lamp on the body of the microphone on/off. Speak into here during transmission.
[MIC]
[1] to [0] Enters the numbers and letters.
[]
Changes the VFO/Memory operating mode of the operating band. Activates the GM (Group Monitor) functions. Switches the operating band to Band A. Switches the operating band to Band B. Adjusts the squelch level. Switches the display. Turns off the squelch
(T.CALL: European version). Recalls the receiver home channel. Changes the communication mode. Changes the transmit power. Press this key to begin the transmit mode.
[#]
[A]
[B]
[C]
[D]
[P1]
[P2]
[P3]
[P4]
[PTT]
MIC DEF 3 MNO 6 WXYZ 9 K C O L P M A L A B C D 1 GHI 4 PQRS 7 ABC 2 JKL 5 TUV 8 0 P1 P3 P4 P2 DTMF MICROPHONE MH-48 Tip Preferred functions can be assigned to buttons [P1] to [P4]. Select using the [CONFIG][10 MIC PROGRAM KEY] in the set-up menu. 17 Before UsingApplication for FCC / IC FCC ID: K6620345X40 / IC: 511B-20345X40
1 2 | User Manual 10 | Users Manual | 3.98 MiB |
Communicating with Specified Partner Stations 5 Turn to select the DSC code Tip Factory default value: 023 6 Touch [2 DCS CODE]
The characters of the set value will turn green in color.
7 Press for one second or longer The DCS code will be set and the display will return to the previous screen. Tip The display can also be returned to the previous screen by touching [BACK] twice. Using DCS 1 Press 2 Touch [SQL] to display D-TRX The function menu will be displayed. Tips When [SQL] is not displayed in the menu, use [BACK]
or [FWD] to change the menu. The squelch type changes in the following sequence each time it is touched. NOISE T-TX T-TRX T-REV D-TRX PRGM PAGER D-TX* TT/DR* DT/TR*
* These squelch types will be displayed when
[SIGNALING] [8 SQL EXPANSION] is set to ON in the set-up menu.
The squelch will open only when the set DCS code is received.
Tip A bell can be rung (beep) when signals containing the same DCS code are received ( P.110).
105 Convenient FunctionsApplication for FCC / IC FCC ID: K6620345X40 / IC: 511B-20345X40 Communicating with Specified Partner Stations Using the pager function Use this function to call specified stations only by using a pager code that combines two CTCSS tones. Caution The pager function does not work in the digital mode. Use the switch the communications to the auto-mode select function (AMS) or analog mode. key when beginning operations to Setting the receive station code for one second or longer The set-up menu will be displayed. 1 Press 2 Touch [SIGNALING]
The menu list will be displayed.
, or touch the screen to select [5 PAGER CODE]
3 Turn 4 Touch [5 PAGER CODE]
The code setting screen will be displayed.
5 Touch [RX CODE 1] twice The characters of the set value will turn orange in color. 6 Turn Select the first code from 01 to 50. to select the code Tip Factory default value: 05 7 Touch [RX CODE 1]
The characters of the set value will turn green in color. 106
Convenient FunctionsApplication for FCC / IC FCC ID: K6620345X40 / IC: 511B-20345X40 Communicating with Specified Partner Stations 8 Touch [RX CODE 2] twice The characters of the set value will turn orange in color. 9 Turn Select the second code from 01 to 50. to select the code Tip Factory default value: 47 10 Touch [RX CODE 2]
The characters of the set value will turn green in color.
11 Press Your own station code will be set and the display will return to the previous screen. for one second or longer Tip The display can also be returned to the previous screen by touching [BACK] twice. Tips The two codes 05 47 and 47 05 will be recognized as the same code even if the order is different. Three or more stations with the same code can be set (group code) to call all group members at the same time. 107 Convenient FunctionsApplication for FCC / IC FCC ID: K6620345X40 / IC: 511B-20345X40 Communicating with Specified Partner Stations Activating the pager function 1 Press 2 Touch [SQL] to display PAGER The function menu will be displayed. Tips When [SQL] is not displayed in the menu, use [BACK]
or [FWD] to change the menu. The squelch type changes in the following sequence each time it is touched. NOISE T-TX T-TRX T-REV D-TRX PRGM PAGER D-TX* TT/DR* DT/TR*
* These squelch types will be displayed when
[SIGNALING] [8 SQL EXPANSION] is set to ON in the set-up menu.
The operating band will standby to receive in the pager mode.
Recalling a specified station for one second or longer The set-up menu will be displayed. 1 Press 2 Touch [SIGNALING]
The menu list will be displayed.
, or touch the screen to select [5 PAGER CODE]
3 Turn 4 Touch [5 PAGER CODE]
The code setting screen will be displayed.
108 Convenient FunctionsApplication for FCC / IC FCC ID: K6620345X40 / IC: 511B-20345X40 Communicating with Specified Partner Stations 5 Touch [TX CODE 1] twice The characters of the set value will turn orange in color. 6 Turn Select the first code from 01 to 50. to select the code Tip Factory default value: 05 7 Touch [TX CODE 1]
The characters of the set value will turn green in color. 8 Touch [TX CODE 2] twice The characters of the set value will turn orange in color. 9 Turn Select the second code from 01 to 50. to select the code Tip Factory default value: 47 10 Touch [TX CODE 2]
The characters of the set value will turn green in color.
11 Press for one second or longer The partner station code will be set and the display will return to the previous screen. Tip The display can also be returned to the previous screen by touching [BACK] twice. 12 Activate the pager function 13 Press the microphone [PTT]
The partner station will be called. 109 Convenient FunctionsApplication for FCC / IC FCC ID: K6620345X40 / IC: 511B-20345X40 Communicating with Specified Partner Stations Notification of an incoming call from a partner station using the bell When communicating using the tone squelch, DCS or pager, a bell (beep) can be sounded to provide notification that a signal has been received from a partner station. 1 Press 2 Touch [SIGNALING]
for one second or longer The set-up menu will be displayed. The menu list will be displayed.
3 Touch [7 BELL RINGER] to select the length of the bell ring The bell ring changes as follows each time it is touched. OFF 1 time 3 times 5 times 8 times CONTINUOUS Tip Factory default value: OFF
4 Press for one second or longer The bell ring will be set and the display will return to the previous screen. Tip The display can also be returned to the previous screen by touching [BACK] twice. Other squelch functions Reverse tone Touch [SQL] in the function menu to display T-REV. This is a communication method whereby a tone signal is sent out when there is no sound. When there is a sound, the tone signal will disappear. User Programmed Reverse CTCSS Decoder Touch [SQL] in the function menu to display PRGM. The user programmable Reverse CTCSS Decoder will mute your FTM-400XDR/DE receiver when it receives a signal containing a CTCSS tone matching your programmed tone. The tone signal frequency can be set at 100 Hz intervals between 300 Hz and 3000 Hz using [SIGNALING] [6 PRG REV TONE] in the set-up menu. 110 Convenient FunctionsApplication for FCC / IC FCC ID: K6620345X40 / IC: 511B-20345X40 Communicating with Specified Partner Stations DCS transmission Touch [SQL] in the function menu to display D-TX. The radio sends out the DCS code during transmit. This can be used only when [SIGNALING] [8 SQL EXPANSION] is set to ON in the set-up menu. Tone transmission / DCS reception Touch [SQL] in the function menu to display TT/DR. The radio sends out a tone signal during transmit and goes into receive standby for the previously set DCS codes. This can be used only when [SIGNALING] [8 SQL EXPANSION] is set to ON in the set-up menu. DCS transmission / tone reception Touch [SQL] in the function menu to display DT/TR. The radio sends out the DCS code during transmit and goes into receive standby for the previously set squelch tone. This can be used only when [SIGNALING] [8 SQL EXPANSION] is set to ON in the set-up menu. 111 Convenient FunctionsApplication for FCC / IC FCC ID: K6620345X40 / IC: 511B-20345X40 Using the DTMF Function The DTMF (Dual Tone Multi Frequencies) is a peepoppa sound heard from a telephone receiver when a call is made on a push phone line. This radio can send out the DTMF code by using the microphone keys or recalling a memory. A DTMF code with a maximum of 16 digits can be registered in up to 9 channels in the memory. It is convenient to register beforehand telephone numbers that are used for connecting to a public line from a phone patch. Tip The DTMF code is issued based on a combination of the following frequencies. 697 Hz 770 Hz 852 Hz 941 Hz 1209 Hz 1 4 7 1336 Hz 2 5 8 0 1477 Hz 3 6 9
#
1633 Hz A B C D Registering the DTMF code for one second or longer The set-up menu will be displayed. 1 Press 2 Touch [SIGNALING]
The menu list will be displayed.
, or touch the screen to select [4 DTMF MEMORY]
3 Turn 4 Touch [4 DTMF MEMORY]
The DTMF memory screen will be displayed. 5 Turn be registered or touch the screen to select the channel to 6 Touch the selected channel The character input screen will be displayed.
112 Convenient FunctionsApplication for FCC / IC FCC ID: K6620345X40 / IC: 511B-20345X40
1 2 | User Manual 11 | Users Manual | 2.84 MiB |
7 Touch the character keys to input the DTMF code Tip The DTMF code can also be input using the character keys on the microphone. 8 Touch [ENT]
The DTMF code will be set. Tip Repeat Steps 5 to 8 when registering additional numbers in the other channels.. Using the DTMF Function
9 Press for one second or longer The DTMF code will be set and the display will return to the previous screen. Tip The display can also be returned to the previous screen by touching [BACK] twice. Transmitting the registered DTMF code for one second or longer The set-up menu will be displayed. 1 Press 2 Touch [SIGNALING]
The menu list will be displayed.
, or touch the screen to select [3 AUTO DIALER]
3 Turn 4 Touch [3 AUTO DIALER] to select ON The auto dialer will switch between ON and OFF each time it is touched. 5 Press for one second or longer The display will return to the previous screen. Tip The display can also be returned to the previous screen by touching [BACK] twice. The function menu will be displayed. 6 Press 7 Touch [DTMF]
The character will turn orange in color. Tip When [DTMF] is not displayed in the menu, use [BACK]
or [FWD] to switch the menu.
113 Convenient FunctionsApplication for FCC / IC FCC ID: K6620345X40 / IC: 511B-20345X40 Using the DTMF Function to select the DTMF code 8 Turn 9 Press the microphone [PTT]
The DTMF code will be sent out automatically.
10 Release the microphone [PTT]
The transmission will continue until the DTMF signal is sent out.
Sending out the DTMF code manually 1 Press and hold down the microphone [PTT] and press [0] to [9], [], [#], [A] to [D]
2 Release the microphone [PTT]
The transmission will continue until the DTMF signal is sent out. 114 Convenient FunctionsApplication for FCC / IC FCC ID: K6620345X40 / IC: 511B-20345X40 Using the Timer Function Using the stopwatch function This radio is equipped with a lap timer and countdown timer. These can be used by switching to the timer / clock screen. Displaying the timer / clock screen for one second or longer The set-up menu will be displayed. 1 Press 2 Touch [DISPLAY]
The menu list will be displayed.
, or touch the screen to select [1 DISPLAY SELECT]
3 Turn 4 Touch [1 DISPLAY SELECT]
The screen for setting the various screens on or off will be displayed. 5 Touch [TIMER/CLOCK] to select ON Each time this is touched, the setting will switch between OFF and ON. for one second or longer The display will return to the previous screen. Tip The display can also be returned to the previous screen by touching [BACK] twice. twice briefly 6 Press 7 Press The timer/clock screen will be displayed. Tip The screen will change in the following sequence each is pressed when both the altitude display screen time and GPS screen are ON. Normal frequency display Compass/Lat&Lon display screen Altitude display screen Timer/Clock screen GPS screen
115 Convenient FunctionsApplication for FCC / IC FCC ID: K6620345X40 / IC: 511B-20345X40 Using the Timer Function Using the lap timer 1 Display the timer / clock screen 2 Touch [MODE]
The lap timer will be displayed. 3 Touch [START]
The timer will start. 4 Touch [LAP]
The lap time will be saved in the memory each time it is touched. Tip Up to 99 lap times can be saved in the memory. 5 Touch [STOP]
The timer will stop. The lap times and split times will be erased when
[RESET] is touched.
116 Convenient FunctionsApplication for FCC / IC FCC ID: K6620345X40 / IC: 511B-20345X40 The lap time measured in the past will be displayed when [RECALL] is touched. When there are multiple lap times, touch [] or [] to switch between the lap times. Using the Timer Function
6 Touch briefly twice The display will return to the previous screen. Tips Touch [RECALL] when the previous lap times are being displayed and then turn The screen will change in the following sequence each time altitude display screen and GPS screen are ON. Normal frequency display Compass/Lat&Lon display screen Altitude display screen Timer/Clock screen GPS screen twice. is pressed when both the Using the countdown timer 1 Display the timer / clock screen 2 Touch [MODE] twice The countdown timer will be displayed.
3 Touch [SETUP]
4 Turn to set the hour The Hour of the start time will blink. Tips The hour can be set between 00 and 99. The time can also be set by touching [+] or [-]. 5 Touch [SETUP]
6 Turn to set the minute The Hour will be set, and Minute will blink. Tip The time can also be set by touching [+] or [-].
117 Convenient FunctionsApplication for FCC / IC FCC ID: K6620345X40 / IC: 511B-20345X40 Using the Timer Function 7 Touch [SETUP]
The Minute will be set and the set time will be displayed in the counter. 8 Touch [START]
The countdown timer will start. When the set time has passed, a beep will sound and the time will be displayed as 00:0000 in green characters. Touch [STOP] to pause the timer in between. Touch [START] to restart the countdown and touch
[RESET] to measure from the start again. 9 Press briefly twice The display will return to the previous screen. Tip The screen will change in the following sequence each time
is pressed when both the altitude display screen and GPS screen are ON. Normal frequency display Compass/Lat&Lon display screen Altitude display screen Timer/Clock screen GPS screen 118 Convenient FunctionsApplication for FCC / IC FCC ID: K6620345X40 / IC: 511B-20345X40 Using the Timer Function Using the APO function When the APO (Automatic Power-off) function is set to ON, the power supply to the radio will be automatically switched off when there has been no operation for a preset period of time. A notification beep will sound one minute before the power is turned off. This helps to prevent the battery from being used up when you forget to switch the radio off when connected to a car battery. 1 Press 2 Touch [CONFIG]
for one second or longer The set-up menu will be displayed. The menu list will be displayed.
, or touch the screen to select [13 APO]
3 Turn 4 Touch [13 APO]
The screen for selecting ON, OFF and the time until the power is turned off after operations will be displayed. 5 Touch [ON]
6 Touch [+] or [-] to select the time until the power supply is switched off The time will change by one step each time it is touched. The time step can be selected from the following 14 steps. 0.5hour 1.0hour 1.5hour 2.0hour 3.0hour 4.0hour 5.0hour 6.0hour 7.0hour 8.0hour 9.0hour 10.0hour 11.0hour 12.0hour 7 Press twice briefly The APO function will be switched on and the display will return to the previous screen. Tip The display can also be returned to the previous screen by touching [BACK] twice. 119 Convenient FunctionsApplication for FCC / IC FCC ID: K6620345X40 / IC: 511B-20345X40
1 2 | User Manual 12 | Users Manual | 3.90 MiB |
Using the Timer Function Using the TOT function When the TOT (Timeout Timer) function is switched on, the radio will automatically return to the reception mode after a prescribed time has passed in the transmission mode. A notification beep will sound about 10 seconds before the radio returns to the reception mode. This can help to prevent unintended radio waves from being sent out by mistake and the battery from being used up. 1 Press 2 Touch [CONFIG]
for one second or longer The set-up menu will be displayed. The menu list will be displayed.
, or touch the screen to select [14 TOT]
3 Turn 4 Touch [14 TOT]
The characters of the set value will turn orange in color. to select the time 5 Turn The time will change in the following sequence. OFF 1 min 3 min 5 min 10 min 15 min 20 min 30 min 6 Touch [14 TOT]
The characters of the set value will turn green in color.
7 Press twice briefly The TOT function will be switched on and the display will return to the previous screen. Tip The display can also be returned to the previous screen by touching [BACK] twice. 120 Convenient FunctionsApplication for FCC / IC FCC ID: K6620345X40 / IC: 511B-20345X40 Changing the Touch Key Function Frequently used functions in the function menu can be assigned to the touch keys at the bottom of the screen. Example: Changing [MUTE] to [SCAN]
1 Touch [MUTE] for 4 or more seconds A list of the function keys will be displayed.
Tip The list of function keys can be scrolled by turning
. 2 Touch [SCAN]
The touch key [MUTE] will change to [SCAN]. 3 Touch the touch key [SCAN]
The display will return to the previous screen.
[MUTE] will become operable in the function menu displayed when is pressed.
Tip The assignment of functions to the other touch keys can also be changed using Step 2. After the touch key display is changed, touch another touch key first before touching the function key. To return to the previous screen, touch the key whose assignment was changed last (displayed in orange color). 121 Convenient FunctionsApplication for FCC / IC FCC ID: K6620345X40 / IC: 511B-20345X40 Sending and Receiving Messages and Pictures When operating in the digital mode, messages (text) and pictures can be sent and received. Messages and pictures sent or received will be saved in the common list in the memory. Cautions z When sending or receiving messages and pictures, use the key before beginning to switch the communications to the AMS (auto mode select function) or the digital mode. z The operation of the radio will automatically switch to the digital mode on Band A when sending messages and pictures. z When the list of the data is displayed by touching [LOG] while operating on Band B, the operating band will switch to Band A when returning to the frequency display screen. z Set up the micro-SD card in the radio when downloading pictures. Refer to Setting the micro-SD card ( P.33) for details. Tip The following are the three types of digital modes available. Refer to Switching the communication mode (Page 45) for details. V/D mode (simultaneous voice / data communication mode) Voice FR mode (voice full-rate mode) Data FR mode (high speed data communication mode) Viewing messages and pictures The data sent or received can be viewed in the list. The contents of the data sent or received can be verified by selecting it from the list. 1 Press 2 Touch [LOG]
The function menu will be displayed.
Tip When [LOG] is not displayed in the function menu, touch
[BACK] or [FWD] to switch the menu. The list of data will be displayed. 3 Turn or touch the screen to select the data that you want to check Tips A list of the messages is displayed when the touch key
. This will be changed to a list of pictures when the is screen is touched and changed to Newly downloaded data will appear at the top of the list. Touch Touch [TOP] to display the top of the list. to display the end of the list. 122
Convenient FunctionsApplication for FCC / IC FCC ID: K6620345X40 / IC: 511B-20345X40 Sending and Receiving Messages and Pictures 4 Touch the selected data The contents of the data will be displayed. Tips A picture with a resolution of 320 240 pixels will be displayed in full screen when touched. After 10 seconds or when the picture is touched again, it will return to the original display. Touch [EDIT] at the top right of the picture to edit the tag (image name).
Tip Pictures taken using the optional camera attached to the speaker microphone MH-85A11U and saved in the micro-SD card will also be displayed in the list. Sorting the messages and pictures Data that is no longer needed can be deleted from the memory and micro-SD card. Deleting data using the content display screen 1 Display the data content that you would like to delete 2 Touch [DEL]
A screen to confirm whether or not to delete the data
will be displayed. 3 Touch [OK?]
When the deletion is completed, the screen will The deletion will start. return to the list of data. The list of data will move up one at a time. Tip Touch [CANCEL] to stop the deletion.
123 Convenient FunctionsApplication for FCC / IC FCC ID: K6620345X40 / IC: 511B-20345X40 Sending and Receiving Messages and Pictures Erasing from the list 1 Turn 2 Touch [DEL]
A screen to confirm whether or not to delete the data or touch the screen to select the data that you want to delete will be displayed. 3 Touch [OK?]
When the deletion is completed, the screen will The deletion will start. return to the list of data. The list of data will move up one at a time. Tip Touch [CANCEL] to stop the deletion.
Downloading messages and images When messages or pictures are sent in the digital mode at the frequency currently in operation, the contents will be displayed for a certain period of time. Messages will also be downloaded to the memory of this radio or the micro-SD card set up in the radio. When receiving messages When receiving pictures
Tips When receiving picture data, the call sign of the sender and an estimation of the time remaining for the data reception to be completed will be displayed after >. The message Not Completed will be displayed if downloading of the message is unsuccessful because the format is not supported or for other reasons. The message Insufficient SDs Memory will be displayed when the picture cannot be downloaded due to insufficient memory space in the micro-SD card. 124 Convenient FunctionsApplication for FCC / IC FCC ID: K6620345X40 / IC: 511B-20345X40 Sending and Receiving Messages and Pictures Sending messages and pictures Messages and pictures can be sent from this radio when operating in the digital mode. Data sent will be received by all stations operating at the same frequency in the digital mode. The following are the four types of data transmission methods.
(1) Create and send a new message
(2) Send a saved picture
(3) Replies to a downloaded message or picture
(4) Forwards the downloaded message or picture Creating and sending a message 1 Press 2 Touch [LOG]
The function menu will be displayed. Tip When [LOG] is not displayed in the function menu, touch
[BACK] or [FWD] to switch the menu. The list of data will be displayed. or touch the screen to select [NEW]
3 Turn 4 Touch [NEW]
A screen to confirm the message contents will be displayed.
]
5 Touch [
The character input screen will be displayed.
6 Touch the character keys to input the message The touched characters will be displayed at the top of the screen. Tips Up to 80 characters can be entered. Alphabet, numeric and symbol characters can be entered.
125 Convenient FunctionsApplication for FCC / IC FCC ID: K6620345X40 / IC: 511B-20345X40
Sending and Receiving Messages and Pictures 7 Touch [ENT]
The entered characters will be set and the display will return to the screen for confirming the message contents. 8 Touch [SEND]
Message transmission will start and the icon on the left side of the address will blink. The sending and receiving indicator at the top left of the screen will also change to red. Completed will be displayed when the message is completed. The display will then return to the message list screen. The tag of the sent message will be added to the top of the list. 126 Convenient FunctionsApplication for FCC / IC FCC ID: K6620345X40 / IC: 511B-20345X40 Sending and Receiving Messages and Pictures Using standard message The following 19 standard text messages have been entered in the radio previously, to save on time and effort for inputting the text. 1 QRM 2 QRP 3 QRT 4 QRX 5 QRZ 6 QSY 7 Good morning 8 Good job 9 Good day 10 Good evening 11 Good night 12 Send messages 13 Send pictures 14 on my way 15 wait for you 16 Pick me up 17 Thank you 18 OK 19 urgent 1 Follow Steps 1 to 4 on Creating and sending messages ( P.125) to display the screen for creating new message contents.
]
2 Touch [
The standard message field will be displayed under the message. Tip A maximum of 80 characters can be registered in 01: to 10: ( P.128).
to display the standard message that you want to use
3 Turn 4 Press The standard message will be displayed as the message text. Tip The message text can also be displayed by touching the standard message displayed.
127 Convenient FunctionsApplication for FCC / IC FCC ID: K6620345X40 / IC: 511B-20345X40 Sending and Receiving Messages and Pictures 5 Touch [
]
The standard message field under the message will disappear.
6 Follow Steps 5 to 7 in Creating and sending messages ( P.125) to enter the text when adding text. Registering standard messages Up to 10 texts containing a maximum of 80 characters each can be registered as standard messages. Registered text can be selected and used just like the 19 standard text messages that have been prepared beforehand. 1 Follow Steps 1 to 7 on Creating and sending messages ( P.125) to display the screen for confirming the message contents. Tip Alphabet, numeric and symbol characters can be entered. 2 Touch [SAVE TEXT]
The standard message field will be displayed under the message.
3 Turn to display the number that you want to register Tip Either one of 01 to 10 is selectable. 128 Convenient FunctionsApplication for FCC / IC FCC ID: K6620345X40 / IC: 511B-20345X40 Sending and Receiving Messages and Pictures 4 Press The text will be saved as a standard text, and the standard message field will disappear. Tips Text can also be registered by touching the registration number displayed. When registering a text message under a number that already contains a standard message, the previous standard message will be overwritten. Touch [SAVE TEXT] when canceling the registration.
Sending saved pictures Pictures taken using the optional camera attached to the speaker microphone MH-
85A11U can be sent. Tip Refer to Taking pictures with the optional camera attached to the speaker microphone ( P.140) on how to take pictures with the optional camera attached to the speaker microphone MH-85A11U. 1 Press 2 Touch [LOG]
The function menu will be displayed. Tip When [LOG] is not displayed in the function menu, touch
[BACK] or [FWD] to switch the menu. The list of data will be displayed.
3 Turn or touch the screen to select the picture that you want to send
Tips A list of the messages is displayed when the touch key is
. pictures when the screen is touched and changed to Pictures with an attached to the speaker microphone. icon displayed to the left of the tag have been taken with the camera
. This will be changed to a list of 4 Touch the selected picture The details and image will be displayed.
129 Convenient FunctionsApplication for FCC / IC FCC ID: K6620345X40 / IC: 511B-20345X40 Sending and Receiving Messages and Pictures 5 Touch [FORWARD]
Transmission of the picture will start and the icon on the left side of the address will blink. The sending and receiving indicator at the top left of the screen will also change to red. Completed will be displayed when sending of the picture is completed and the display will then return to the picture list screen. The tag of the transmitted picture will be added to the top of the list.
Tips Transmission of a picture will be stopped when [PTT] of the microphone is pressed during transmission (it may take a certain period of time until the transmission stops). When sending a picture, the communication mode will automatically switch to the VW mode (high speed data communication mode). At the end of the transmission, the mode will automatically revert to the DN mode of the AMS. Replying to a message or picture Return messages can be sent in reply to messages and pictures received. 1 Press 2 Touch [LOG]
The function menu will be displayed.
Tip When [LOG] is not displayed in the function menu, touch
[BACK] or [FWD] to switch the menu. The list of data will be displayed.
3 Turn
, or touch the screen to select the message or picture that you want to reply
. This will be changed to a list of Tip A list of the messages is displayed when the touch key is
. pictures when the screen is touched and changed to
130 Convenient FunctionsApplication for FCC / IC FCC ID: K6620345X40 / IC: 511B-20345X40
1 2 | User Manual 13 | Users Manual | 2.61 MiB |
Sending and Receiving Messages and Pictures 4 Touch the selected message or picture The contents of the data will be displayed.
5 Touch [REPLY]
The reply message screen will be displayed. The call sign of the calling station will be displayed in the address. The first 16 characters of the message received will be automatically inserted after Re:. Tip When replying to a picture, the first 16 characters of the tag (display name) will be inserted after Re:. 5 Touch [
]
The character input screen will be displayed.
6 Touch a character key to input the message The touched character will be displayed at the top of the screen. Tip The first 16 characters can also be edited. 7 Touch [ENT]
The entered characters will be set and the display will return to the reply message screen.
131 Convenient FunctionsApplication for FCC / IC FCC ID: K6620345X40 / IC: 511B-20345X40 Sending and Receiving Messages and Pictures 8 Touch [SEND]
Message transmission will start and the icon on the left side of the address will blink. The sending and receiving indicator at the top left of the screen will also change to red. Completed will be displayed when sending of the message is completed and the display will then return to the message list screen. The tag of the sent message will be added to the top of the list. Forwarding messages and pictures Downloaded messages and pictures can be forwarded. 1 Press 2 Touch [LOG]
The function menu will be displayed. Tip When [LOG] is not displayed in the function menu, touch
[BACK] or [FWD] to switch the menu. The list of data will be displayed.
SENT:2013/06/24 16:11
3 Turn
, or touch the screen to select the message or picture that you want to forward Tip A list of the messages is displayed when the touch key is
. pictures when the screen is touched and changed to
. This will change to a list of
4 Touch the selected message or picture The contents of the data will be displayed. 132 Convenient FunctionsApplication for FCC / IC FCC ID: K6620345X40 / IC: 511B-20345X40 Sending and Receiving Messages and Pictures 5 Touch [FORWARD]
Transmission of the data will start and the icon on the left side of the address will blink. The sending and receiving indicator at the top left of the screen will also change to red. Completed will be displayed when sending of the data is completed and the display will then return to the data list screen. The tag of the transmitted data will be added to the top of the list. Tips When forwarding a message, touch [OK?] when the screen for confirming the address appears before the message is sent. Pictures can be forwarded by pressing the [D-TX] of the speaker microphone with camera.
Tips Transmission of a picture will be stopped when [PTT] of the microphone is pressed during transmission (it may take a certain period of time until the transmission stops). When sending a picture, the communication mode will automatically switch to the VW mode (high speed data communication mode). At the end of the transmission, the mode will automatically revert to the DN mode of the AMS. 133 Convenient FunctionsApplication for FCC / IC FCC ID: K6620345X40 / IC: 511B-20345X40 Functions to be Used when Necessary Using the Bluetooth Headset The optional Bluetooth unit BU-2 and headset BH-2A are available for wireless headset operation. Hands-free communication is also possible when the VOX (Voice Operated Xmit) function is used. Tip Other Bluetooth headsets can also be used but not all the functions are guaranteed to work normally. Mounting the Bluetooth unit BU-2 Tools and parts needed Bluetooth unit BU-2 (optional) Phillips screw driver #1 Mounting procedure Cautions z Avoid touching the IC components with your hands as the semiconductors may be damaged by static electricity. z Note that labor charges to install optional items may be separately charged. 1 Switch the radio OFF 2 Switch off the external power supply 3 Unplug the control cable, microphone and DC power supply cable from the main body 4 Remove the eight screws from the main body, four on top and two each at the sides F u n c t i o n s t o b e U s e d w h e n N e c e s s a r y 134 Application for FCC / IC FCC ID: K6620345X40 / IC: 511B-20345X40 Using the Bluetooth Headset 5 Carefully lift up the front side of the main body top cover Caution Do not lift up the top cover quickly by force. This may damage the damage cables between the speaker and main board. 6 Unplug the speaker cables extending from the top cover to the connector on the board inside the main body first before removing the cover Caution Hold the connector when unplugging the cable avoid pulling the cable itself. 7 Remove the two screws in the front of the main body 8 Lift the front hook in the center at the top first before removing the front cover 9 Refer to the figure on the right to mount the BU-2 Caution Check the direction of the connector and plug the BU-2 in all the way to the back. Hook Connector for BU-2 F u n c t i o n s t o b e U s e d w h e n N e c e s s a r y 10 Attach the main body front cover and secure using the two screws 11 Plug in the speaker cables extending from the main body top cover to the original socket on the board 12 Attach the main body top cover and replace all eight screws 135 Application for FCC / IC FCC ID: K6620345X40 / IC: 511B-20345X40 Using the Bluetooth Headset Setting the Bluetooth headset operation Set the Bluetooth parameters for your preferences in accordance with the following wireless headset operating methods:
Listening to the audio using the headset only, or allowing the audio to be heard from both the headset and the radio speaker Conserving the headset battery power Using the [PTT] to switch between transmitting and receiving, or switching automatically using voice Switching transmit and receive automatically even with low level sounds 1 Turn the FTM-400XDR/DE on 2 Press 3 Touch [OPTION]
for one second or longer The set-up menu will be displayed.
4 Select and touch [2 Bluetooth]
Tip This symbol is not available when BU-2 is not mounted to the radio. The screen for the settings will be displayed. 5 Touch [AUDIO]
The setting switches between AUTO and FIX each time it is touched. AUTO: When a Bluetooth headset is connected, the sound from the radio speaker will be muted and sound will only be heard from the headset. FIX: Sound can be heard from both the Bluetooth headset and the radio speaker. 6 Touch [BATTERY]
The setting will switch between NORMAL and SAVE each time it is touched. NORMAL: The Bluetooth headset battery save F u n c t i o n s t o b e U s e d w h e n N e c e s s a r y 136 function will be switched off. SAVE: The Bluetooth headset battery save function
will be switched on. Application for FCC / IC FCC ID: K6620345X40 / IC: 511B-20345X40 Using the Bluetooth Headset
7 Touch [VOX]
The setting will switch between OFF and ON each time it is touched. OFF: Switch the transmission and reception using
[PTT]. ON: Switch the transmission and reception using
voice. Tip When VOX is set to ON, [GAIN] is displayed. 8 Touch [GAIN]
The setting switches between HIGH and LOW each time it is touched. HIGH: The Bluetooth headset VOX sensitivity will become higher and more responsive to low level. LOW: The Bluetooth headsets VOX sensitivity will become lower and less responsive to low sounds. for one second or longer 9 Press The Bluetooth headset operation will be set and the display will return to the previous screen. Tip Factory default value: AUDIO: AUTO BATTERY: NORMAL VOX: OFF GAIN: HIGH Identifying the Bluetooth headset An individual identification code known as a PIN code is assigned to Bluetooth devices such as a headset. The PIN code allows mutual identification with paired devices to be carried out and recorded when initially when using a Bluetooth terminal device. This is known as pairing. Through pairing, interference and improper interception can be prevented. Pairing is also carried out initially when communicating wirelessly with this radio using a Bluetooth headset. Tip The PIN code for the Yaesu Bluetooth headset BH-2A is 6111. Check the PIN code in the operating manual of the product when using Bluetooth headsets from other companies. F u n c t i o n s t o b e U s e d w h e n N e c e s s a r y 137 Application for FCC / IC FCC ID: K6620345X40 / IC: 511B-20345X40 Using the Bluetooth Headset Example: When pairing the optional Bluetooth headset BH-2A Tip Refer to the operating manual of the product used for the pairing method when using a headset other than BH-2A. for one second or longer The set-up menu will be displayed. 1 Turn the BH-2A headset OFF 2 Press 3 Touch [CONFIG]
The menu list screen will be displayed. 4 Select and touch [15 Bluetooth PAIRING]
The input screen for the PIN code will be displayed. Tips 6111 will be displayed in the PIN code field as the factory default value. When using a headset other than BH-2A, enter the 4-digit PIN code of the headset here. The character at the cursor position will be overwritten when the number key on the screen is touched.
The LED indicator of the BH-2A will blink alternately between red and blue. 5 Press the power supply switch of the BH-2A for 5 seconds 6 Touch [ENT]
The display will return to the menu list screen and the text Pairing.. will blink in the display field of the set value. Completed will be displayed when pairing is successful and the screen will then return to the menu list. The LED indicator of the BH-2A will also blink in blue. Caution Start pairing all over again when ERROR is
F u n c t i o n s t o b e U s e d w h e n N e c e s s a r y displayed. 138 Application for FCC / IC FCC ID: K6620345X40 / IC: 511B-20345X40 for one second or longer Using the Bluetooth Headset 7 Press The display will return to the previous screen. The band display area. icon will be displayed on the top right of the
Tips Up to 8 pairing PIN codes can be saved in BU-2. When using two or more headsets such as a spare one or a personal one, set up the respective PIN codes and carry out pairing in advance. However, two headsets cannot be used at the same time. When eight pairings have been carried out after eight PIN codes have already been made, the oldest pairing information will be overwritten. Using the Bluetooth headset Once paired, a headset can be used simply by turning on the power. Tips The communication distance of the headset with the radio is about 10 m or less. The icon will not be displayed when the headset is too far from the radio and lies outside the sphere of communication. The receive audio will become audible from the headset.
(1) When the VOX function is set to OFF 1 Turn the Bluetooth headset ON 2 Press the headset [PTT]
3 Release the headset [PTT]
The radio will go into the transmit mode. The radio will go into the receive mode. The receive audio will become audible from the headset.
(2) When the VOX function set to on 1 Turn the Bluetooth headset ON 2 Speak into the microphone of the headset The radio will go into the transmit mode. Tip When you stop talking, the radio will automatically return to the receive mode. F u n c t i o n s t o b e U s e d w h e n N e c e s s a r y 139 Application for FCC / IC FCC ID: K6620345X40 / IC: 511B-20345X40
1 2 | User Manual 14 | Users Manual | 4.00 MiB |
Taking Pictures with the optional Camera (Snapshot Function) Snapshots can be easily taken with the camera that is built into the optional speaker microphone MH-85A11U. The picture taken will appear on the display for several seconds and can also be transmitted to other transceivers simply by pressing the transmit picture button on the microphone. Tips Refer to our YAESU website and catalog for the transceiver models that can transmit pictures. The picture transmit button on the microphone can only transmit picture data after the image has been taken. The snapshot function will not operate unless the micro-SD card is inserted into the card slot on the main body. The picture taken will be saved in the micro-SD card inserted into the main body card slot. The saved picture data can be transmitted to transceivers operating in the digital mode. Connecting the speaker microphone with camera 1 Switch the power supply to the radio OFF 2 Connect the MH-85A11U to the main body Refer to the figure on the right to plug the connector of the microphone into the [DATA] jack at the front of the main body. Caution Check the direction of the connector and plug it in all the way. 3 Referring to the figure, mount the provided microphone cord holder to secure the MH-85A11U cord to the main body. Caution Remove the screws at the side of the radio and use the provided screw and washer to mount the microphone cord holder. Tip As the microphone connector can be passed through the microphone cord holder attached to the radio, there is no need to remove it once it is mounted. 4 Switch on the power supply to the main device 5 Press 6 Touch [DATA]
for one second or longer The set-up menu will be displayed. Cord holder Remove the screw of the main body Provided washer Provided screw
F u n c t i o n s t o b e U s e d w h e n N e c e s s a r y 140 Application for FCC / IC FCC ID: K6620345X40 / IC: 511B-20345X40 Taking Pictures with the optional Camera (Snapshot Function) 7 Touch [1 COM PORT SETTING]
The screen for the detailed settings will be displayed. 8 Touch [OUTPUT] to select OFF(camera) The setting changes as follows each time it is touched. OFF(camera) GPS OUT PACKET WAYPOINT Tip Factory default value: OFF (camera)
9 Press for one second or longer The display will return to the previous screen. Tip The display can also be returned to the previous screen by touching [BACK] twice. Taking pictures 1 2 Point the camera lens at the object to be Insert the micro-SD card and turn the radio ON photographed and press the shutter button on the microphone Caution Keep a focal distance of at least 50 cm between the Transmit picture button Shutter button object and the camera. The picture will be out of focus when the object is too near and the image will not be clear. Tip In factory default, pictures will be taken with a size of 320 240 in the NORMAL picture quality. The size (resolution) and quality (compression ratio) of the picture can be set using OPTION 1 USB CAMERA in the set-up menu ( P.200). The picture taken will appear in the display for 10 seconds. Subsequently, the picture will be stored in JPEG format, on the microSD card that has been inserted into the main body card slot. Lens While the picture appears in the display, touch
[BACK], [DEL] or [FORWARD], you can save the data, delete or transfer it to other stations.
[BACK]:
Save the picture to the microSD card, then return to the original screen. F u n c t i o n s t o b e U s e d w h e n N e c e s s a r y 141 Application for FCC / IC FCC ID: K6620345X40 / IC: 511B-20345X40 Taking Pictures with the optional Camera (Snapshot Function)
[DEL]:
Delete the picture*, then return to the original screen.*:Deleted images, can be seen on the PC.
[FORWARD]: Send the picture to other transceivers.Press the microphone [PTT]
button to cancel the picture transmission (the picture will be stored in the microSD card). While the picture appears in the display, press the shutter button again, the picture will be saved to the microSD card, then the pic-ture taken will appear in the display. Tips It takes about 30 seconds to transmit a picture taken with a resolution of 320 240 to another transceiver. Press the microphone [PTT] button to cancel the picture transmission (it may take a while for the transmission to be canceled). After the picture is transmitted, the mode will automatically switch to DN of the AMS mode. Tip The first picture taken will be saved under the filename M000001.jpg while the pictures taken subsequently will be saved under the filenames M000002.jpg, M000003.jpg and so on in increasing order. The folder configuration in the micro-SD card is as follows and the data of the pictures taken is saved in the folder named PHOTO under the root directory. Root FTM400D BACKUP GPSLOG PHOTO GM PHOTO QSOLOG F u n c t i o n s t o b e U s e d w h e n N e c e s s a r y 142 Application for FCC / IC FCC ID: K6620345X40 / IC: 511B-20345X40 Taking Pictures with the optional Camera (Snapshot Function) Taking Pictures with the optional Camera (Snapshot Function) Viewing a saved picture 1 Press 2 Touch [LOG]
A list of the text messages or the pictures saved in The function menu will be displayed.
the micro-SD card will be displayed. Tips A list of the text messages will be displayed when the
]. This will change to a list of pictures touch key is [
when [
The date and time the picture was taken will be used as the tag of the picture. Newly taken pictures will be displayed at the top of the list.
] is touched. 3 Select and touch the picture that you want to see The picture will appear after the message Waiting... is shown. Tips Pictures taken with the resolution set to 320 240
(unit: pixel) in the set-up menu under OPTION 1 USB CAMERA PICTURE SIZE will be displayed in full screen when touched. After 10 seconds or when the picture is touched again, it will return to the original screen. Touch [EDIT] at the top right of the screen to edit the tag. Touch [DEL] to erase the picture from the micro-SD card. Touch [FORWARD] or [REPLY] to send the picture to other transceivers ( P.129). 4 Touch [BACK]
The display will return to the screen showing the list of pictures. Tip The pictures can be viewed on a personal computer by reading the contents of the micro-SD card into the personal computer. Caution When the filename of the picture is changed on the personal computer, the picture can not longer be shown in the display of the FTM-400XDR/DE. F u n c t i o n s t o b e U s e d w h e n N e c e s s a r y 143 Application for FCC / IC FCC ID: K6620345X40 / IC: 511B-20345X40 Optional receive Audio Record and Playback The receive audio received can be recorded and then played back later using the optional voice guide unit FVS-2. The voice announcing the frequency of the operating band can also be heard when the announce function is set to on. Mounting the voice guide unit FVS-2 Preparations Voice guide unit FVS-2 (optional) Plus driver Mounting procedure Cautions z Unless necessary, do not touch any parts with your hands as the semiconductors may be damaged by static electricity. z Note that labor charges to install optional items by our companys customer service support staff shall be separately chargeable. 1 Switch off the power supply to the radio 2 Switch off the external power supply 3 Unplug the control cable, microphone and DC power supply cable from the main body 4 Remove the eight screws from the main body, four on top and two each at the sides F u n c t i o n s t o b e U s e d w h e n N e c e s s a r y 144 Application for FCC / IC FCC ID: K6620345X40 / IC: 511B-20345X40 Optional receive Audio Record and Playback 5 Slowly lift up the front side of the top cover of the main body Caution Do not lift up the top cover by force. This may result in cables connected to the boards inside the main body and the speaker inside the cover to be cut. 6 Unplug the speaker cables extending from the top cover from the socket of the board inside the main body first before removing the cover Caution Hold the connector when unplugging the cable without pulling the cable itself. 7 Refer to the figure on the right to mount the FVS-2 Caution Check the direction of the connector and plug the FVS-2 in all the way to the back. Connector for FVS-2 8 Plug in the speaker cables extending from the main body top cover to the original socket on the board 9 Attach the main body top cover and secure using the screws eight F u n c t i o n s t o b e U s e d w h e n N e c e s s a r y 145 Application for FCC / IC FCC ID: K6620345X40 / IC: 511B-20345X40 Optional receive Audio Record and Playback Using the voice memory The voice memory is a function for recording the audio received. The audio is saved in FVS-2 that is mounted to the radio. The saved audio can be replayed on the radio and erased later. Setting the voice memory operation 1 Switch on the power supply to the radio 2 Press 3 Touch [OPTION]
for one second or longer The set-up menu will be displayed. 4 Select and touch [3 VOICE MEMORY]
The screen for the detailed settings will be displayed. F u n c t i o n s t o b e U s e d w h e n N e c e s s a r y 5 Touch [PLAY/REC] to set the recording time The setting will switch between FREE 5min and LAST 30sec each time it is touched. FREE 5min: A total of 5 minutes of audio in 8 recording areas can be recorded. LAST 30sec: The last 30 seconds will be recorded. Tip Factory default value: FREE 5 min for one second or longer The display will return to the previous screen. 6 Press
146 Application for FCC / IC FCC ID: K6620345X40 / IC: 511B-20345X40 Recording the receive audio Optional receive Audio Record and Playback The function menu will be displayed. 1 Press 2 Touch [REC]
The recording will be started. Tips When [REC] is not displayed in the menu, use [BACK]
or [FWD] to switch the menu. Set the recording time set using OPTION 3 VOICE MEMORY in the set-up menu will be displayed under [REC]. 3 Touch [STOP]
The recording will stop. The track number of the audio recorded will be displayed under [PLAY TRACK] . 4 Press The display will return to the previous screen. Replaying the recorded audio 1 Press 2 Touch [PLAY/REC] to select the track number to be The function menu will be displayed. replayed Tips This is not available if there is only one recording. When there are two or more recordings, the track number will change in the order ALL, 1, 2 each time it is touched. All recorded tracks will be replayed in sequence when ALL is selected.
F u n c t i o n s t o b e U s e d w h e n N e c e s s a r y 147 Application for FCC / IC FCC ID: K6620345X40 / IC: 511B-20345X40 Optional receive Audio Record and Playback 3 Touch [PLAY]
Replay will be started. The replay will stop automatically at the end of the selected track. Touch [STOP] to stop the replay. 4 Press The display will return to the previous screen. Erasing the recorded audio 1 Press 2 Touch [CLR]
The function menu will be displayed. The confirmation screen will be displayed.
3 Touch [OK?]
Erasure will be started. Caution All recorded audio will be erased. When there are two or more recordings, the track number to be erased cannot be chosen.
When the recordings are erased, [ALL] will be displayed under [PLAY TRACK].
F u n c t i o n s t o b e U s e d w h e n N e c e s s a r y
4 Press The display will return to the previous screen. 148 Application for FCC / IC FCC ID: K6620345X40 / IC: 511B-20345X40 Listening to the frequency voice announcement Optional receive Audio Record and Playback Setting the announce function operation Set the following voice announcement parameters. Automatically reading out the frequency or not Reading out the frequency in English or Japanese Reading out aloud Mute the receive audio during a voice announcement or replaying recorded audio. 1 Press 2 Touch [OPTION]
for one second or longer The set-up menu will be displayed.
3 Select and touch [3 VOICE MEMORY]
The screen for the detailed settings will be displayed. 4 Touch [ANNOUNCE] to select the condition for reading out of the frequency The setting will switch between AUTO, OFF and MANUAL each time it is touched. AUTO: The frequency is read out when the band is changed after touching [VOICE]. OFF: The frequency is not read out. MANUAL: The frequency is read out when [VOICE]
is touched. Tip Factory default value: AUTO 5 Touch [LANGUAGE] to select the language in which to read out the frequency The setting will switch between ENGLISH and JAPANESE each time it is touched. Tip Factory default value: ENGLISH
F u n c t i o n s t o b e U s e d w h e n N e c e s s a r y 149 Application for FCC / IC FCC ID: K6620345X40 / IC: 511B-20345X40 Optional receive Audio Record and Playback 6 Touch [VOLUME] to select the announcement volume The setting will switch between HIGH, MID and LOW each time it is touched. Tip Factory default value: HIGH
7 Touch [RX MUTE] to select ON/OFF The setting will switch between ON and OFF each time the symbol is touched. ON: The receive audio will be muted during a voice announcement or replaying recorded audio. OFF: The receive audio will not be muted during a voice announcement or replaying recorded audio.
Tip Factory default value: ON for one second or longer 8 Press The announce function operation will be set and the display will return to the previous screen. F u n c t i o n s t o b e U s e d w h e n N e c e s s a r y Listening to the frequency voice announcement
(1) When the operation is set to AUTO The frequency of the operating band will be automatically announced in the following cases. When the VFO mode and memory mode are switched When the operating band is changed Tips The frequency will also be announced when [VOICE] is touched. The volume may be adjusted by turning of the operating band. The function menu will be displayed.
(2) When the operation is set to MANUAL 1 Press 2 Touch [VOICE]
The frequency of the operating band will be announced.
Tip The volume can also be adjusted by turning of the operating band. 150 Application for FCC / IC FCC ID: K6620345X40 / IC: 511B-20345X40
1 2 | User Manual 15 | Users Manual | 4.45 MiB |
Copying the Radio Data to another Transceiver The memory channels and settings in the set-up menu can be copied to another FTM-
400XDR/DE. This is convenient when matching the settings of fellow stations that you communicate with frequently. Using the micro-SD card The data files saved in the FTM-400XDR/DE can be selected and copied to a micro-SD card. Copying data to a micro-SD card Insert the micro-SD card into the main body card slot for one second or longer The set-up menu will be displayed. 1 2 Press 3 Touch [SD CARD]
The menu list will be displayed. 4 Select and touch [1 BACKUP]
The screen for selecting the copy direction will be displayed. 5 Touch [Write to SD]
The screen for selecting the data files to be copied will be displayed. ALL: Copies all data. MEMORY: Copies only the memory channels and position information for backtrack use. SETUP: Copies only the settings in the set-up menu. 6 Select and touch the file to be copied The confirmation screen will be displayed.
F u n c t i o n s t o b e U s e d w h e n N e c e s s a r y 151 Application for FCC / IC FCC ID: K6620345X40 / IC: 511B-20345X40 Copying the Radio Data to another Transceiver 7 Touch [OK?]
The data selected in Step 6 will be copied to the micro-SD card. Completed will be displayed when the copying is completed.
8 Press for one second or longer The display will return to the previous screen. Copying data from the micro-SD card Insert the micro-SD card into the FTM-400XDR/DE where the data is stored and copy the data to the card 1 2 Remove the micro-SD card and insert it into the FTM-400XDR/DE that the data is going to be copied to for one second or longer The set-up menu will be displayed. 3 Press 4 Touch [SD CARD]
The menu list will be displayed. 5 Select and touch [1 BACKUP]
The screen for selecting the copy direction will be displayed. 6 Touch [Read from SD]
The screen for selecting the data files to be copied will be displayed. ALL: Copies all data. MEMORY: Copies only the memory channels and position information for backtrack use. SETUP: Copies only the settings in the set-up menu. F u n c t i o n s t o b e U s e d w h e n N e c e s s a r y 152
Application for FCC / IC FCC ID: K6620345X40 / IC: 511B-20345X40 Copying the Radio Data to another Transceiver 7 Select and touch the data to be copied The confirmation screen will be displayed. Tip Data that has not been saved in the micro-SD card cannot be touched. 8 Touch [OK?]
The data selected in Step 7 will be copied to the micro-SD card. Completed will be displayed when the copying is completed.
9 Press for one second or longer The display will return to the previous screen. Tip The group and member information saved in the memory using the GM function can be copied using the micro-SD card. Refer to the separate Operating Manual GM Edition for details (download the manual from the YAESU website). Using the clone function Using the clone function, all the data saved in the radio can be copied directly to another FTM-400XDR/DE. Example: When using the clone function in two FTM-400XDR/DEs 1 Turn both FTM-400XDR/DEs OFF 2 Plug in the optional clone cable CT-166 into the respective [DATA] jacks at the back of the main bodies F u n c t i o n s t o b e U s e d w h e n N e c e s s a r y 3 Turn both FTM-400XDR/DEs ON 4 Press for one second or longer The set-up menu will be displayed. 153 Application for FCC / IC FCC ID: K6620345X40 / IC: 511B-20345X40 Copying the Radio Data to another Transceiver 5 Touch [RESET/CLONE]
The menu list will be displayed. 6 Select and touch [7 CLONE]
The screen for selecting the copy direction will be displayed. 7 Select and touch [This radio other] in the FTM-
400XDR/DE where the data is going to be copied from The confirmation screen will be displayed.
8 Select and touch [Other This radio] in the FTM-400XDR/DE where the data is going to be copied to The confirmation screen will be displayed. 9 Touch [OK?] for each one The data will be copied. Completed will be displayed when the copying is completed.
for one second or longer 10 Press 11 Switch OFF both of the FTM-400XDR/DEs and disconnect the clone cable The display will return to the previous screen. Cautions z When ERROR is displayed during the copy (clone) operation, check the connection of the clone cable and start the clone operation all again. z When the operation is terminated before completion due to loss of power during the copy (clone) operation, the FTM-400XDR/DE where the data is being copied to will automatically be reset. Check if there is any abnormality in the power supply and start the cloning operation over again 154 F u n c t i o n s t o b e U s e d w h e n N e c e s s a r y Application for FCC / IC FCC ID: K6620345X40 / IC: 511B-20345X40 Using the Radio with an External Device Connected The provided PC connection cable SCU-20 and other optional cables can be used to connect the radio to a personal computer as a COM port for the following operations. Transmitting your own station position information to the personal computer for incorporation into the map software Updating the firmware of the radio Packet communication Use the [DATA] jack at the back of the main body to connect with the personal computer. The pin assignment of the [DATA] jack is as follows. PKD (packet data input) (300 mVp-p) GND PSK (PTT) RX 9600 (9600 bps packet data output) RX 1200 (1200 bps packet data output) (300 mVp-p) PK SQL (squelch control) TXD (serial data output [transceiver PC]) RXD (serial data input [transceiver PC]) CTS (data communication control) RTS (data communication control)
[DATA]
jack Connecting to a personal computer Preparations Personal computer PC connection cable SCU-20 (accessories) when connecting to the USB terminal of a personal computer To the transceiver To the personal computer
(USB terminal) F u n c t i o n s t o b e U s e d w h e n N e c e s s a r y PKD (packet data input) GND PSK (PTT) RX 9600 (9600 bps packet data output) RX 1200 (1200 bps packet data output) PK SQL (squelch control) TXD (serial data output [transceiver PC]) RXD (serial data input [transceiver PC]) CTS (data communication control) RTS (data communication control) 155 Application for FCC / IC FCC ID: K6620345X40 / IC: 511B-20345X40 Using the Radio with an External Device Connected Data cable CT-165 (optional) when connecting to the RS-232C terminal of a personal computer To the transceiver To the personal computer
-
GND
-
-
-
-
TXD (serial data output [transceiver PC]) RXD (serial data input [transceiver PC]) CTS (data communication control) RTS (data communication control)
-
TXD (serial data output [transceiver PC]) RXD (serial data input [transceiver PC])
-
GND
-
CTS (data communication control) RTS (data communication control)
-
Tips Make sure to switch off the power to the radio first before connecting. When using the PC connection cable SCU-20, a dedicated driver needs to be installed in the personal computer. Download and use the driver and installation manual from the YAESU website. Sending position information to the computer for one second or longer The set-up menu will be displayed. 1 Turn the radio ON 2 Press 3 Touch [DATA]
The menu list will be displayed. 4 Select and touch [1 COM PORT SETTING]
The screen for the detailed settings will be displayed.
F u n c t i o n s t o b e U s e d w h e n N e c e s s a r y 156 Application for FCC / IC FCC ID: K6620345X40 / IC: 511B-20345X40 Using the Radio with an External Device Connected 5 Touch [OUTPUT] to select GPS OUT The setting changes as follows each time it is touched. OFF(camera) GPS OUT PACKET WAYPOINT Tip Factory default value: OFF (camera) Caution The snapshot function of the speaker microphone with camera will be inactivated when this is set to OFF (camera). 6 Touch [SPEED] to select the communication speed of the COM port The setting changes as follows each time it is touched. 4800 bps 9600 bps 19200 bps 38400 bps 57600 bps Tip Factory default value: 9600 bps for one second or longer
7 Press The display will return to the previous screen. The output of the position information data will start, and your own position information will be transmitted to the personal computer at intervals of about a second. Tip An operating software using NMEA-0183 standard GGA and RMC sentence is required to use the position information. Updating the firmware of the radio The firmware of the radio can be updated by connecting to a personal computer when Updated firmware is available.. Download and use the updated version of the firmware and the update manual from the YAESU website. F u n c t i o n s t o b e U s e d w h e n N e c e s s a r y 157 Application for FCC / IC FCC ID: K6620345X40 / IC: 511B-20345X40 Using the Radio with an External Device Connected Using the radio as a transceiver for packet communication Packet communication via this radio is possible by connecting this radio to the TNC
(terminal node controller). Preparations TNC Personal computer Data cable* Prepare a data cable to match the connecting device
* We supply the following optional products. Data cable CT-167 (optional) To the transceiver To the TNC etc.
F u n c t i o n s t o b e U s e d w h e n N e c e s s a r y PKD (packet data input) GND PSK (PTT) RX 9600 (9600 bps packet data output) RX 1200 (1200 bps packet data output) PK SQL (squelch control) TXD (serial data output [transceiver PC]) RXD (serial data input [transceiver PC]) CTS (data communication control) RTS (data communication control) Data cable CT-164 (optional) PKD (packet data input) Brown Black thick wire GND Red Orange Yellow Green Blue Grey White Black PSK (PTT) RX 9600 (9600 bps packet data output) RX 1200 (1200 bps packet data output) PK SQL (squelch control) TXD (serial data output) [transceiver PC]) RXD (serial data input [transceiver PC]) CTS (data communication control) RTS (data communication control) To the transceiver To the TNC etc. PKD (packet data input) GND PSK (PTT) RX 9600 (9600 bps packet data output) RX 1200 (1200 bps packet data output) PK SQL (squelch control)
-
-
-
-
PKD (packet data input) GND PSK (PTT) RX 9600 (9600 bps packet data output) RX 1200 (1200 bps packet data output) PK SQL (squelch control) 158 Application for FCC / IC FCC ID: K6620345X40 / IC: 511B-20345X40 Data cable CT-163 (optional) Using the Radio with an External Device Connected To the personal computer etc. To the transceiver PKD (packet data input) GND PSK (PTT) RX 9600 (9600 bps packet data output) RX 1200 (1200 bps packet data output) PK SQL (squelch control) TXD (serial data output [transceiver PC]) RXD (serial data input [transceiver PC]) CTS (data communication control) RTS (data communication control) To the TNC etc. Dsub 9 pin
-
TXD (serial data output [transceiver PC]) RXD (serial data input [transceiver PC])
-
GND
-
CTS (data communication control) RTS (data communication control)
-
DIN 6 pin PKD (packet data input) GND PSK (PTT) RX 9600 (9600 bps packet data output) RX 1200 (1200 bps packet data output) PK SQL (squelch control) Tips Make sure to turn the power to the radio OFF before connecting. Refer to the operating manual of the TNC used on how to connect the TNC to a personal computer. RF receive interference may occur because of noise occurring in the personal computer. When signals cannot be received normally, keep the personal computer at a distance away from the radio and use a photo-coupler and noise filter to connect. F u n c t i o n s t o b e U s e d w h e n N e c e s s a r y 159 Application for FCC / IC FCC ID: K6620345X40 / IC: 511B-20345X40 Using the Radio with an External Device Connected Set the packet communication operation 1 Turn the radio ON 2 Press 3 Touch [DATA]
for one second or longer The set-up menu will be displayed. The menu list will be displayed. 4 Select and touch [1 COM PORT SETTING]
The screen for the detailed settings will be displayed. 5 Touch [OUTPUT] to select PACKET The setting changes as follows each time it is touched. OFF(camera) GPS OUT PACKET WAYPOINT Tip Factory default value: OFF (camera) Caution The snapshot function of the speaker microphone with camera will be inactivated when this is set to OFF (camera). 6 Touch [SPEED] to select the communication speed of the COM port The setting changes as follows each time it is touched. 4800 bps 9600 bps 19200 bps 38400 bps 57600 bps Tip Factory default value: 9600 bps F u n c t i o n s t o b e U s e d w h e n N e c e s s a r y 7 Touch [BACK]
8 Select and touch [2 DATA BAND SELECT]
The screen for the detailed settings will be displayed. 160
Application for FCC / IC FCC ID: K6620345X40 / IC: 511B-20345X40 Using the Radio with an External Device Connected 9 Touch [DATA] to select the band to be used for the packet communication The setting changes as follows each time it is touched. A-BAND FIX B-BAND FIX A=TX/B=RX A=RX/B=TX MAIN BAND SUB BAND Tips Refer to Data communication settings ( P.193) for details. Factory default value: B-BAND FIX 10 Touch [BACK]
11 Select and touch [3 DATA SPEED]
The screen for the detailed settings will be displayed. 12 Touch [DATA] to select the packet communication speed The setting will switch between 1200 bps and 9600 bps each time it is touched. Tip Factory default value: 1200 bps 13 Touch [BACK]
14 Select and touch [4 DATA SQUELCH]
The screen for the detailed settings will be displayed. 15 Touch [DATA] to select the squelch detection method for the packet communication The setting switches between RX BAND and TX/
RX BAND each time it is touched. Tips Refer to Data communication settings ( P.193) for details. Factory default value: RX BAND
F u n c t i o n s t o b e U s e d w h e n N e c e s s a r y 161 Application for FCC / IC FCC ID: K6620345X40 / IC: 511B-20345X40 Using the Radio with an External Device Connected for one second or longer The display will return to the previous screen. 16 Press Packet communication will be enabled. 17 Choose the band and frequency according to the settings in the set-up menu 18 Turn 19 Adjust the TNC output level The output level to TNC from the radio will be set. The input level to the radio will be set. of the receive band Caution When transmitting a large volume of data, the transmission time gets longer and the radio will get heated up. When transmission continues for a long period of time, the overheating prevention circuit will act to lower the transmit power output. When transmission is continued further, transmission will be suspended automatically and the radio will go into the receive mode in order to prevent failure due to overheating. When the overheating prevention circuit is activated and the radio goes into the receive mode, either switch turn OFF the power, or wait until the temperature drops in the reception mode. Other devices that can be connected External speaker An optional high output and high sound quality waterproof external speaker MLS-
200-M10 can be connected. Plug the external speaker into the [EXT SP] jack at the back of the main body. Tip When an external speaker is connected to the [EXT SP] jack, there will be no sound from the internal speaker. If you connect an External Speaker other than the MLS-200-M10 to the [EXT SP] Jack, use a Stereo Speaker only (Do not connect a Monaural Speaker plug directly into the
[EXT SP] Jack.) If you wish to connect a Monaural Speaker to the [EXT SP] Jack, use the supplied "Stereo to Monaural Plug" (see figure). F u n c t i o n s t o b e U s e d w h e n N e c e s s a r y Monaural Speaker Plug Stereo to Monaural Plug 162 Application for FCC / IC FCC ID: K6620345X40 / IC: 511B-20345X40 Customize Menu Settings and User Preferences Using the set-up menu, the various functions of the radio can be customized to match your individual preferences and type of use. The functions are divided into menus such as display, transmission and reception, memory, device configuration etc.. It is easy to select the items that you would like to adjust from the respective lists and enter or select the settings that are easy to use. Set-up Menu Basic Operations 1 Press for one second or longer The set-up menu will be displayed. 2 Touch the menu item The menu list will be displayed. 3 Select the item to be set or touch the item. Turn The item will turn orange in color. Tip Turn to select items that are not visible on the screen. 4 Change the set values Press briefly or touch the item. The set value will change each time it is pressed or touched. Tip When > is displayed in the set value field, pressing or touching an item will display the screen with the detailed settings.
5 Press for one second or longer, or press [PTT] on the microphone The chosen value will be confirmed and the display will return to the previous screen. Tips The chosen value can also be confirmed by pressing When setting additional items in the same menu next, touch [BACK]. The set value will be confirmed and the display will return to the menu list screen. When [BACK] is touched in any of the screens, the display will return to the previous screen. briefly. Tip When a set menu item is touched again, and the menu list is displayed, a screen in which a previously set item is already selected (displayed in orange color) will be displayed. 163 Customize Menu Settings and User PreferencesApplication for FCC / IC FCC ID: K6620345X40 / IC: 511B-20345X40
1 2 | User Manual 16 | Users Manual | 1.69 MiB |
Set-up Menu List Menu / Item DISPLAY 1 DISPLAY SELECT 2 TARGET LOCATION 3 BACKGROUND COLOR 4 BAND SCOPE 5 LCD BRIGHTNESS 6 LCD CONTRAST 7 TIME/VDD TX/RX MODE DIGITAL 1 AMS TX MODE 2 SQL TYPE 3 SQL CODE 6 STANDBY BEEP 7 DSP VERSION AUDIO 1 SUB BAND MUTE 2 MIC GAIN MEMORY 1 ALPHA TAG SIZE 2 MEM SCAN TYPE SIGNALING 1 TONE SQL FREQ 2 DCS CODE 3 AUTO DIALER 4 DTMF MEMORY 164 Explanation of function Available settings
(Default values shown in BOLD) is pressed ALTITUDE: ON / OFF TIMER/CLOCK: ON / OFF GPS INFO: ON / OFF COMPASS / NUMERIC Screen display settings when briefly Switch between the compass screen and the latitude and longitude display screen when using the GPS and GM functions Set the display background color Scope Display width setting Touch panel brightness MIN / 2 / 3 / 4 / 5 / 6 / MAX
-3 / -2 / -1 / 0 / +1 / +2 / +3 Touch panel contrast TIME / VDD Time / Voltage Display setting ORANGE / GREEN / BLUE / PURPLE /
GRAY NARROW / WIDE Setting the signal format in the analog mode AUTO (FM) / FM / NARROW FM / AM Set the AMS transmission mode Digital mode Squelch type setting Squelch code setting in the digital mode up time display setting in the digital mode Standby Beep setting DSP version display TX M / TX FM FIXED / TX DN FIXED /
TX VW FIXED / AUTO OFF / CODE / BREAK CODE: 001 to 126 OFF / 2 sec / 4 sec / 6 sec / 8 sec / 10 sec /
20 sec / 30 sec / 60 sec / CONTINUE ON / OFF Refer to the separate Operating Manual GM Edition for details on the functions. ON / OFF Ver. 2.** (cannot be edited; differs depending on the time of release) Sub-band mute setting OFF / ON Microphone sensitivity setting MIN / LOW / NORMAL / HIGH / MAX Display size setting of memory channel tag Scanning method setting during memory scan SMALL / LARGE ALL MEM / SELECT MEM 67.0Hz - 254.1 Hz 88.5 Hz Tone frequency
(CTCSS) DCS code setting DTMF code automatic transmission setting DTMF code registration 1 - 9 ways 16 characters each 023 - 754 OFF / ON 4 DIGITAL POPUP TIME Information screen pop-
5 LOCATION SERVICE Own (MY) position Customize Menu Settings and User PreferencesApplication for FCC / IC FCC ID: K6620345X40 / IC: 511B-20345X40 Menu / Item SIGNALING 5 PAGER CODE 6 PRG REV TONE 7 BELL RINGER 8 SQL EXPANSION 9 WX ALERT
(USA Version Only) 1 DUAL WATCH STOP SCAN 2 SCAN DIRECTION 3 SCAN RESUME GM 1 RANGE RINGER 2 RADIO ID Set-up Menu List Explanation of function Available settings
(Default values shown in BOLD) Pager individual code setting User programmed reverse tone frequency Recall sound length setting Separate squelch type setting for transmit and receive Weather alert operation setting Setting the signal reception method Scanning direction setting Set the resume operation after scan stop Bell sound setting when checking for stations within sphere of communications Specific ID display by transceiver RX CODE : 01 - 50 05 RX CODE 2: 01 - 50 47 TX CODE 1: 01 - 50 05 TX CODE 2: 01 - 50 47 300 Hz - 3000 Hz 1500 Hz OFF / 1 time / 3 times / 5 times / 8 times /
CONTINUOUS OFF / ON OFF / ON AUTO / HOLD UP / DOWN BUSY / HOLD / 1 sec / 3 sec / 5 sec OFF / ON
- (cannot be edited)
* Refer to the separate Operating Manual GM Edition for details on the functions. WIRES X 1 RPT/WIRES FREQ PRESET FREQUENCY 2 SEARCH SETUP Setting of operating frequency in repeater /
WIRES-X Registration of the preset frequency Setting the WIRES ROOM selection method MANUAL / PRESET 144.000 - 146.000 144.620 HISTORY / ACTIVITY 3 EDIT CATEGORY TAG Editing the category tag C1 - C5 4 REMOVE ROOM/NODE Deletion of the C1 - C5 registered categories
* Refer to the separate Operating Manual WIRES-X Edition for details on the functions. CONFIG 1 DATE & TIME ADJUST Setting the date and time 2 DATE & TIME FORMAT Setting the date and time display formats
-
DATE: mmm/dd/yyyy /
yyyy/mmm/dd / dd/mmm/yyyy /
yyyy/dd/mmm 3 TIME ZONE 4 AUTO RPT SHIFT 5 RPT SHIFT TIME: 24 hour / 12 hour UTC14: 00 (0.5 h interval) UTC +0: 00 Time zone setting Auto repeater shift setting OFF / ON Repeater shift direction OFF / / +
(Differs depending on frequency) setting 165 Customize Menu Settings and User PreferencesApplication for FCC / IC FCC ID: K6620345X40 / IC: 511B-20345X40 Explanation of function Available settings
(Default values shown in BOLD) Set-up Menu List Menu / Item CONFIG 6 RPT SHIFT FREQ 7 FM AM STEP Repeater TX offset setting Channel step setting 8 BEEP 9 CLOCK TYPE 10 MIC PROGRAM KEY Beep setting Clock shift setting Microphone P buttons setting 0.00 - 99.95 MHz
(Differs depending on frequency) AUTO / 5.00 KHz / 6.25 KHz / 10.00 KHz /
12.50 KHz / 15.00 KHz / 20.00 KHz /
25.00 KHz / 50.00 KHz / 100.00 KHz OFF / LOW / HIGH A / B OFF (disable the P button) / BAND SCOPE /
SCAN / HOME / DCS CODE /
TONE FREQ / RPT SHIFT / REVERSE /
TX POWER / SQL OFF / T-CALL / VOICE /
D_X / WX / S-LIST / MSG / REPLY /
M-EDIT P1: SQL OFF (T-CALL: European version) P2: HOME P3: D_X P4: TX POWER NORMAL / WIDE METRIC / INCH
(Depends on the transceiver version) OFF / 0.5 hour - 12.0 hour 11 RX COVERAGE 12 UNIT 13 APO 14 TOT 15 Bluetooth PAIRING 16 GPS DATUM 17 GPS DEVICE 18 GPS LOG Reception range expansion setting Display unit setting Automatic power OFF operating time TX time out setting PIN code setting and pairing start GPS function positioning selection GPS receiver selection GPS access time setting OFF / 1 sec - 60 sec OFF / 1 min - 5 min - 30 min 0000 - 9999 6111 WGS-84 / TOKYO MEAN INTERNAL / EXTERNAL 1 COM PORT SETTING COM port setting 2 DATA BAND SELECT APRS/DATA band selection setting 3 DATA SPEED APRS/DATA communication baud rate setting SPEED: 4800 bps / 9600 bps /
19200 bps / 38400 bps / 57600 bps OUTPUT: OFF (camera) /
GPS OUT / PACKET / WAYPOINT WP FORMAT: NMEA 6 / NMEA 7 /
NMEA 8 / NMEA 9 WP FILTER: ALL / MOBILE /
FREQUENCY / OBJECT/ITEM /
DIGIPEATER / VoIP / WEATHER /
YAESU / CALL RINGER / RNG RINGER APRS: MAIN BAND / SUB BAND /
A-BAND FIX / B-BAND FIX /
A=TX/B=RX / A=RX/B=TX DATA: MAIN BAND / SUB BAND / A-BAND FIX / B-BAND FIX / A=TX/B=RX /
A=RX/B=TX APRS: 1200 bps / 9600 bps DATA: 1200 bps / 9600 bps DATA 166 Customize Menu Settings and User PreferencesApplication for FCC / IC FCC ID: K6620345X40 / IC: 511B-20345X40 Menu / Item Explanation of function Available settings
(Default values shown in BOLD) Set-up Menu List DATA APRS 4 DATA SQUELCH Squelch detection setting 1 APRS COMPASS 3 APRS FILTER APRS compass display orientation Non-editable Filter function setting 2 APRS DESTINATION Model code display APRS: RX BAND / TX/RX BAND DATA: RX BAND / TX/RX BAND TX: ON / OFF NORTH UP / HEADING UP APY400 Mic-E: ON / OFF POSITION: ON / OFF WEATHER: ON / OFF OBJECT: ON / OFF ITEM: ON / OFF STATUS: ON / OFF OTHER: ON / OFF RANGE LIMIT: 1 mi - 3000 mi / OFF ALT.NET: ON / OFF 1 to 8 ch OFF / ON OFF / ON BEACON: OFF / 3 sec / 5 sec / 10 sec /
MESSAGE: OFF / 3 sec / 5 sec / 10 sec /
HOLD HOLD MYPACKET: OFF / ON CHECK OFF / GREEN / BLUE /
ORANGE / PURPLE / SKY-BLUE /
YELLOW / AMBER / WHITE 1 BEACON: CHECK OFF 2 MOBILE: CHECK OFF 3 OBJECT/ITEM: CHECK OFF 4 CAL RINGER: CHECK OFF 5 RNG RINGER: CHECK OFF 6 MESSAGE: CHECK OFF 7 GRP/BULT: CHECK OFF 8 MY PACKET: CHECK OFF TX BEACON: ON / OFF TX MESSAGE: ON / OFF RX BEACON: ON / OFF RX MESSAGE: ON / OFF MY PACKET: ON / OFF CALL RINGER: ON / OFF RNG RINGER: 1km - 100km / OFF MSG VOICE: ON / OFF 1 - 8 stations 167 4 APRS MESSAGE TEXT Standard message text 5 APRS MODEM 6 APRS MUTE 7 APRS POP-UP input APRS function ON/OFF setting Band B AF mute setting for APRS Display time setting for pop-up display of beacons and messages 8 APRS POP-UP COLOR Screen color setting for pop-up display of beacons 9 APRS RINGER Bell sound setting at beacon arrival 10 APRS RINGER (CALL) Call sign setting for CALL RINGER Customize Menu Settings and User PreferencesApplication for FCC / IC FCC ID: K6620345X40 / IC: 511B-20345X40 Set-up Menu List Menu / Item APRS 11 APRS TX DELAY 12 APRS UNITS Data transmit delay time setting APRS display unit setting Explanation of function Available settings
(Default values shown in BOLD) 13 BEACON INFO SELECT Transmit beacon information setting Status text input setting SELECT: TEXT 1 - 5 / OFF 100 ms / 150 ms / 200 ms / 250 ms /
300 ms / 400 ms / 500 ms / 750 ms /
1000 ms 1 POSITION: ddmm.mm' / ddmm'ss''
2 DISTANCE: km / mile 3 SPEED: km/h / mph / knot 4 ALTITUDE: m / ft 5 BARO: hPa / mb / mmHg / inHg 6 TEMP: C / F 7 RAIN: mm / inch 8 WIND: m/s / mph / knot AMBIGUITY: OFF / 1 - 4 digit SPEED/COURSE: ON / OFF ALTITUDE: ON / OFF TX RATE: 1/1 - 1/8 /
1/2 (FREQ) - 1/8 (FREQ) TEXT 1 - 5: NONE / FREQUENCY /
FREQ & SQL & SHIFT AUTO: OFF / ON INTERVAL: 30 sec - 60 min 5 min PROPORTIONAL: ON / OFF DECAY: ON / OFF LOW SPEED: 1 - 99 3 RATE LIMIT: 5 sec - 180 sec 30 sec OFF / WIDE 1-1 / WIDE 1-1,WIDE 2-1 /
PATH 1 - PATH 4 / FULL 1 / FULL 2 ADDRESS 1: -
ADDRESS 2: -
ADDRESS 1: -
ADDRESS 2: -
ADDRESS 1: -
ADDRESS 2: -
ADDRESS 1: -
ADDRESS 2: -
ADDRESS 1: -
ADDRESS 2: -
ADDRESS 3: -
ADDRESS 4: -
ADDRESS 5: -
ADDRESS 6: -
ADDRESS 7: -
ADDRESS 8: -
ADDRESS 1: -
ADDRESS 2: -
ADDRESS 3: -
ADDRESS 4: -
ADDRESS 5: -
ADDRESS 6: -
ADDRESS 7: -
ADDRESS 8: -
14 BEACON STATUS TEXT 15 BEACON TX 16 DIGI PATH SELECT 17 DIGI PATH 1 18 DIGI PATH 2 19 DIGI PATH 3 20 DIGI PATH 4 Beacon automatic transmit / manual transmission switch Digital repeater route setting Digital repeater route address setting 21 DIGI PATH FULL 1 Digital repeater route address setting 22 DIGI PATH FULL 2 168 Customize Menu Settings and User PreferencesApplication for FCC / IC FCC ID: K6620345X40 / IC: 511B-20345X40 Set-up Menu List Explanation of function Available settings
(Default values shown in BOLD) Menu / Item APRS 23 CALLSIGN (APRS) 24 MESSAGE GROUP My call sign setting Group filter setting for received messages 25 MESSAGE REPLY 26 MY POSITION SET 27 MY POSITION 28 MY SYMBOL Automatic response setting of received messages My position setting My position manual setting My symbol setting 29 POSITION COMMENT Position comment setting 31 SORT FILTER Sort function / filter function setting 30 Smart Beaconing Smart beaconing setting 1 STATUS: OFF / TYPE 1 / TYPE 2 /
-
GROUP 1: ALL GROUP 2: CQ GROUP 3: QST GROUP 4: YAESU GROUP 5: -
GROUP 6: -
BULLETIN 1: BLN?
BULLETIN 2: BLN?
BULLETIN 3: BLN?
REPLY: OFF / ON CALLSIGN: -
REPLY TEXT: -
GPS / MANUAL LAT: N 000. 00' (' 00'') LON: E 000. 00' (' 00'') ICON 1: [/>] Car ICON 2: [/R] REC.Vehicle ICON 3: [/-] House QTH (VHF) USER: [YY] Yaesu Radios Off Duty / En Route / In Service /
Returning / Committed / Special / Priority /
Custom 0 - 6 / Emergency!
TYPE 3 2 LOW SPEED: 2 - 30 5 3 HIGH SPEED: 3 - 90 70 4 SLOW RATE: 1 - 100 min 30 min 5 FAST RATE: 10 - 180 sec 120 sec 6 TURN ANGLE: 5 - 90 28 7 TURN SLOPE: 1 - 255 26 8 TURN TIME: 5 - 180 sec 30 sec SORT: TIME / CALLSIGN / DISTANCE FILTER : ALL / MOBILE / FREQUENCY /
OBJECT/ITEM / DIGIPEATER / VoIP /
WEATHER / YAESU / OTHER PACKET /
CALL RINGER / RANGE RINGER /
1200 bps / 9600 bps VOICE ALERT: NORMAL / TONE SQL /
DCS / RX-TSQL / RX-DCS 32 VOICE ALERT Voice alert function setting TONE SQL: 67.0 Hz - 254.1 Hz 100.0 Hz DCS: 023 - 754 023
* Refer to the separate Operation Manual APRS Edition for details on the functions. SD CARD Write to SD / Read from SD 1 BACKUP 2 GROUP ID Reading and writing information of the radio to the micro-SD card Reading and writing GROUP ID information to the micro-SD card Write to SD / Read from SD 169 Customize Menu Settings and User PreferencesApplication for FCC / IC FCC ID: K6620345X40 / IC: 511B-20345X40 3 VOICE MEMORY Voice memory function setting Explanation of function Available settings
(Default values shown in BOLD) Initializing the micro-SD card Picture size / picture quality setting for the microphone with camera Bluetooth headset setting
-
PICTURE SIZE: 160 120 / 320 240 PICTURE QUALITY: LOW / NORMAL /
HIGH AUDIO: AUTO / FIX BATTERY: NORMAL / SAVE VOX: ON /OFF GAIN: HIGH / LOW PLAY/REC: FREE 5 min / LAST 30 sec ANNOUNCE: AUTO / OFF / MANUAL LANGUAGE: JAPANESE / ENGLISH VOLUME: HIGH / MID / LOW RX MUTE: ON / OFF Return all settings to default settings when shipped Preset registration Recall preset Erasing registered memory channels Sorting registered memory channels Return APRS settings to default settings when shipped Copy all saved data My call sign setting
-
-
-
-
-
-
This radio other / Other This radio
-
Set-up Menu List Menu / Item SD CARD 3 FORMAT OPTION 1 USB CAMERA 2 Bluetooth RESET/CLONE 1 FACTORY RESET 2 PRESET 3 RECALL PRESET 4 MEM CH RESET 5 MEM CH SORT 6 APRS RESET 7 CLONE CALLSIGN CALLSIGN 170 Customize Menu Settings and User PreferencesApplication for FCC / IC FCC ID: K6620345X40 / IC: 511B-20345X40 Using the Set-up Menu Screen display settings Select the screen to be displayed Set the type of screen to be displayed when pressing 1 Press 2 Touch [DISPLAY]
for one second or longer The set-up menu will be displayed. briefly. 3 Touch [1 DISPLAY SELECT]
The display setting screen will be displayed. 4 Touch the item to be displayed Select from ALTITUDE, TIMER/CLOCK and GPS INFO, the screen that you would like to display. Each time the item is touched, the setting will switch between ON and OFF.
5 Set the other screens as well Repeat Step 4 and set the other screens as well. 6 Press for one second or longer The screen to be displayed will be set and the display will return to the previous screen. Tip Factory default value: All screens are set to OFF 171 Customize Menu Settings and User PreferencesApplication for FCC / IC FCC ID: K6620345X40 / IC: 511B-20345X40 Using the Set-up Menu Switching between COMPASS and POSITION INFORMATION screens When using the GPS and GM functions, the screen will switch between the Compass Screen and the Position Information (Latitude and Longitude) Display Screen. 1 Press 2 Touch [DISPLAY]
for one second or longer The set-up menu will be displayed.
3 Touch [2 TARGET LOCATION] to select the display content Each time this symbol is touched, the setting will switch between COMPASS and NUMERIC. COMPASS: The compass screen will be displayed. NUMERIC: The position information (latitude and longitude) display screen will be displayed. Tip Factory default value: COMPASS for one second or longer 4 Press The display contents will be set and the display will return to the previous screen. Setting the display background color The display background color can be selected from the following 5 colors. Orange Green Blue Purple Grey Refer to Changing the background color of the frequency display area ( P.60) for details. Setting the band scope display width The frequency bandwidth and memory channel number to be displayed when band scope is running can be set. 1 Press 2 Touch [DISPLAY]
for one second or longer The set-up menu will be displayed.
172 Customize Menu Settings and User PreferencesApplication for FCC / IC FCC ID: K6620345X40 / IC: 511B-20345X40 Using the Set-up Menu
3 Touch [4 BAND SCOPE] to select the frequency width The frequency bandwidth will switch between WIDE and NARROW each time this symbol is touched. WIDE: The frequency bandwidth will be displayed using a wide search width. NARROW: The frequency bandwidth will be displayed using a narrow search width. WIDE NARROW VFO mode 25 steps 12 steps Memory mode 25 channels 5 channels Tip Factory default value: WIDE for one second or longer 4 Press The bandwidth of the frequency will be set and the display will return to the previous screen. Setting the display brightness The brightness of the touch panel can be set. Refer to Adjusting the display brightness ( P.58) for details. Setting the display contrast The contrast of the touch panel can be adjusted. Refer to Adjusting the display contrast ( P.58) for details. Switching the time display and the voltage display The display at the top right of the display can be changed between Time Display and Voltage Display. 1 Press 2 Touch [DISPLAY]
for one second or longer The set-up menu will be displayed.
173 Customize Menu Settings and User PreferencesApplication for FCC / IC FCC ID: K6620345X40 / IC: 511B-20345X40 Using the Set-up Menu 3 Touch [7 TIME/VDD] to select the display content The display content changes between TIME and VDD each time the symbol is touched. TIME: The time will be displayed. VDD: The voltage will be displayed.
Tip Factory default value: TIME for one second or longer 4 Press The display content will be set and the display will return to the previous screen. Transmit and receive settings Setting the signal format The radio signal format can be selected from FM, AM and NARROW FM in the analog mode. Refer to Changing the radio signal format ( P.46) for details. Setting the AMS transmission mode When operating in the AMS function, the transmit mode may be selected:
1 Press 2 Touch [TX/RX]
for one second or longer The set-up menu will be displayed.
3 Touch [DIGITAL]
174 Customize Menu Settings and User PreferencesApplication for FCC / IC FCC ID: K6620345X40 / IC: 511B-20345X40
1 2 | User Manual 17 | Users Manual | 2.54 MiB |
4 Touch [1 AMS TX MODE] to select the AMS transmit mode. The AMS transmit mode changes in the following order each time the symbol is touched. TX M: The operating mode is automatically selected from four communication modes to match the received signal. Pressing the Microphone
[PTT] momentarily, toggles between the Digital and Analog communication modes. Using the Set-up Menu
TX FM FIXED: The RX mode is automatically selected from the four communication modes to match the received signal. The TX mode is automatically changed to the FM mode. TX DN FIXED: The RX mode is automatically selected from the four communication modes to match the received signal. The TX mode is automatically changed to the DN mode. TX VW FIXED: The RX mode is automatically selected from the four communication modes to match the received signal. The TX mode is automatically changed to the VW mode. AUTO: The RX and TX operating mode is automatically selected from the four communication modes to match the received signal. Tips Factory default value: TX M
: TX M
: TX FM FIXED / TX DN FIXED / TX VW FIXED Blink Blink
: AUTO
* The symbol display differs according to the received signal. 5 Press for one second or longer The AMS transmit mode will be set and the display will return to the previous screen. Setting the squelch type of the digital mode The squelch type in the digital mode can be set. 1 Press 2 Touch [TX/RX]
for one second or longer The set-up menu will be displayed. 3 Touch [DIGITAL]
175 Customize Menu Settings and User PreferencesApplication for FCC / IC FCC ID: K6620345X40 / IC: 511B-20345X40 Using the Set-up Menu 4 Touch [2 SQL TYPE]
The squelch type changes in the following order each time the symbol is touched. OFF CODE BREAK OFF: There will always be audio output when a digital
signal of a YAESU transceiver is received.
CODE: Audio will only be output when the received signals have a matching SQL CODE. BREAK: Regardless of the CODE setting, audio will be output when the partner station transmits using the BREAK setting. Tip Factory default value: OFF for one second or longer 5 Press The squelch type will be set and the display will return to the previous screen. Setting the squelch code of the digital mode A squelch code may be set in the digital mode. 1 Press 2 Touch [TX/RX]
for one second or longer The set-up menu will be displayed. 3 Touch [DIGITAL]
4 Select and touch [3 SQL CODE]
The characters of the set value will turn orange in color. 176
Customize Menu Settings and User PreferencesApplication for FCC / IC FCC ID: K6620345X40 / IC: 511B-20345X40 5 Turn to select the code Tips The code can be selected from 001 to 126. Factory default value: 001 6 Touch [3 SQL CODE]
The characters of the set value will turn green in color. Using the Set-up Menu
7 Press for one second or longer The squelch code will be set and the display will return to the previous screen. Setting the pop-up time for the partner station information The time that partner station information such as the call sign is displayed can be set. 1 Press 2 Touch [TX/RX]
for one second or longer The set-up menu will be displayed.
3 Touch [DIGITAL]
4 Touch [4 DIGITAL POPUP TIME] to select the pop-
up time The pop-up time changes in the following order each time the symbol is touched. OFF 2sec 4sec 6sec 8sec 10sec 20sec 30sec 60sec CONTINUE Tip Factory default value: 10 sec 5 Press for one second or longer The pop-up time will be set and the display will return to the previous screen. 177 Customize Menu Settings and User PreferencesApplication for FCC / IC FCC ID: K6620345X40 / IC: 511B-20345X40 Using the Set-up Menu Setting the display method for my position Refer to the separate Operating Manual GM Edition (download the manual from the YAESU website). Setting the Standby Beep When communicating in a digital mode, a beep is sounded after the end of the other stations transmission. 1 Press 2 Touch [TX/RX]
for one second or longer The set-up menu will be displayed.
3 Touch [DIGITAL]
4 Touch [6 STANDBY BEEP] to select OFF/ON The setting will switch between ON and OFF each time the symbol is touched. OFF: Disable the STANDBY BEEP feature. ON: Enable the STANDBY BEEP feature. Tip Factory default value: ON for one second or longer 5 Press The display will return to the previous screen. Displaying the version of the DSP program for one second or longer The set-up menu will be displayed. The version of the DSP program in the digital unit inside the radio can be checked. 1 Press 2 Touch [TX/RX]
3 Touch [DIGITAL]
4 Touch [7 DSP VERSION]
5 Press The version of the DSP program will be displayed. The display will return to the previous screen. for one second or longer 178 Customize Menu Settings and User PreferencesApplication for FCC / IC FCC ID: K6620345X40 / IC: 511B-20345X40 Setting the sub-band mute Using the Set-up Menu The receive audio of the sub-band can be automatically muted when receiving signals in the main band. 1 Press 2 Touch [TX/RX]
for one second or longer The set-up menu will be displayed.
3 Touch [AUDIO]
4 Touch [1 SUB BAND MUTE] to select OFF/ON The setting will switch between ON and OFF each time the symbol is touched. OFF: The sub-band audio will not be muted when a signal is received on the main band. ON: The sub-band audio will be muted when a signal is received on the main band. Tip Factory default value: OFF for one second or longer 5 Press The sub-band mute will be set and the display will return to the previous screen. Setting the sensitivity of the microphone The sensitivity (gain) of the microphone can be adjusted. Refer to Adjusting the sensitivity of the microphone ( P.50) for details. Memory channel settings Setting the display method for the memory tag The display format for the name and frequency assigned to a memory can be selected for each channel. Refer to Changing the display format of the memory tag ( P.68) for details. Setting the memory scan method The memory scan can be set to scan for all memory channels or only specified memory channels. Refer to Selecting the scanning method ( P.75) for details. 179 Customize Menu Settings and User PreferencesApplication for FCC / IC FCC ID: K6620345X40 / IC: 511B-20345X40
1 2 | User Manual 18 | Users Manual | 3.26 MiB |
Using the Set-up Menu Tone signal settings Setting the squelch tone frequency (CTCSS) The tone frequency can be set. Refer to Setting the tone frequency ( P.102) for details. Setting the DCS code The DCS code can be set. Refer to Setting the DCS code ( P.104) for details. Setting the transmission method of the DTMF code The transmission method of the registered DTMF code can be set. Refer to Transmitting registered DTMF code ( P.113) for details. Registering the DTMF code Telephone numbers used when connecting to a public line from a phone patch can be registered using a DTMF code up to a maximum of 16 digits. Refer to Registering the DTMF code ( P.112) for details. Recalling only specified stations The function for calling only specified stations using the pager code can be set. Refer to Using the pager function ( P.106) for details. Setting the user programmed reverse CTCSS tone The frequency of the user programmed reverse CTCSS tone squelch can be set at100 Hz intervals between 300 Hz and 3000 Hz 1 Press for one second or longer The set-up menu will be displayed. 2 Touch [SIGNALING]
3 Select and touch [6 PRG REV TONE]
The characters of the set value will turn orange in color. 180
Customize Menu Settings and User PreferencesApplication for FCC / IC FCC ID: K6620345X40 / IC: 511B-20345X40 4 Turn to select the frequency Tip Factory default value: 1500 Hz 5 Touch [6 PRG REV TONE]
The characters of the set value will turn green in color. Using the Set-up Menu
6 Press for one second or longer The frequency will be set and the display will return to the previous screen. Using the bell Notification of an incoming call from a partner station using the bell Notification of an incoming call from a partner station can be provided by a bell sound. Refer to Using the bell to notify an incoming call by a partner ( P.110) for details. Setting the squelch type separately for transmit and receive Different squelch types can be used for transmit and receive. 1 Press 2 Touch [SIGNALING]
for one second or longer The set-up menu will be displayed. 3 Touch [8 SQL EXPANSION] to select OFF/ON The setting will switch between OFF and ON each time it is touched. OFF: Use the same squelch for transmit and receive. ON: Use different squelch for transmit and receive. Refer to Other squelch functions( P.110) for details.
Tip Factory default value: OFF for one second or longer 4 Press The squelch type when transmitting and receiving will be set and the display will return to the previous screen. 181 Customize Menu Settings and User PreferencesApplication for FCC / IC FCC ID: K6620345X40 / IC: 511B-20345X40 Using the Set-up Menu Setting the weather alert operation (USA Version Only) The reception of the weather alert can be disabled. 1 Press 2 Touch [SIGNALING]
for one second or longer The set-up menu will be displayed. 3 Touch [9 WX ALERT] to select OFF/ON The setting will switch between OFF and ON each time it is touched. OFF: The weather alert will not be received. ON: The weather alert will be received.
Tip Factory default value: OFF for one second or longer 4 Press The weather alert operation will be set and the display will return to the previous screen. Scan settings Setting the signal reception method The reception method when a signal is picked up in the home channel can be set. Refer to Setting the signal reception method ( P.82) for details. Setting the scanning direction The scanning direction can be set to scan for increasing or decreasing frequencies or memory channel numbers. 1 Press 2 Touch [SCAN]
for one second or longer The set-up menu will be displayed.
182 Customize Menu Settings and User PreferencesApplication for FCC / IC FCC ID: K6620345X40 / IC: 511B-20345X40 3 Touch [2 SCAN DIRECTION] to select the scanning direction The setting will switch between UP and DOWN each time it is touched. Using the Set-up Menu
UP: Scan for increasing frequencies or memory channel numbers. DOWN: Scan for decreasing frequencies or memory
channel numbers. Tip Factory default value: UP for one second or longer 4 Press The scanning direction will be set and the display will return to the previous screen. Setting the receive operation when the scanning stops The reception method when the scanning stops can be set. Refer to Setting the receive operation when the scanning stops ( P.73) for details. Group monitor function settings The GM (group monitor) function automatically checks to find if there are any registered group members within communication range. Refer to the separate Operating Manual GM Edition for further details (download the operating manual from the YAESU website). Settings on the functions and configuration Setting the date and time The date and time of the radio can be set. Refer to Adjusting the data and time ( P.56) for details. 183 Customize Menu Settings and User PreferencesApplication for FCC / IC FCC ID: K6620345X40 / IC: 511B-20345X40 Using the Set-up Menu Setting the display format for the date and time The display format of the clock inside the radio can be changed as follows. Date format: Month/Day/Year format, Year/Month/Day format, Day/Month/Year format, Year/Day/Month format Time format: 24 hours format, 12 hours format 1 Press 2 Touch [CONFIG]
for one second or longer The set-up menu will be displayed. 3 Touch [2 DATE & TIME FORMAT]
The display setting screen for the date and time will be displayed. 4 Touch [DATE]
The display setting screen for the date will be displayed. 5 Touch the format to be displayed Touch and select the date format to be displayed. mmm/dd/yyyy: Display in Month/Day/Year format. yyyy/mmm/dd: Display in Year/Month/Day format. dd/mmm/yyyy: Display in Day/Month/Year format. yyyy/dd/mmm: Display in Year/Day/Month format. Tip Factory default value: mmm/dd/yyyy 6 Touch [BACK]
7 Touch [TIME] to select the display format for the time The setting will switch between 24 hour and 12 hour each time it is touched. Tip Factory default value: 24 hour 184
Customize Menu Settings and User PreferencesApplication for FCC / IC FCC ID: K6620345X40 / IC: 511B-20345X40 for one second or longer Using the Set-up Menu The display format for the date and time will be set and the display will return to the previous screen. 8 Press Setting the time zone The time of the clock inside the radio can be synchronized with the time in the time data
(Coordinated Universal Time) from the GPS. The time zone can be set at 0.5 hour intervals up to 14 hours. 1 Press 2 Touch [CONFIG]
for one second or longer The set-up menu will be displayed.
3 Select and touch [3 TIME ZONE]
The characters of the set value will turn orange in color.
4 Turn to select the time zone The time zone can be set at 0.5 hour intervals up to 14 hours. Tip Factory default value: UTC+0:00 5 Touch [3 TIME ZONE]
The characters of the set value will turn green in color.
6 Press for one second or longer The time zone will be set and the display will return to the previous screen. 185 Customize Menu Settings and User PreferencesApplication for FCC / IC FCC ID: K6620345X40 / IC: 511B-20345X40
1 2 | User Manual 19 | Users Manual | 3.50 MiB |
Using the Set-up Menu Setting the auto repeater shift When communicating using the repeater, the repeater auto shift function automatically shifts the transmit frequency to match the repeater input frequency This allows the repeater to be used by simply tuning the FTM-400XDR/DE to the repeater output frequency This setting may turned ON or OFF. 1 Press 2 Touch [CONFIG]
for one second or longer The set-up menu will be displayed.
3 Touch [4 AUTO RPT SHIFT] to select ON/OFF The setting will switch between ON and OFF each time it is touched. ON: The auto repeater shift function will be switched on. OFF: The auto repeater shift function will be switched off. Tip Factory default value: ON for one second or longer 4 Press The auto repeater shift will be set and the display will return to the previous screen. Setting the direction of the repeater shift The direction of the repeater shift function can be set. 1 Press 2 Touch [CONFIG]
for one second or longer The set-up menu will be displayed.
186 Customize Menu Settings and User PreferencesApplication for FCC / IC FCC ID: K6620345X40 / IC: 511B-20345X40 Using the Set-up Menu
3 Touch [5 RPT SHIFT] to select the shift direction The setting will switch between OFF, - and +
each time it is touched. OFF: The transmit frequency will not shift.
-: The transmit frequency will shift down.
+: The transmit frequency will shift up. Tip Factory default value: Differs depending on frequency for one second or longer 4 Press The direction of the repeater shift will be set and the display will return to the previous screen. Setting the shift width of the repeater The offset frequency of the repeater shift function can be set. 1 Press 2 Touch [CONFIG]
for one second or longer The set-up menu will be displayed. 3 Select and touch [6 RPT SHIFT FREQ]
The characters of the set value will be displayed in orange color.
4 Turn to set the shift offset frequency The shift width can be set at 0.05 MHz intervals between 0.00 MHz and 99.95 MHz. Tip Factory default value: Differs depending on frequency 187 Customize Menu Settings and User PreferencesApplication for FCC / IC FCC ID: K6620345X40 / IC: 511B-20345X40 Using the Set-up Menu 5 Touch [6 RPT SHIFT FREQ]
The characters of the set value will turn green in color.
6 Press for one second or longer The offset of the repeater shift function will be set and the display will return to the previous screen. Setting the frequency step The change in the frequency when the tuning knob is turned, or when the key is pressed can be set. Refer to Changing the frequency step ( P.41) for details. Setting the volume of the beep The confirmation sound (beep) that goes off when a key is pressed can be changed. Refer to Changing the beep volume ( P.54) for details. Setting the clock shift of the CPU The clock signal of the CPU can be changed so that it is not heard as an internal spurious signal by the receiver. Select A during normal operation. 1 Press 2 Touch [CONFIG]
for one second or longer The set-up menu will be displayed.
188 Customize Menu Settings and User PreferencesApplication for FCC / IC FCC ID: K6620345X40 / IC: 511B-20345X40 3 Touch [9 CLOCK TYPE] to set the clock type The setting switches between A and B each time it is touched. A: The clock shift operation will automatically switch on and off. B: The clock shift will be kept in operation at all times. Using the Set-up Menu
Tip Factory default value: A for one second or longer 4 Press The clock shift type will be set and the display will return to the previous screen. Setting the program key of the microphone Functions can be assigned to the program keys (P1 to P4) of the provided microphone
(MH-48). 1 Press 2 Touch [CONFIG]
for one second or longer The set-up menu will be displayed.
3 Touch [10 MIC PROGRAM KEY]
The setting screen for the microphone program key will be displayed. 4 Touch the program key (P1 to P4) where the function is going to be assigned The functions that can be assigned will be displayed. When the function you want to assign is not displayed, turn to scroll the display. 5 Touch and select the function that you want to assign
189 Customize Menu Settings and User PreferencesApplication for FCC / IC FCC ID: K6620345X40 / IC: 511B-20345X40 Using the Set-up Menu 6 Touch [BACK]
The display will return to the selection screen for the program keys (P1 to P4).
7 Set other program keys Repeat Steps 4 to 6 to set the functions to be assigned to other program keys. 8 Press The function will be assigned to the program key and the display will return to the previous screen. Tip Factory default value: P1: SQL OFF (T-CALL: European version) for one second or longer P2: HOME P3: D_X P4: TX POWER Expanding the receive range The frequency can be set to receive frequencies such in the air band (108 to 137 MHz) and the information wireless band (174 to 400 MHz, 480 to 999.99 MHz) as well. 1 Press 2 Touch [CONFIG]
for one second or longer The set-up menu will be displayed.
3 Touch [11 RX COVERAGE] to set the receive range The setting switches between NORMAL and WIDE each time it is touched. NORMAL: Receives only the 144 MHz and the 430 MHz bands. WIDE: Receives the air band and the information wireless band as well. Tip Factory default value: NORMAL for one second or longer 4 Press The receive range will be set and the display will return to the previous screen. 190 Customize Menu Settings and User PreferencesApplication for FCC / IC FCC ID: K6620345X40 / IC: 511B-20345X40 Setting the unit display Using the Set-up Menu The unit to be used when displaying the altitude, distance and speed can be set. 1 Press 2 Touch [CONFIG]
for one second or longer The set-up menu will be displayed.
3 Touch [12 UNIT] to set the unit The setting switches between METRIC and INCH each time it is touched. METRIC: Displays the unit using the metric system. INCH: Displays the unit using the inch system. Tip Factory default value: Depends on the transceiver version 4 Press for one second or longer The display unit will be set and the display will return to the previous screen. Switching the power off automatically The radio can be set to switch the power off automatically when there is no operation for a period of time. Refer to Using the APO function ( P.119) for details. Limiting the continuous transmission time The radio can be set to return to the reception mode automatically after a time specified in advance has passed in the transmit mode. Refer to Using the TOT function ( P.120) for details. Setting the PIN code of the optional Bluetooth headset The headset that you are using can be paired with the optional Bluetooth unit mounted in the radio. Refer to Setting the PIN code of the Bluetooth headset ( P.137) for details. 191 Customize Menu Settings and User PreferencesApplication for FCC / IC FCC ID: K6620345X40 / IC: 511B-20345X40 Using the Set-up Menu Setting the geodetic reference system of the GPS function The geodetic reference system which serves as the positioning standard of the GPS function can be set. 1 Press 2 Touch [CONFIG]
for one second or longer The set-up menu will be displayed.
3 Touch [16 GPS DATUM] to set the geodetic reference system The setting switches between WGS-84 and TOKYO MEAN each time it is touched. WGS-84: Positions using the global geodetic reference system. This is being used as a standard all around the world. TOKYO MEAN: Positions using the Japanese geodetic reference system. When positioning in Japan (Tokyo), the error can be made smaller. Tip Factory default value: WGS-84 for one second or longer 4 Press The geodetic reference system of the GPS function will be set and the display will return to the previous screen. Positioning using the external GPS device This is set when connecting an external GPS reception device. Refer to Positioning using an external GPS device ( P.84) for details. Setting the interval for recording the GPS position information The time interval for recording your own position information in the micro-SD card can be set. Refer to Recording the position information (GPS log function) ( P.89) for details. 192 Customize Menu Settings and User PreferencesApplication for FCC / IC FCC ID: K6620345X40 / IC: 511B-20345X40 Using the Set-up Menu Data communication settings Setting the COM port The communication speed and function when using the [DATA] jack at the back of the main body as a COM port can be set. 1 Press for one second or longer The set-up menu will be displayed. 2 Touch [DATA]
3 Touch [1 COM PORT SETTING]
The screen for the detailed settings will be displayed. 4 Touch [SPEED] to select the communication speed of the COM port The setting changes as follows each time it is touched. 4800 bps 9600 bps 19200 bps 38400 bps 57600 bps Tip Factory default value: 9600 bps
193 Customize Menu Settings and User PreferencesApplication for FCC / IC FCC ID: K6620345X40 / IC: 511B-20345X40
1 2 | User Manual 2 | Users Manual | 2.39 MiB |
Name and Function of Each Component Explanation of the screen
A B A Band A display area B Band B display area The characters of the name tag and frequency are displayed in white for the operating band, and gray for the sub-band. Touch key display area Functions to be displayed in the function menu screen can be assigned to the touch keys. Refer to Changing the touch key functions ( P.121) for details. Status display area A green bar is displayed during receive and when signals are detected. The bar will not be displayed when the squelch is turned on. A red bar is displayed when transmitting. Tag display area VFO is displayed in the VFO mode. The memory channel number and the tag are displayed in the memory mode. Frequency display area In the memory mode, pressing channel tag. for one second or longer will display the memory VOL/SQL level display area S-meter/transmit power level display, and also partner station information display Clock/Voltage display area Icon display area Bluetooth, APRS, micro-SD card and GPS icons are displayed when each function is in use. Communication mode display area The analog and digital modes are indicated using symbols. A red bar will be displayed above the symbol in the AMS (auto mode). The AMS automatically matches the communication mode of the received signal.
* Digital communications can operate in Band A only. 18 Before UsingApplication for FCC / IC FCC ID: K6620345X40 / IC: 511B-20345X40 Dual band screen Band A and Band B will be displayed at the top and bottom. Name and Function of Each Component
[V/M]
[SQL]
[MUTE]
The VFO channel and memory channel will be switched by touching this symbol. The V is displayed in orange in the VFO mode while the M is displayed in orange in the memory mode. The squelch level can be set after touching this symbol. The characters are displayed in orange for 5 seconds during the time that the squelch level can be set. The receive audio can be muted by touching this. The characters are displayed in orange when the sound has been muted.
[SCOPE] The band scope operation toggles on or off each time this symbol is touched. The characters are displayed in orange during the band scope operation. Band scope screen The screen appears as shown, when the band scope is turned on.
Tip The width of the band scope can be set to either WIDE or NARROW under [DISPLAY][4 BAND SCOPE] in the set-up menu.
Function menu screen When band. is pressed, the function menu is displayed on the screen under the operating
[BACK][FWD]
The menu changes each time these symbols are touched.
Tip The functions displayed in the menu can be assigned to the touch keys at the bottom of the display. Refer to Page 121 for details.
19 Before UsingApplication for FCC / IC FCC ID: K6620345X40 / IC: 511B-20345X40 Name and Function of Each Component Change the display mode The display mode will switch in the sequence each time is pressed. Frequency display screenCompass/Lat&Lon display screenAltitude display screen*Timer/Clock screen*GPS screen*
* This screen will be displayed when [DISPLAY][1 DISPLAY SELECT] is set to ON in the set-up menu. Compass screen The direction of travel of your own station and direction coordinate of the received station are displayed in the compass screen.
COMPASS Displays the compass settings. There are two settings, Heading Up where the direction of travel is on top, and North Up where North is always on top. Refer to Change the Compass Settings (
P.94) for details.
[YR]
DISTANCE When a saved position information is recalled, the distance from the current position is displayed. When this symbol is touched, the position of the partner station that is received is displayed in the compass (when the position information is included in the signal), and the symbol is shown in orange.
[MY]
When this symbol is touched, the direction of travel of your own station is displayed in the compass, and this symbol is displayed in orange.
[MEMORY] When this symbol is touched, the position information being displayed is
[]
[L1]
[L2]
20 saved in the memory. When this symbol is touched while the display is green, the position information saved in the memory under the tag is displayed. When this symbol is touched while the display is blinking, the position information displayed in the compass will be saved in the memory under the tag . When this symbol is touched while the display is green, the position information saved in the memory under the tag L1 is displayed. When this symbol is touched while the display is blinking, the position information displayed in the compass will be saved in the memory under the tag L1. When this symbol is touched while the display is green, the position information saved in the memory under the tag L2 is displayed. When this symbol is touched while the display is blinking, the position information displayed in the compass will be saved in the memory under the tag L2. Before UsingApplication for FCC / IC FCC ID: K6620345X40 / IC: 511B-20345X40 Altitude display screen The altitude of the current location is shown in the bar graph display. Name and Function of Each Component
ALTITUDE Displays the current altitude. Vertical axis Represents the altitude. Horizontal axis
[SCALE]
[CLEAR]
Represents the distance. When this symbol is touched, the scale of the distance changes. When this symbol is touched, the graph display will be cleared (erased). Timer/Clock screen The current time is shown in analog and digital formats. The date is also shown.
[MODE]
The mode switches between the lap timer mode and the countdown timer mode each time this symbol is touched. 21 Before UsingApplication for FCC / IC FCC ID: K6620345X40 / IC: 511B-20345X40 Name and Function of Each Component
Lap timer screen
[START]
[LAP]
[STOP]
The count starts when this symbol is touched. The lap time is then saved in the memory (a maximum of 99 lap times can be saved) and displayed in the upper lap display window when this symbol is touched. The lap time (of the new interval) being measured will be displayed in the lower lap display window. The count stops when this symbol is touched.
[RECALL] When this symbol is touched, the lap time saved in the memory is shown in the upper lap display window while the split time is shown below. When there are multiple lap times, touch [][] to move between the lap times. Touch [RECALL] again to return to the measurement screen. The counter is reset when this symbol is touched.
[RESET]
Count down timer screen
[START]
The count starts when this symbol is touched. The count stops when this symbol is touched. The counter is reset when this symbol is touched. The count time can be changed (from 1 minute to 99 hours and 59 minutes) when this symbol is touched. Each time this symbol is touched, the setting will switch from Hours to Minutes to Confirm. The time can be changed by touching [-] and [+]
or turning
.
[STOP]
[RESET]
[SETUP]
22 Before UsingApplication for FCC / IC FCC ID: K6620345X40 / IC: 511B-20345X40 Name and Function of Each Component GPS screen The GPS satellite statuses are shown with numbered icons.
1, 2, etc. Received satellite number Signal strength High Signal strength Medium Signal strength Low Input the character The keyboard screen is displayed when entering a memory channel tag or the call sign of your own station. Numbers and symbols input screen
[ABC]
[123#%^]
[][]
[ENT]
[BACK]
[
]
[Caps]
The screen changes to the alphabet input screen when this symbol is touched. The screen changes to the input screen for numbers and symbols each time this symbol is touched. The cursor in the input field moves left and right when these symbols are touched. The entered characters are confirmed and the display returns to the previous screen when this symbol is touched. The display returns to the previous screen when this symbol is touched. One character to the left of the cursor is erased when this symbol is touched. The input switches between small and capital letters input each time this symbol is touched.
Alphabet input screen
23 Before UsingApplication for FCC / IC FCC ID: K6620345X40 / IC: 511B-20345X40 Installation and Connection Installing the Radio Precautions during installation Note the following when installing this radio. Do not install the radio in a place where there is extreme vibration, where there is a lot of dust, excessive humidity or high temperature, or where it is exposed to direct sunlight. Install the radio in a well ventilated position, so heat release is not obstructed because the heat sink gets hot when transmitting for a long periods of time. Do not place any objects on top of the main body. Do not lift up or hold the controller by holding the knob or control cable. A regulated, negative ground 13.8 V DC power supply is required for this radio. Check that the car battery is a negative ground 12 V system when using this radio in a mobile unit. Never connect this radio to the 24 V battery of a large vehicle. Never connect this radio to a 120 V AC power source. Note that there is a risk that hum and noise may be introduced, depending on the installation condition and the external power source used. Install the device as far away as possible from the TV and radio to avoid TV and radio interference (TVI, BCI). In particular, do not install this radio near indoor antenna elements. Installation location when used in a mobile unit Controller It is recommended that the controller be installed on top of the car dash board or in front of the center console. Refer to Page 28 on how to install the controller. Main body It is recommended that the main body be installed below the car dash board or to the side of the center console. Refer to Page 27 on how to install the main body. Controller 24 Radio main body Installation and ConnectionApplication for FCC / IC FCC ID: K6620345X40 / IC: 511B-20345X40 Installing the Radio About the antenna A good antenna installation is extremely important for transmission and reception purposes. Note the following, as the type and characteristics of the antenna largely determines whether the performance of the radio can be fully realized. Use an antenna that suits the installation conditions and application objective. Use an antenna that suits the operating frequency band. Use an antenna and a co-axial cable with a characteristic impedance of 50. Adjust the VSWR (standing wave ratio) until it is 1.5 or less for an antenna with an adjusted impedance of 50. Keep the co-axial cable routing length as short as possible. Install the antenna Antenna installation in a mobile unit Mount the antenna base at the rear of the car (rear bumper, trunk, rear gate, etc.) and then attach the antenna to the base. Cautions z Ensure that the antenna base is securely grounded to the car body. z Avoid routing the co-axial cable enclosed with a commercial car antenna cable. z Do not allow rain water or moisture to penetrate the cable or connectors when laying the co-axial cable inside the car. Bumper type Trunk type Antenna installation in a fixed station There are omni-directional, and directed array antennas for use in an outdoor setting. Omni-directional antennas such as the GP (Ground Plane) antenna are suitable for communications between a local station and mobile stations in all direction. Directional antennas such as the Yagi antenna are suitable for communications between a base station and a remote station in a specific direction. 25 Installation and ConnectionApplication for FCC / IC FCC ID: K6620345X40 / IC: 511B-20345X40 Installing the Radio Cautions z Create a loop (slack) in the co-axial cable directly underneath the antenna and fasten it so that the weight of the cable does not pull on the antenna or connector itself. z Install the antenna taking into consideration the securing supports and how the guying wires are positioned, so that the antenna does not fall over or get blown away in strong winds. GP antenna
<Veranda Mounted Example>
Yagi antenna
<Roof Mounted Example>
26 Installation and ConnectionApplication for FCC / IC FCC ID: K6620345X40 / IC: 511B-20345X40 Installing the main body Install the main body using the provided MMB-36 bracket. Installing the Radio 1 Select the installation location Caution Select a location where the antenna coax and power cable can be securely attached. Tip Also refer to Installation location when used in a mobile unit ( P.24). 2 Drill four 6 mm diameter holes in the location where the bracket is to be mounted, matching the positions of the bolting holes of the bracket 3 Attach the bracket using the provided bolts, nuts and washers 4 Fasten the main body to the bracket, using the provided flange bolts, as shown in the drawing Tip The mounting angle can be changed depending on the securing position of the flange bolts. Nut Washer Washer Bolt Bracket Main body Flange bolt 27 Installation and ConnectionApplication for FCC / IC FCC ID: K6620345X40 / IC: 511B-20345X40 Installing the Radio Installing the controller Install the controller using the provided bracket. Caution The bracket can be bent by hand to match the location where the controller is going to be installed. Take due care not to injure yourself when bending the bracket. 1 Select the installation location Caution Select a stable, flat location with as few dents and protrusions as possible. Tip Also refer to Installation location when used in a mobile unit ( P.24). 2 Fix the bracket to the controller using the provided screws and washers, as shown in the drawing Controller Bracket Washer Screw 3 Peel off the protective seal from one side of the provided two-sided adhesive sheet, and paste it onto the bottom of the bracket Two-sided adhesive sheet Protection seal 4 Peel off the other protection seal from the underside of the two-sided adhesive sheet pasted onto the bracket, and then stick the bracket to the installation location Caution Remove all dirt and dust from the installation location before affixing the bracket. Protection seal 28 Installation and ConnectionApplication for FCC / IC FCC ID: K6620345X40 / IC: 511B-20345X40
1 2 | User Manual | Users Manual | 2.49 MiB |
Using the Set-up Menu 5 Touch [OUTPUT] to select the output function of the COM port The setting changes as follows each time it is touched. OFF(camera) GPS OUT PACKET WAYPOINT OFF (camera): The output function of the COM port is not used (invalid operation). GPS OUT: Outputs the GPS data obtained by the radio. PACKET: Outputs the AX.25 packet communication data received using the in-built modem function. WAYPOINT: Outputs the position information of other station beacons obtained from the APRS packets received as WAYPOINT data. Tip Factory default value: OFF (camera) 6 Touch [WP FORMAT] to select the data format This sets the number of digits in the call sign information of the APRS beacon station appended to each data when WAYPOINT is selected in Step 5 (the data will be output using the NMEA-0183
$GPWPL format). The setting changes as follows each time it is touched. NMEA 9 NMEA 8 NMEA 7 NMEA 6 NMEA 9: The call sign will be limited to 9 digits on the right (Example: The call sign information for JQ1YBG-14 is JQ1YBG-14). NMEA 8: The call sign will be limited to 8 digits on the right (Example: The call sign information for JQ1YBG-14 is Q1YBG-14). NMEA 7: The call sign will be limited to 7 digits on the right (Example: The call sign information for JQ1YBG-14 is 1YBG-14). NMEA 6: The call sign will be limited to 6 digits on the right (Example: The call sign information for JQ1YBG-14 is YBG-14). Tip Factory default value: NMEA 9 194 Customize Menu Settings and User PreferencesApplication for FCC / IC FCC ID: K6620345X40 / IC: 511B-20345X40 Using the Set-up Menu
7 Touch [WP FILTER] to select the forwarding content This sets the type of beacon that you would like to output when WAYPOINT is selected in Step 5. The setting changes as follows each time it is touched. ALL MOBILE FREQUENCY OBJECT/
ITEM DIGIPEATER VoIP WEATHER YAESU CALL RINGER RNG RINGER ALL: Outputs all beacons received. MOBILE: Outputs only mobile stations. FREQUENCY: Outputs only the stations with frequency information. OBJECT/ITEM: Outputs only the object station or item station. DIGIPEATER: Outputs only the digital repeater station. VoIP: Outputs only VoIP stations such as WIRES. WEATHER: Outputs only the weather station. YAESU: Outputs only stations which are using Yaesu transceivers. CALL RINGER: Outputs only the information of the call sign ringer station set using
[10 APRS RINGER (CALL)] in the APRS set-up menu. RNG RINGER: Outputs only the information of the station deemed to be the approaching station using the
[9 APRS RINGER] range ringer function in the APRS set-up menu. Tip Factory default value: ALL for one second or longer 8 Press The COM port will be set and the display will return to the previous screen. 195 Customize Menu Settings and User PreferencesApplication for FCC / IC FCC ID: K6620345X40 / IC: 511B-20345X40 Using the Set-up Menu Setting the operating band of the APRS and data communication The operating band of the APRS (internal modem) and data communication (when using the [DATA] jack at the back of the main body) can be set. 1 Press 2 Touch [DATA]
for one second or longer The set-up menu will be displayed.
3 Touch [2 DATA BAND SELECT]
The screen for the detailed settings will be displayed. 4 Touch [APRS] to select the APRS operating band The setting changes as follows each time it is touched. A-BAND FIX B-BAND FIX A=TX/B=RX A=RX/B=TX MAIN BAND SUB BAND A-BAND FIX: The upper band will be selected. B-BAND FIX: The lower band will be selected. A=TX/B=RX: Transmits using the upper band and receives using the lower band. A=RX/B=TX: Receives using the upper band and transmits using the lower band. MAIN BAND: The main band will be selected. SUB BAND: The sub-band will be selected. Tip Factory default value: B-BAND FIX 5 Touch [DATA] to select the data transmission operating band Repeat Step 4 to set the data communication operating band. Tip Factory default value: B-BAND FIX
6 Press 196 for one second or longer The operating band of the APRS and data communication will be set and the display will return to the previous screen. Customize Menu Settings and User PreferencesApplication for FCC / IC FCC ID: K6620345X40 / IC: 511B-20345X40 Setting the baud rate of the APRS and data communication Using the Set-up Menu The baud rate of the APRS (internal modem) and data communication (when using the
[DATA] jack at the back of the main body) can be set. 1 Press 2 Touch [DATA]
for one second or longer The set-up menu will be displayed.
3 Touch [3 DATA SPEED]
The screen for the detailed settings will be displayed. 4 Touch [APRS] to select the packet communication speed The setting will switch between 1200 bps and 9600 bps each time it is touched. 1200 bps: Sets the speed as AFSK 1200 bps packet. 9600 bps: Sets the speed as GMSK 9600 bps packet. Tip Factory default value: 1200 bps 5 Touch [DATA] to select the data communication speed Repeat Step 4 to set the data communication speed. Tip Factory default value: 1200 bps
6 Press for one second or longer The baud rate of the APRS and data communication will be set and the display will return to the previous screen. 197 Customize Menu Settings and User PreferencesApplication for FCC / IC FCC ID: K6620345X40 / IC: 511B-20345X40 Using the Set-up Menu Setting the output condition of the squelch detection and squelch terminal The squelch detection condition during APRS (internal modem) operation and squelch terminal output condition of the data communication (when using the [DATA] jack at the back of the main body) can be set. 1 Press 2 Touch [DATA]
for one second or longer The set-up menu will be displayed.
3 Touch [4 DATA SQUELCH]
The screen for the detailed settings will be displayed. 4 Touch [APRS] to select the squelch detection condition during APRS operation using the internal modem The setting switches between RX BAND and TX/
RX BAND each time it is touched. RX BAND: Transmission is not possible when the receive band squelch is open. TX/RX BAND: Transmission is not possible when either the receive band or transmit band squelch is open. Tip Factory default value: RX BAND 5 Touch [DATA] to select the output condition (during reception) related to the squelch terminal inside the
[DATA] jack The setting switches between RX BAND and TX/
RX BAND each time it is touched. RX BAND: The SQL terminal becomes active when the receive band squelch is open. TX/RX BAND: The SQL terminal becomes active when either the receive band or transmit band squelch is open. Tip Factory default value: RX BAND 198 Customize Menu Settings and User PreferencesApplication for FCC / IC FCC ID: K6620345X40 / IC: 511B-20345X40 6 Touch [TX] to select the output condition (during transmission) related to the squelch terminal inside the [DATA] jack Each time this is touched, the setting will switch between ON and OFF. ON: The SQL terminal becomes active during transmission. OFF: The SQL terminal does not become active during transmission. Using the Set-up Menu
The action to be taken when the reception band specified using [DATA] under [2 DATA BAND SELECT] in the DATA set-up menu is ready to transmit is set here. When this is set to ON, transmission of external devices such as TNC can be suppressed during transmission. Tip Factory default value: ON for one second or longer 7 Press The APRS and data communication squelch will be set and the display will return to the previous screen. APRS function settings The APRS function of the radio is a data communication system for data such as messages and station position using the APRS format. Refer to the separate Operating Manual APRS Edition for details (download the manual from the YAESU website). Micro-SD card settings Writing settings to the micro-SD card Using a micro-SD card, the memory channels registered in the radio and the settings in the set-up menu can be copied to another FTM-400XDR/DE. The settings saved in the micro-SD card can also be downloaded into the radio. Refer to Copying the Radio Data to another transceiver ( P.151) for details. 199 Customize Menu Settings and User PreferencesApplication for FCC / IC FCC ID: K6620345X40 / IC: 511B-20345X40 Using the Set-up Menu Writing group IDs to the micro-SD card The group ID information registered in the radio can be written to a micro-SD card. The group ID information saved in the micro-SD card can also be downloaded into the radio. Refer to the separate Operating Manual GM Edition for further details (download the operating manual from the YAESU website). Initializing the micro-SD card Initialize the memory card when using a new micro-SD card. Refer to Initializing the micro-SD card ( P.35) for details. Optional device settings Setting the image of the connected speaker microphone with camera The image size and quality when taking pictures with the connected speaker microphone with a camera (MH-85A11U) can be set. 1 Press 2 Touch [OPTION]
for one second or longer The set-up menu will be displayed.
3 Touch [1 USB CAMERA]
The screen for setting the image will be displayed. PICTURE SIZE: Sets the size of the picture to be taken. PICTURE QUALITY: Sets the quality of the picture to be taken. 4 Touch [PICTURE SIZE] to set the picture size The setting changes between 160120 and 320240 each time it is touched. Tip Factory default value: 320240 (unit: pixel) It takes about 30 seconds to sending a picture in the size of 320240 to other transceivers. 200 Customize Menu Settings and User PreferencesApplication for FCC / IC FCC ID: K6620345X40 / IC: 511B-20345X40
1 2 | User Manual 21 | Users Manual | 2.56 MiB |
5 Touch [PICTURE QUALITY] to set the picture quality The setting will change in the following order each time it is touched. LOW (low resolution) NORMAL HIGH (high resolution) Tip Factory default value: NORMAL Using the Set-up Menu
6 Press for one second or longer The camera image will be set and the display will return to the previous screen. Setting the operation of the Bluetooth headset By mounting the Bluetooth unit to the radio and using a Bluetooth headset, audio can be received and sent wirelessly. Refer to Using the Bluetooth headset ( P.134) for details. Setting the voice memory operation By mounting the voice guide unit to the radio, audio that is received or picked up by the microphone can be recorded and then played back or erased later. Refer to Using the voice memory ( P.146) for details. Initialization and saving settings Reconfiguring the settings The settings and memory of the radio can be returned to the default factory settings. Refer to Reconfiguring the Settings ( P.61) for details. Registering the preset Current settings such as the frequency and memory channels can be registered in a single preset. 1 Press 2 Touch [RESET/CLONE]
for one second or longer The set-up menu will be displayed.
201 Customize Menu Settings and User PreferencesApplication for FCC / IC FCC ID: K6620345X40 / IC: 511B-20345X40 Using the Set-up Menu 3 Touch [2 PRESET]
The screen for confirming the preset registration will be displayed. 4 Touch [OK?]
When canceling the registration, touch [Cancel]. The preset will be registered. 5 Press for one second or longer The display will return to the previous screen. Recalling the registered preset The registered preset can be recalled from the set-up menu. 1 Press 2 Touch [RESET/CLONE]
for one second or longer The set-up menu will be displayed. 3 Touch [3 RECALL PRESET]
The screen for confirming the recall of the registered preset will be displayed. 4 Touch [OK?]
The registered preset will be recalled and the display will return to the previous screen. When canceling the recall, touch [Cancel]. 202
Customize Menu Settings and User PreferencesApplication for FCC / IC FCC ID: K6620345X40 / IC: 511B-20345X40 Sorting the registered memory channels Using the Set-up Menu The memory channels registered in the radio can be sorted in the ascending order. 1 Press 2 Touch [RESET/CLONE]
for one second or longer The set-up menu will be displayed.
3 Touch [5 MEM CH SORT]
The screen for confirming the sorting of the memory channels will be displayed. 4 Touch [OK?]
The memory channels will be sorted starting from the lowest frequencies. When canceling the sorting, touch [Cancel].
5 The radio will start up again The power will be switched off once and then it will be switched on automatically. Copying saved data All the data saved in the radio can be copied directly to another FTM-400XDR/DE. Refer to Using the clone function ( P.153) for details. 203 Customize Menu Settings and User PreferencesApplication for FCC / IC FCC ID: K6620345X40 / IC: 511B-20345X40 Using the Set-up Menu Call sign settings Changing the call sign for one second or longer The set-up menu will be displayed. You can change your own call sign set in the radio. 1 Press 2 Touch [CALLSIGN]
The current call sign will be displayed. 3 Touch [CHANGE]
The character input screen will be displayed. 4 Touch a character key The touched character will be displayed at the top of the screen. Tips Up to 10 characters of alphabets, numerics, and a hyphen can be entered. Refer to Page 23 on how to operate the character input screen. 5 Touch [ENT]
The new call sign will be displayed. 6 Touch [BACK]
204
Customize Menu Settings and User PreferencesApplication for FCC / IC FCC ID: K6620345X40 / IC: 511B-20345X40 for one second or longer Using the Set-up Menu The call sign will be set and the display will return to the previous screen. 7 Press 205 Customize Menu Settings and User PreferencesApplication for FCC / IC FCC ID: K6620345X40 / IC: 511B-20345X40 Appendix Options List PC connection cable (SCU-20)
*Same as the one provided Cloning cable (CT-166) Voice guide unit (FVS-2) Bluetooth unit (BU-2) Control cable (CT-162) Controller bracket (MMB-98) Water proof (equivalent to IP55) high power external speaker (MLS-200-M10) Speaker microphone with camera
(MH-85A11U) Microphone extension kit (MEK-2) Hand Microphone (MH-42C6J) DTMF Microphone (MH-48A6JA)
*Same as the one provided Water proof Bluetooth headset (monaural)
(BH-2A) Charging cradle for BH-2A (CD-40) Battery charger for CD-40 (PA-46) z Data cable (CT-163): DIN 10 pin DIN 6 pin + Dsub 9 pin z Data cable (CT-164): DIN 10 pin DIN 6 pin z Data cable (CT-165): DIN 10 pin Dsub 9 pin z Data cable (CT-167): DIN 10 pin Split end (10 pin) 206 AppendixApplication for FCC / IC FCC ID: K6620345X40 / IC: 511B-20345X40 Maintenance Care and maintenance Turn the transceiver OFF before wiping away any dust and stains on the radio using a dry and soft cloth. For stubborn stains, slightly moisten a soft cloth and wring it hard before using it to wipe away the stains. Caution Never use washing detergents and organic solvents (thinner, benzene etc.). This may result in the paint peeling off or the cover being damaged. Replacing the fuse Use ONLY the correct rating (15 A) replacement fuse in the DC cable fuse holder. Caution When replacing the fuse, disconnect the power supply cable from the radio and from the external DC power supply. Replacing the fuse of the DC power supply cable 1 Prepare a new fuse Use a fuse with a rating of 15 A. Caution Never use a fuse that is not of the specified rating. 2 Open the fuse holder as shown in the diagram on the right 3 Remove the broken fuse 4 Attach the new fuse 5 Close the fuse holder European version 207 AppendixApplication for FCC / IC FCC ID: K6620345X40 / IC: 511B-20345X40 When you have difficulties ... Caution Check the following before requesting for repair services. There is no power z Is the external power supply connected correctly?
Connect the black wire to the negative (-) terminal and the red wire to the positive (+) terminal. z Is the voltage and current capacity of the external power supply sufficient?
Check the voltage (13.8 V) and current capacity (20 A or above) of the external power supply. z Is the fuse broken?
Replace the fuse. There is no sound z Is the squelch level or setting too high?
Adjust the squelch level when receiving weak signals. z Is the volume low?
Increase the volume by turning the VOL knob in a clockwise direction. z Is the tone squelch or DCS turned on?
When the tone squelch or DCS is turned on, no sound will be heard until signals containing the same tone frequency, or DCS code that have been set are received. z Is the external speaker connected?
Connect a speaker with an impedance of 4 to 16 correctly. z Is the Bluetooth headset in use?
Disable the use of the headset or use the set-up menu to allow sound to come from both the headset and the main body speaker. There is no transmission z Is the PTT switch pressed properly?
z Is the microphone connected correctly?
Plug the connector all the way into the MIC jack. z Is the transmission frequency set to the amateur band?
Transmission outside the amateur band is not possible. z Is the antenna or co-axial cable broken?
Replace the antenna or co-axial cable. z Is the voltage of the external power supply normal?
When the voltage of the power supply drops during transmit, the transceiver may not work properly. Use a stable DC power supply with a voltage of 13.8 V and a current capacity of 20 A. The keys or knobs will not operate z Is the lock function activated?
Cancel the lock by pressing the POWER / LOCK key. 208 AppendixApplication for FCC / IC FCC ID: K6620345X40 / IC: 511B-20345X40 When you have difficulties ... About internal spurious signals Certain frequency combinations of signals received simultaneously, may cause some effect on the receiver mixer and IF circuits due to the high frequency of the internal oscillator. However, this is not a malfunction (refer to the calculation formulas below: n is any integer). Depending on the combination of the frequencies received at the same time, there may also be fluctuations in the receiver sensitivity z Reception frequency = 12.288 MHz x n times z Reception frequency = 2.4576 MHz x n times z Reception frequency = 11.1 MHz x n times z Upper (Band A) frequency = (Lower (Band B) frequency 44.85 MHz) n times z Lower (Band B) frequency = (Upper (Band A) frequency 47.25 MHz) n times @ Upper band z Reception frequency = 15.6 MHz x n times z Reception frequency = 6.1444 MHz x n times z Reception frequency = 18.432 MHz x n times
(Band A) MODE = NFM After-market Services The warranty period is 1 year or 2 years from the date of purchase The warranty certification is enclosed with the product. Breakdowns arising from normal use of the product in accordance with the instructions in the operating manual shall be repaired free-of-charge within a period of 1 year (USA, EXP version) or 2 years (European Version) from the date of purchase. Keep the warranty certificate in a safe location When the warranty certificate is lost, failures which occur during the warranty period will be treated as chargeable non-warranty claims. A warranty certificate where necessary information such as the purchase date and the name of the retail store have not been filled in will also be treated as void. Please ensure that the date of purchase and the name of the retail store are filled in correctly in the warranty certificate. You may also check with us for any non-warranty repairs We will repair at your expense if the functions can be maintained after the repair. Please check with the retail store or Yaesu customer support for more information. Keep the packaging box When transporting this product for inspection and repair, use the original product packaging box to prevent accidents and damages during the transport. 209 AppendixApplication for FCC / IC FCC ID: K6620345X40 / IC: 511B-20345X40 Specification General Frequency range Channel steps Emission Type Frequency stability Antenna impedance Supply Voltage Current consumption
: TX 144 - 146 MHz or 144 - 148 MHz 430 - 440 MHz or 430 - 450 MHz
: RX 108 - 137 MHz (Air Band) 137 - 174 MHz (144 MHz HAM) 174 - 400 MHz (GEN1) 400 - 480 MHz (430 MHz HAM) 480 - 999.99 MHz (GEN2)
: 5/6.25/8.33/10/12.5/15/20/25/50/100 kHz
(8.33 kHz : only for Air band)
: F1D, F2D, F3E, F7W
: 2.5 ppm 4F to +140F (20C to +60C)
: 50
: Norminal 13.8 V DC, negative ground
: 0.5 A (receive) 11 A (50 W TX, 144 MHz) 12 A (50 W TX, 430 MHz) Operating temperature Case size
: 4F to +140F (20C to +60C)
: Radio unit: 5.5" (W) 1.6" (H) 4.9" (D) (140 40 125 mm) w/o fan Controller: 5.5" (W) 2.8" (H) 0.8" (D) (140 72 20 mm) Weight (approx.)
: 2.64 lbs (1.2 kg) with radio unit, controller, control cable Transmitter RF power output Modulation type
: 50/20/5 W
: F1D, F2D, F3E : Variable Reactance Modulation F7W : 4FSK (C4FM)
: At least 60 dB below Spurious emission Microphone impedance
: About 2 k DATA terminal input impedance : About 10 k 210 AppendixApplication for FCC / IC FCC ID: K6620345X40 / IC: 511B-20345X40 Receiver Circuit type Intermediate frequencies
: Double conversion super-heterodyne
: A band:
Receiver Sensitivity
:
Ratings 0.8V typ for 10 dB SN 0.2V for 12 dB SINAD 0.2V for 12 dB SINAD 0.25V for 12 dB SINAD 0.3V typ for 12 dB SINAD 0.25V typ for 12 dB SINAD 0.8V typ for 10 dB SINAD 0.25V for 12 dB SINAD 0.2V typ for 12 dB SINAD 0.2V for 12 dB SINAD 0.4V typ for 12 dB SINAD 0.8V typ for 12 dB SINAD Cellular blocked (USA only) 0.19V typ for BER 1%
0.19V typ for BER 1%
1st : 47.25 MHz, 2nd :450 kHz B band:
1st : 44.85 MHz, 2nd : 450 kHz 108 - 137 MHz (AM) 137 - 140 MHz (FM) 140 - 150MHz (FM) 150 - 174 MHz (FM) 174 - 222 MHz (FM) 222 - 300 MHz (FM) 300 - 336 MHz (AM) 336 - 420 MHz (FM) 420 - 470 MHz (FM) 470 - 520 MHz (FM) 800 - 900 MHz (FM) 900 - 999.99 MHz (FM) Digital mode 140 - 150 MHz (Digital) 420 - 470 MHz (Digital) Squelch sensitivity Selectivity AF output
: 0.16V (144/430 MHz)
: AM, FM 12 kHz/35 kHz (6 dB/60 dB)
: 3 W (8 , THD10%, 13.8 V) internal speaker 8 W (4 , THD10%, 13.8 V) Optional MLS-200-M10 AF output impedance Strength of secondary radio waves: 4 nW and below
: 4 - 16 Cautions z Rated values are at normal temperature and pressure. z Ratings and specifications are subject to change without notice. Symbols placed on the equipment Direct current 211 AppendixApplication for FCC / IC FCC ID: K6620345X40 / IC: 511B-20345X40 Index About internal spurious signals .............. 209 accessories .............................................. 13 after-market services .............................. 209 alphabet input screen ............................... 23 altitude measuring ............................................ 90 altitude changes erasing ................................................. 91 altitude display screen .............................. 21 AMS.................................................... 45, 46 AMS transmission mode ........................ 174 analog FM mode ...................................... 46 announce function setting operation ................................. 149 antenna .................................................... 25 connecting ............................................ 29 install .................................................... 25 ANT terminal ............................................ 16 APO function ...........................................119 APRS baud rate ............................................ 197 operating band ................................... 196 APRS function .......................................... 98 APRS function settings........................... 199 ARS .......................................................... 52 audio erasing the recorded one ................... 148 muting .................................................. 48 recording and listening to ................... 144 recording the received one ................. 147 replaying the recorded one ................ 147 auto repeater shift .................................. 186 background color of the frequency display area .......................................................... 60 backtrack function .............................. 93, 95 band scope ............................................... 47 band scope display width ....................... 172 band scope screen ................................... 19 beep volume ..................................... 54, 188 Bluetooth headset .................................. 134 identifying ........................................... 137 operation ............................................ 201 setting the operation ........................... 136 using ................................................... 139 Bluetooth unit mounting ............................................ 134 call sign .................................................... 37 changing ............................................. 204 call sign settings ..................................... 204 car battery ................................................ 30 A B C 212 checking the route using a personal computer .................................................. 90 clock shift of the CPU ............................. 188 clone function ......................................... 153 communicating ......................................... 49 communicating with specified partner stations ................................................... 102 communication mode ............................... 45 compass panel changing the direction .......................... 94 compass screen .........................20, 93, 172 COM port ................................................ 193 connecting the power supply .................... 30 connecting the radio ................................. 29 connecting to a personal computer ........ 155 CONTROL jack .................................. 15, 16 controller................................................... 14 connecting to the main body ................ 29 installing ............................................... 28 copying saved data ................................ 203 Copying the Radio Data to another Transceiver ............................................. 151 copyrights ................................................... 4 countdown timer ......................................117 count down timer screen .......................... 22 CTCSS ................................................... 102 current location registering ............................................ 95 Customize Menu Settings and User Preferences ............................................ 163 D data communication baud rate ............................................ 197 operating band ................................... 196 data communication settings .................. 193 DATA jack ......................................... 16, 155 date and time.................................... 56, 183 display format ..................................... 184 DCS ........................................................ 104 using ................................................... 105 DCS code ............................................... 180 setting ................................................. 104 DCS transmission....................................111 DCS transmission / tone reception ..........111 departure point registering ............................................ 95 DIAL knob ........................................... 14, 15 Band A .................................................. 14 Band B ................................................. 15 digital code squelch ................................ 104 display background color........................ 172 display brightness............................. 58, 173 display contrast ...................................... 173 display method for my position ............... 178 display mode ............................................ 20 AppendixApplication for FCC / IC FCC ID: K6620345X40 / IC: 511B-20345X40 DISP/SETUP key ..................................... 14 distance scale........................................... 91 DTMF ......................................................112 DTMF code registering .................................. 112, 180 transmission method .......................... 180 transmitting manually ..........................................114 registered code ...............................113 DTMF function .........................................112 dual band screen ...................................... 19 dual receive .............................................. 81 restart condition .................................... 82 DWN ......................................................... 17 D/X key ..................................................... 14 E F G H I external eevice connected...................... 155 external power supply equipment............. 32 external speaker ..................................... 162 EXT GPS jack .................................... 15, 84 EXT SP jack ..................................... 16, 162 FM mode .................................................. 51 F/MW key ................................................. 15 frequency step ........................................ 188 frequency steps ........................................ 41 FR mode................................................... 46 function menu screen ............................... 19 functions and configuration settings ....... 183 fuse replacing ............................................. 207 gain........................................................... 50 geodetic reference system ............... 92, 192 GM function .............................................. 99 GM key ..................................................... 15 GPS .......................................................... 83 GPS function ............................................ 83 GPS log function ...................................... 89 GPS screen .............................................. 23 group monitor function settings .............. 183 home channel changing the frequency ........................ 64 monitoring ............................................ 81 recalling ................................................ 63 initialization and saving settings ............. 201 inputting the character .............................. 23 L M Index installation location when used in a mobile unit............................................................ 24 installing the radio .................................... 24 internal spurious intensity ....................... 209 interval for recording the GPS position information.............................................. 192 lap timer...................................................116 lap timer screen ........................................ 22 latitude and longitude display screen ....... 88 Listening to the frequency voice announcement........................................ 149 locking the knobs and switches ................ 55 main body ................................................. 16 installing ............................................... 27 maintenance ........................................... 207 memories to be skipped ........................... 77 memory erasing ................................................. 65 naming ................................................. 66 recalling ................................................ 63 writing ................................................... 62 memory channel ....................................... 62 sorting ................................................ 203 memory channel settings ....................... 179 memory mode .......................................... 44 memory scan ............................................ 74 memory scan method ............................. 179 memory tag display method ................................... 179 memory tag display .................................. 67 message creating and sending .......................... 125 downloading ....................................... 124 forwarding .......................................... 132 receiving ............................................. 122 Registering standard messages ......... 128 replying to ........................................... 130 sending ....................................... 122, 125 sorting ................................................ 123 standard ............................................. 127 viewing ............................................... 122 MIC jack ................................................... 16 microphone connecting ............................................ 29 microphone (MH-48A6JA) ........................ 17 micro-SD card .......................................... 33 copying data from ............................... 152 copying data to ................................... 151 initializing .............................................. 35 Initializing ........................................... 200 213 AppendixApplication for FCC / IC FCC ID: K6620345X40 / IC: 511B-20345X40 Index installing ............................................... 34 removing .............................................. 34 setting up .............................................. 33 writing group IDs to ............................ 200 writing settings to ............................... 199 micro-SD card settings ........................... 199 micro-SD card slot .................................... 16 modulation mode ...................................... 46 Narrow FM mode...................................... 47 notification of an incoming call using the bell 110, 181 numbers and symbols input screen.......... 23 operating band ......................................... 38 operating mode ........................................ 44 optional device settings .......................... 200 Optional receive Audio Record and Playback ................................................. 144 options list .............................................. 206 other stations registering the locations ....................... 96 packet communication............................ 158 setting the operation ........................... 160 pager function......................................... 106 activating ............................................ 108 pairing..................................................... 137 partner station information pop-up time ........................................ 177 picture downloading ....................................... 124 forwarding .......................................... 132 receiving ............................................. 122 replying to ........................................... 130 sending ....................................... 122, 125 sending the saved one ....................... 129 sorting ................................................ 123 taking .................................................. 141 taking with the camera attached to the speaker microphone ........................... 140 viewing ............................................... 122 viewing the saved one ........................ 143 PIN code......................................... 137, 191 PMS.......................................................... 79 PMS memory channel .............................. 79 position information .................................. 87 displaying the current ........................... 87 displaying the partner station ............... 87 recording .............................................. 89 position information display screen ........ 172 N O P 214 R S position information screen ...................... 88 position information to the computer ...... 156 positioning using GPS .............................. 83 positioning using the external GPS device ... 84, 192 position of the destination......................... 97 power off ................................................... 36 automatic ............................................ 191 power supply/LOCK switch ...................... 14 preset recalling .............................................. 202 registering .......................................... 201 program key of the microphone.............. 189 programmable key assigning the WX function to ................ 71 programmable memory writing into ............................................ 79 PTT ........................................................... 17 radio wave format ................................... 174 real-time navigation function .............. 93, 94 recalling a specified station .................... 108 receiving ................................................... 36 reception range expanding ........................................... 190 reconfiguring the settings ................. 61, 201 registered trademarks ................................ 4 repeater .................................................... 52 repeater shift direction .............................................. 186 width ................................................... 187 reset erasing only the registered memory channels ............................................... 61 restoring all settings ............................. 61 restoring the APRS settings ................. 61 reverse tone ............................................110 satellite capture status.............................. 86 saving the destination............................... 95 scanning direction .................................. 182 scanning function ..................................... 72 scanning method ...................................... 75 scanning stop ......................................... 183 scanning the programmable memories ... 79, 80 scan only the specified memory channels 76 scan settings .......................................... 182 screen....................................................... 18 screen display settings ........................... 171 Select the screen to be displayed .......... 171 sensitivity of the microphone ............ 50, 179 AppendixApplication for FCC / IC FCC ID: K6620345X40 / IC: 511B-20345X40 Setting the receive station code ............. 106 set-up menu basic operations ................................. 163 list ....................................................... 164 using ................................................... 171 signal reception method ......................... 182 smart navigation function ......................... 93 snapshot function ................................... 140 speaker microphone with camera .......... 200 connecting .......................................... 140 specification............................................ 210 specified memories .................................. 75 specified stations recalling .............................................. 180 split memory ............................................. 68 squelch code of the digital mode ............ 176 squelch detection ................................... 198 squelch level............................................. 39 squelch terminal ..................................... 198 squelch type setting for transmission and reception separately ........................................... 181 squelch type of the digital mode ............. 175 Standby Beep ......................................... 178 stopwatch function...................................115 sub-band mute ....................................... 179 T Taking Pictures with the optional Camera
(Snapshot Function) ............................... 140 time display ............................................ 173 timer / clock screen .................................115 timer/clock screen .................................... 21 timer function ...........................................115 time zone .......................................... 92, 185 TNC ........................................................ 158 Tone Calling.............................................. 53 tone frequency........................................ 180 setting ................................................. 102 tone signal settings................................. 180 tone squelch ........................................... 102 using ................................................... 103 tone transmission / DCS reception ..........111 TOT function ........................................... 120 touch key ................................................ 121 touch panel ................................................. 4 touch panel display................................... 14 transmission time limiting ................................................ 191 Transmit and receive settings ................ 174 transmit power .......................................... 50 transmitting ............................................... 49 Index transmitting the tone signal .................... 103 tuning the radio......................................... 40 turning the power on................................. 36 unit display ............................................. 191 UP ............................................................ 17 updating the firmware of the radio .......... 157 User Programmed Reverse CTCSS Decoder ...................................................110 user programmed reverse CTCSS tone . 180 V/D mode ................................................. 46 version of the DSP program ................... 178 VFO mode ................................................ 44 VFO scan ................................................. 72 voice guide unit mounting ............................................ 144 voice memory ......................................... 146 operation ............................................ 201 setting the operation ........................... 146 VOL knob ................................................. 14 voltage display........................................ 173 volume ...................................................... 38 VOX ........................................................ 134 weather alert..................................... 71, 182 weather channels ..................................... 70 recalling ................................................ 71 When you have difficulties ...................... 208 WX function .............................................. 70 U V W 215 AppendixApplication for FCC / IC FCC ID: K6620345X40 / IC: 511B-20345X40 1. Changes or modifications to this device not expressly approved by YAESU MUSEN could void the users authorization to operate this device. 2. This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference including received, interference that may cause undesired operation. 3. The scanning receiver in this equipment is incapable of tuning, or readily being altered, by the User to operate within the frequency bands allocated to the Domestic public Cellular Telecommunications Service in Part 22. Part 15.21: Changes or modifications to this device not expressly approved by YAESU MUSEN could void the users authorization to operate this device. The Scanner receiver is not a digital scanner and is incapable of being converted or modified to a digital scanner receiver by any user. DECLARATION BY MANUFACTURER WARNING: MODIFICATION OF THIS DEVICE TO RECEIVE CELLULAR RADIOTELEPHONE SERVICE SIGNALS IS PROHIBITED UNDER FCC RULES AND FEDERAL LAW. 216 AppendixApplication for FCC / IC FCC ID: K6620345X40 / IC: 511B-20345X40 Disposal of your Electronic and Electric Equipment Products with the symbol (crossed-out wheeled bin) cannot be disposed as house-
hold waste. Electronic and Electric Equipment should be recycled at a facility capable of handling these items and their waste by products. In EU countries, please contact your local equipment supplier representa-
tive or service center for information about the waste collection system in your country. Attention in case of use This transceiver works on frequencies which are not generally permitted. As for the actual usage, the user has to possess an amateur radio licence. Usage is allowed only in the frequency bands which are allocated for amateur radios. List of national codes CZ BE DE FR GB ES LT IT PT PL CH IS BG CY AT FI DK EE IE GR HR HU NL LV MT LU RO SK SI SE NO LI 217 AppendixApplication for FCC / IC FCC ID: K6620345X40 / IC: 511B-20345X40 YAESU MUSEN CO., LTD. Tennozu Parkside Building 2-5-8 Higashi-Shinagawa, Shinagawa-ku, Tokyo 140-0002 Japan YAESU USA 6125 Phyllis Drive, Cypress, CA 90630, U.S.A. YAESU UK Unit 12, Sun Valley Business Park, Winnall Close Winchester, Hampshire, SO23 0LB, U.K. Copyright 2015 YAESU MUSEN CO., LTD. All rights reserved. No portion of this manual may be reproduced without the permission of YAESU MUSEN CO., LTD. 1508-EM Printed in Japan Application for FCC / IC FCC ID: K6620345X40 / IC: 511B-20345X40
1 2 | User Manual 3 | Users Manual | 4.11 MiB |
Connecting the Radio Connecting the controller to the main body Caution Make sure the power supply is switched OFF before connecting the cable between the controller and the main body. 1 Plug the connector of the controller cable into the
[CONTROL] jack at the front of the main body until a click sound is heard 2 Plug the other connector of the controller cable into the [CONTROL] jack at the back of the controller until a click sound is heard Connecting the microphone 1 Plug the microphone connector into the [MIC]
jack at the front of the main body until a click sound is heard Tips To remove the microphone, pull the connector out while pressing the latch. Using the optional microphone extension kit MEK-
2, a microphone with a 8-pin connector can be used. A microphone extension cable (about 3 m long) is also included in MEK-2. Use it to install the microphone in locations which cannot be reached by the attached microphone cable. Main body Controller cable Controller Controller cable MIC DEF 3 MNO 6 WXYZ 9 K C O L P M A L A B C D 1 GHI 4 PQRS 7 ABC 2 JKL 5 TUV 8 0 P1 P3 P4 P2 DTMF MICROPHONE MH-48 Microphone Connector Connecting the antenna 1 Attach the antenna co-axial cable to the [ANT]
terminal at the back of the main body and tighten the connector Main body
(rear side) Co-axial cable connector 29 Installation and ConnectionApplication for FCC / IC FCC ID: K6620345X40 / IC: 511B-20345X40 Connecting the Power Supply Connecting the car battery When using this radio as a mobile unit, connect the DC power supply cable to the negative ground 12 V car battery. Cautions z Use the radio in a car with a negative ground 12 V DC system, where the minus (-) pole of the battery is connected to the car body. z Do not connect the radio to the 24 V battery of a large vehicle. z Do not use the cigarette lighter inside the car as a power source.
(1) Cable routing from inside the car to the engine compartment Rout the DC power supply cable to the engine compartment, passing it through a grommet in the fire wall from the passenger side. 1 Feed a hardened wire from the engine compartment through the grommet into the 2 Hook the end of the feed wire with the bare wire end of the provided DC power interior of the car supply cable 3 Fold and bend the ends of the wires and wind insulation tape around them 4 Pull the feed wire back into the engine compartment The DC power supply cable will be pulled through the grommet into the engine compartment. 5 Peel off the tape and remove the DC power supply cable from the feed wire Hardened wire Tape Grommet DC power supply cable
(accessory) DC power DC supply cable 30 Battery (12V) 12V Pass the cable through the grommet Radio main body Installation and ConnectionApplication for FCC / IC FCC ID: K6620345X40 / IC: 511B-20345X40 Connecting the Power Supply
(2) Connecting the power supply cable Cautions z Do not use a DC power supply cable other than the one that is provided or specified. z Do not rout the DC power supply cable where objects may be placed on top of it or persons may step on the cable. z Do not use the DC power supply cable with the fuse holder cut off. z Do not reverse the polarity (positive and negative) when connecting the battery. 1 Disconnect the minus (-) terminal from the battery 2 Obtain commercially available terminals and crimp or solder both the red (+) and This prevents short-circuiting the 12 V DC voltage while working on the cables. black (-) wire ends of the DC power supply cable DC DC power cable Crimping Soldering Crimped terminal 3 Connect the red wire (+) of the DC power supply cable to the positive (+) terminal of the battery Caution Fasten the DC power supply cable securely so that the terminals do not get disconnected. 4 Reconnect the negative (-) terminal of the battery that was disconnected 5 Connect the black wire (-) of the DC power supply cable to the negative (-) terminal of the battery Caution Fasten the DC power supply cable securely so that the terminals do not get disconnected. 6 Connect the DC power supply cable to the connector of the power cord of the main body Press the plug into the connector until a click sound is heard. Power cord (DC
(direct current) DC() 13.8 V) 13.8V Rear side of main body Fuse holder DC power DC supply cable
(accessory) Black Red DC 12 V battery DC12V 31 Installation and ConnectionApplication for FCC / IC FCC ID: K6620345X40 / IC: 511B-20345X40 Connecting the Power Supply Connecting the external power supply equipment When using this radio as a fixed station, use an external 12 V DC power source. Cautions z Use an external power source capable of supplying DC 13.8 V, a current capacity of 20 A or more
(FTM-400XDR/DE). z Make sure to switch OFF the power of the external power source before connecting. 1 Connect the red wire (+) of the provided DC power supply cable to the positive
(+) terminal of the external power source, and the black wire (-) to the negative (-) terminal of the external power source 2 Connect the DC power supply cable to the connector of the power cord of the main body Press the plug into the connector until a click sound is heard. Power cord (DC DC()
(direct current) 13.8V 13.8 V) Fuse holder 13.8 V DC power Direct current supply Black DC DC power supply cable (accessory) Rear side of main body Red AC100V AC line outlet 32 Installation and ConnectionApplication for FCC / IC FCC ID: K6620345X40 / IC: 511B-20345X40 Setting Up the micro-SD Card The following operations can be carried out by using a micro-SD card in this radio. Backing up the information and settings of the radio Saving the information in the memory channels Saving the settings in the set-up mode Saving the GPS log data Saving photos taken with the optional speaker microphone with camera MH-85A11U Saving data that has been downloaded using the GM function and WIRES-X function Exchanging the saved data among multiple radios Micro-SD cards that can be used 2 GB, 4 GB, 8 GB, 16 GB and 32 GB micro-SDHC cards can be used in this radio. Cautions z The micro-SD or micro-SDHC cards are not provided with the product. z Not all micro-SD and micro-SDHC cards sold commercially are guaranteed to work with this product. Things to note when using micro-SD cards Do not bend the micro-SD card or place heavy objects on top of it. Do not touch the terminal face of the micro-SD card with your bare hands. Micro-SD cards that are initialized in other devices may not record normally when used in this device. Re-initialize the micro-SD card in this radio when using a card that has been initialized in another device. (Refer to Page 35 on how to initialize the memory card) Do not pull the micro-SD card out, or switch the power to the radio OFF when reading or writing data to the card. Do not insert anything other than a micro-SD card into the micro-SD card slot of the radio. Do not pull out or insert the micro-SD card with unreasonable force. When a single micro-SD card is used for a long period of time, writing and deletion of data may become disabled. Use a new micro-SD card when data can no longer be written or erased. Note that Yaesu shall not be liable for any damages suffered as a result of data loss or corruption in use of the micro-SD card. 33 Installation and ConnectionApplication for FCC / IC FCC ID: K6620345X40 / IC: 511B-20345X40 Setting Up the micro-SD Card Installing the micro-SD card 1 Press power to the main body for 2 seconds or longer to switch off the 2 Insert the micro-SD card into the micro-SD card slot, with the terminal face on top, until a click sound is heard Cautions z Insert the micro-SD card in the correct direction. z Do not touch the terminal of the micro-SD card with your hands. micro-SD microSD card slot Terminal face micro-SD card microSD After the power is switched on, the icon will be displayed at the top right of the display. Tip It may take a while for the icon to appear depending on the card capacity.
Removing the micro-SD card for 2 seconds or longer to switch off the power to the main body 1 Press 2 Push in on the microSD card A click sound will be heard and the micro-SD card will be pushed outward. 3 Pull the micro-SD card from the micro-SD card slot 34 Installation and ConnectionApplication for FCC / IC FCC ID: K6620345X40 / IC: 511B-20345X40 Setting Up the micro-SD Card Initializing the micro-SD card When using a new micro-SD card, initialize the micro-SD card according to the following procedure. Caution Upon initialization, all the data recorded in the micro-SD card will be erased. Check the contents of the micro-SD card before initialization. 1 Press for one second or longer The set-up menu will be displayed. 2 Touch [SD CARD]
The menu list will be displayed. 3 Touch [3 FORMAT]
The format confirmation screen will be displayed. 4 Touch [OK?]
The micro-SD card will be initialized. Tip Touch [Cancel] to stop the initialization. Completed will be displayed when initialization is completed and the screen will then return to the menu list.
35 Installation and ConnectionApplication for FCC / IC FCC ID: K6620345X40 / IC: 511B-20345X40 Basic Operations Receiving Turning the power on 1 Press for 2 seconds or longer The power will be switched on, and the display will appear on the screen. Tips When switching the power on for the first time after purchasing, or after resetting, a screen requesting the call sign of your own station be entered, will be displayed. From the second time onwards, the call sign of your own station entered the first time will be displayed. Switching the power off
1 Press for 2 seconds or longer The screen display will disappear, and the power will be switched off. 36 Basic OperationsApplication for FCC / IC FCC ID: K6620345X40 / IC: 511B-20345X40 Receiving Inputing the call sign When switching the power on for the first time after purchasing, or after resetting the device, a screen requesting the call sign of your own station be entered will be displayed. The call sign is used to identify the transmitting station when communicating in the digital mode. 1 Touch the blinking [CALLSIGN]
Tips The display will change to the character input screen automatically if there are no operations for about 3 seconds. 2 Touch a character key The touched character will be displayed at the top of the screen. Enter each character of your call sign. Tips Up to 10 characters (letters, numbers, and a hyphen ) can be entered. Refer to Page 23 on how to operate the character input screen. 3 Touch [ENT]
The screen will change. Thereafter, the entered call sign is displayed at the bottom of the power on screen, and the display will switch to the frequency display screen (dual band screen).
37 Basic OperationsApplication for FCC / IC FCC ID: K6620345X40 / IC: 511B-20345X40 Receiving Switching the operating band The two bands are displayed at the top and bottom of the dual band screen. The frequency and the modulation mode of the operating band can be changed. The band that is not in operation is called the sub-band.
.
1 Touch the frequency display area of the band that you would like to set as the operating band The characters of the tag and frequency will be displayed in white. The sub-band characters will be displayed in gray. Tip The operating band can also be changed by pressing Adjusting the volume 1 Turn The volume level will be displayed in the VOL meter below the frequency. 38 Basic OperationsApplication for FCC / IC FCC ID: K6620345X40 / IC: 511B-20345X40 Receiving Adjusting the squelch level Annoying noises can be muted when a signal cannot be detected. Band A and Band B squelch levels can be individually adjusted. Noise can be canceled more easily when the squelch level is increased but it may become more difficult to pick up weak signals. Adjust the squelch level as required. 1 Touch [SQL]
When [SQL] turns orange, the VOL meter below the frequency will change to show the SQL level setting.
2 Turn to adjust the squelch level The level will be displayed in the SQL meter. Tip The SQL meter will return to the VOL meter if there is no operation for three seconds.
39 Basic OperationsApplication for FCC / IC FCC ID: K6620345X40 / IC: 511B-20345X40 Receiving Tuning the radio Using the knobs 1 Turn The frequency will increase when the knob is turned in a clockwise direction and decrease when turned in a counter-clockwise direction. Using the microphone keys 1 Press [UP] or [DWN]
The frequency increases when [UP] is pressed, and decreases when [DWN] is pressed. DWN UP Entering the numerical figures 1 Press The function menu will be displayed. 2 Touch [
]
The number input screen will be displayed.
40 Basic OperationsApplication for FCC / IC FCC ID: K6620345X40 / IC: 511B-20345X40 3 Touch a number key The touched number will be displayed at the top of the screen. Tip Refer to Page 23 for operation of the number input screen. 4 Touch [ENT]
The display will return to the function menu and the entered frequency of the operating band will be displayed at the top of the screen. Receiving
Changing the frequency steps
The frequency step while tuning with the knob or [UP]/[DWN] keys of the microphone, can be changed. Changing the frequency step to 1 MHz temporarily 1 Press of the operating band, or touch the frequency display area of the operating band The MHZ field in the frequency display will blink.
41 Basic OperationsApplication for FCC / IC FCC ID: K6620345X40 / IC: 511B-20345X40 Receiving 2 Turn of the operating band The frequency will change in 1 MHz steps Tip When there is no operation for three seconds, the MHz field will stop blinking and the frequency step will return to the normal step. Changing the frequency step to 5 MHz temporarily 1 Press The kHz frequency digits will not be shown on the screen. for one second or longer
42 Basic OperationsApplication for FCC / IC FCC ID: K6620345X40 / IC: 511B-20345X40 2 Turn The frequency will change in steps of 5 MHz. Tip When there is no operation for three seconds, the kHz digits will be displayed and the frequency step will return to the normal step. Changing the frequency step using the set-up menu 1 Press for one second or longer The set-up menu will be displayed. 2 Touch [CONFIG]
The menu list will be displayed. 3 Turn STEP]
or touch the screen to select [7 FM AM Receiving
43 Basic OperationsApplication for FCC / IC FCC ID: K6620345X40 / IC: 511B-20345X40 Receiving 4 Touch [7 FM AM STEP]
The frequency step that is currently set up will change to orange. to select the frequency step 5 Turn The setting will change in the following sequence:
AUTO 5.00 KHz 6.25 KHz 8.33 KHz (air band only) 10.00 KHz 12.50 KHz 15.00 KHz 20.00 KHz 25.00 KHz 50.00 KHz 100.00 KHz Tip Factory default value: AUTO 6 Touch [7 FM AM STEP]
The selected frequency step will be set, changing from orange to green.
7 Press for one second or longer The frequency step will be set and the display will return to the previous screen. Tip The display can also be returned to the previous screen by touching [BACK] twice. Switching the operating mode The operating mode can be switched between the VFO mode where the frequency can be freely set, and the memory mode where the channels saved in the memory are recalled for operation. 1 Choose the operating band 44 Basic OperationsApplication for FCC / IC FCC ID: K6620345X40 / IC: 511B-20345X40
1 2 | User Manual 4 | Users Manual | 2.20 MiB |
2 Touch [V/M]
The mode will change to the memory mode. The channel number will be displayed above the frequency. The name (tag) assigned to the memory channel will also be displayed. 3 Touch [V/M] again The mode will change to the VFO mode and the frequency will return to the last frequency received. VFO will be displayed above the frequency. Receiving
Switching the communication mode This radio is equipped with an Automatic Mode Select (AMS) function which automatically selects any one of four communication modes to match the signal received. Besides C4FM digital signals, analog signals are also identified in order to automatically match the communication mode of the partner station.
* Digital communication can be performed only on the Band A. Press to display * on the screen.
* Display differs depending on the signal received. AMS Display example when in the AMS
45 Basic OperationsApplication for FCC / IC FCC ID: K6620345X40 / IC: 511B-20345X40 Receiving When operating in a fixed communication mode, switch to the communication mode using
. The communication mode will switch in sequence as follows each time is pressed.
(AMS) DN (V/D mode) VW/DW (FR mode) FM (Analog) Operating mode Display Explanation of modes AMS
(Automatic Mode Select) V/D mode
(simultaneous voice and data communication mode) Voice FR mode
(Voice full-rate mode) Data FR mode
(high speed data communication mode) Analog FM mode DN VW DW FM The operating mode is automatically selected from four communication modes to match the signal received.
(The part display differs according to the signal received) The AMS feature settings may be changed via Set-up Menu (
P.174). As the audio signal error is detected and repaired at the same time as the transmission of the digital audio signal, it becomes more difficult for conversations to be cut off. A basic digital mode of C4FM FDMA. Digital voice data is transmitted using the entire 12.5 kHz bandwidth. High quality voice communication is possible. High speed data communication mode using the entire 12.5 kHz bandwidth for data communication. Automatically switches to this mode for video communication. Analog communication mode using the FM mode. This mode is effective for communication when the signal strength is so weak that the voice is cut off midway in the digital mode. Caution In the V/D mode (DN displayed), the position information is included in the transmitted signal during the conversation, but in the Voice FR mode (VW displayed), the position information is not included. Switching the modulation mode The modulation mode can be selected from FM, NARROW FM and AM in the analog mode. When shipped from the factory, the mode is set to AUTO where the most optimal modulation mode is automatically selected according to the frequency. 1 Choose the operating band 2 Press for one second or longer The set-up menu will be displayed. 46 Basic OperationsApplication for FCC / IC FCC ID: K6620345X40 / IC: 511B-20345X40 Receiving
3 Touch [TX/RX]
The menu list will be displayed. 4 Touch [MODE] to select the modulation mode The modulation mode changes in the following order each time the screen is touched:
AUTO (FM): Automatically switches the modulation mode to match the frequency band FM: Switches to the FM mode. NARROW FM: Switches to the Narrow FM mode. The degree of modulation becomes half the normal level. AM: Switches to the AM mode. Tip Factory default value: AUTO (FM) for one second or longer 5 Press The modulation mode is set up and the display returns to the previous screen. Displaying the band scope The band scope can display a graph of the signal activity of the channels surrounding the memory channel or frequency that has been set up in the operating band. The display is centered on the current operating frequency. 1 Touch [SCOPE]
[SCOPE] will turn orange and the band scope will be displayed. Tip The range to be shown can also be adjusted. Refer to Setting the width of the band scope ( P.172).
47 Basic OperationsApplication for FCC / IC FCC ID: K6620345X40 / IC: 511B-20345X40 Receiving 2 Touch [SCOPE] again The display will return to the dual band screen.
Muting the audio The audio in the operating band and sub-band can be muted with just one touch. 1 Touch [MUTE]
[MUTE] will turn orange and the sound will become inaudible. 2 Touch [MUTE] again The sound will become audible.
48 Basic OperationsApplication for FCC / IC FCC ID: K6620345X40 / IC: 511B-20345X40 Communicating Transmitting 1 Press and hold the microphone [PTT]
A red bar will be displayed on the left of the band display. Also, the transmission output level will be displayed in the PO meter under the VOL meter. 2 Talk directly into the microphone [MIC]
Tip Keep the microphone at a distance of about 1 inch away from the mouth when talking. 3 Release [PTT]
The red bar and PO meter level will disappear and the radio will return to the receiving state. Tips Refrain from transmitting continuously for a long period of time as much as possible. The temperature of the main body will rise and this may result in burns and equipment failure due to overheating. ERROR TX FREQ will be displayed when attempting to transmit on a frequency that is not in the amateur band. PTT MIC MIC DEF 3 MNO 6 WXYZ 9 K C O L P M A L A B C D 1 GHI 4 PQRS 7 ABC 2 JKL 5 TUV 8 0 P1 P3 P4 P2 DTMF MICROPHONE MH-48
49 Basic OperationsApplication for FCC / IC FCC ID: K6620345X40 / IC: 511B-20345X40 Communicating Adjusting the transmit power When communicating with a nearby station, the transmit power can be reduced to save on energy consumption. 1 Press The function menu will be displayed. 2 Touch [Tx PWR] to select the transmit power The transmission power is changed in the following sequence, each time [Tx PWP] is touched. HI LO MD
Model FTM-400XDR/DE HI 50 W MD 20 W LO 5 W
3 Press The transmit power is set and the display returns to the previous screen. Tips display. The current setting will be displayed under [Tx PWR] in the The default setting when shipped from the factory is HI. Adjusting the sensitivity of the microphone The sensitivity (gain) of the microphone can be adjusted. 1 Press for one second or longer The set-up menu will be displayed. 50 Basic OperationsApplication for FCC / IC FCC ID: K6620345X40 / IC: 511B-20345X40 2 Touch [TX/RX]
The menu list will be displayed. 3 Touch [AUDIO]
The menu list will be displayed. 4 Touch [3 MIC GAIN] to select the sensitivity The sensitivity will change in the following sequence each time the screen is touched. MIN LOW NORMAL HIGH MAX Tips The sensitivity can also be selected by pressing
. Factory default value: NORMAL Communicating
5 Press for one second or longer The sensitivity is set and the display returns to the previous screen. Tip The display can also be returned to the previous screen by touching [BACK] twice. Communicating in the FM mode 1 Choose the operating band 2 Select FM as the modulation mode 3 Tune the radio using 4 Press and hold the microphone [PTT] to talk Tip The Narrow FM mode can also be used. Set the mode to [NARROW FM] under [TX/RX] [MODE]
in the set-up menu. 51 Basic OperationsApplication for FCC / IC FCC ID: K6620345X40 / IC: 511B-20345X40 Communicating Communicating using the repeater This radio includes an ARS (Automatic Repeater Shift) function which permits communication through the repeater automatically just by setting the receiver to the repeater frequency. 1 Set the receive frequency to the repeater frequency 2 Press [PTT], to begin communicating through the repeater Tips
- or + appears on top of the display. Press and touch [REV] to reverse the transmission and reception frequencies temporarily to check whether direct communication with the partner station is possible. When reversing the frequencies, [REV] will turn orange. When [REV] is touched one more time, the reverse is cancelled. When the settings are changed in the set-up menu, this radio can be used in even more convenient ways. The ARS function can be turned off under CONFIG 4 AUTO RPT SHIFT. The repeater shift direction can be set under CONFIG 5 RPT SHIFT. The repeater shift width can be changed under CONFIG 6 RPT SHIFT FREQ.
Repeater shift The FTM-400XDR/DE has been configured, at the factory, for the repeater shifts customary in the country where it is sold. For the 144 MHz band, this usually will be 600 kHz, while the 430 MHz shift will be 1.6 MHz or 7.6 MHz. Depending on the part of the band in which you are operating, the repeater shift may be either downward () or upward (+), and one of these icons will appear on the display when repeater shifts have been enabled. Automatic repeater shift (ARS) The FTM-400XDR/DE ARS feature causes the appropriate repeater shift to be automatically applied whenever it is tuned into the designated repeater sub-bands. If the ARS feature does not appear to be working, you may have accidentally disabled it. To re-enable ARS:
1 Press for one second or longer The set-up menu will be displayed. 52 Basic OperationsApplication for FCC / IC FCC ID: K6620345X40 / IC: 511B-20345X40
1 2 | User Manual 5 | Users Manual | 3.35 MiB |
Communicating
2 Touch [CONFIG]
The menu list will be displayed. 3 Turn SHIFT]
, or touch the screen to select [4 AUTO RPT 4 Touch [4 AUTO RPT SHIFT] to select ON The setting will switch between ON and OFF each time it is touched. 5 Press for one second or longer The automatic repeater shift will be set and the display will return to the previous screen. Tip The display can also be returned to the previous screen by touching [BACK] twice. Tone Calling (1750 Hz) Press and hold in the program key [P1] of the microphone (MH-48) to generates a 1750 Hz burst tone to access the repeater. The transmitter will automatically be activated, and a 1750 Hz audio tone will be superimposed on the carrier. Once access to the repeater has been gained, you may release the [P1] key, and use the [PTT] for activating the transmitter thereafter. 53 Basic OperationsApplication for FCC / IC FCC ID: K6620345X40 / IC: 511B-20345X40 Other Settings Changing the beep volume The volume of the confirmation beep that goes off when a key is pressed can be adjusted. 1 Press for one second or longer The set-up menu will be displayed. 2 Touch [CONFIG]
The menu list will be displayed. 3 Touch [8 BEEP] to select the volume The volume changes in the following sequence each time the screen is touched. OFF LOW HIGH Tip Factory default value: LOW
4 Press for one second or longer The beep volume will be set and the display will return to the previous screen. Tip The display can also be returned to the previous screen by touching [BACK] twice. 54 Basic OperationsApplication for FCC / IC FCC ID: K6620345X40 / IC: 511B-20345X40 Other Settings Locking the knobs and switches The knobs and switches etc. can be locked to avoid inadvertent changes and unintended operation. 1 Press LOCK will appear in the display and the display will return to the previous screen. quickly Press quickly one more time to cancel the lock. UNLOCK will appear in the display and the display will return to the previous screen.
55 Basic OperationsApplication for FCC / IC FCC ID: K6620345X40 / IC: 511B-20345X40 Other Settings Adjusting the date and time This radio has a built-in clock. Adjust the time before using. 1 Press The mode will change to the set-up mode. for one second or longer 2 Touch [CONFIG]
The menu list will be displayed. 3 Touch [1 DATA & TIME ADJUST]
The screen for setting the date and time will be displayed. 4 Touch [SET]
Month will blink. 5 Touch [+] and [-] to set the month 6 Touch [SET]
Day will blink. 56
Basic OperationsApplication for FCC / IC FCC ID: K6620345X40 / IC: 511B-20345X40 7 Touch [+] and [-] to set the day 8 Touch [SET]
Year will blink. 9 Touch [+] and [-] to set the year 10 Touch [SET]
Hour will blink. 11 Touch [+] and [-] to set the hour 12 Touch [SET]
Minute will blink. 13 Touch [+] and [-] to set the minute Other Settings
57 Basic OperationsApplication for FCC / IC FCC ID: K6620345X40 / IC: 511B-20345X40 Other Settings 14 Touch [SET]
for one second or longer
15 Press The date and time will be set and the display will return to the previous screen. Tips The time will be displayed at the top right of the display. You can also return to the previous screen by touching
[BACK] three times. Tips The accuracy of the clock is 30 seconds per month at normal temperature. The accuracy may differ depending on the operating conditions such as temperature. The time is automatically set when signals are received from the GPS. When using this radio for the first time, the accuracy of the clock may occasionally be lower. In this case, adjust the time again. The calendar can display dates between Jan 1, 2000 and Dec 31, 2099. Adjusting the display brightness The brightness and contrast of the touch panel can be adjusted. 1 Press for one second or longer The set-up menu will be displayed. 2 Touch [DISPLAY]
The menu list will be displayed.
58 Basic OperationsApplication for FCC / IC FCC ID: K6620345X40 / IC: 511B-20345X40 3 Select [5 LCD BRIGHTNESS] and touch the screen The screen for selecting the level will be displayed. 4 Touch [+] and [-] to select the brightness level The setting changes by one level each time the screen is touched. The brightness level can be selected from one of the following seven levels. MIN, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6 and MAX Tip Factory default value: MAX 5 Touch [BACK]
The brightness is set and the display returns to the previous screen. Other Settings
6 Select [6 LCD CONTRAST] and touch the screen The screen for selecting the level will be displayed.
7 Touch [+] and [-] to select the contrast level The setting changes by one level each time the screen is touched. The contrast level can be selected from one of the following seven levels.
-3, -2, -1, 0, +1, +2, +3 Tip Factory default value: +3 8 Press for one second or longer The contrast is set and the display returns to the previous screen. Tip The display can also be returned to the previous screen by touching [BACK] twice.
59 Basic OperationsApplication for FCC / IC FCC ID: K6620345X40 / IC: 511B-20345X40 Other Settings Changing the background color of the frequency display area The background (shade) of the frequency display can be selected from five colors. 1 Press for one second or longer The set-up menu will be displayed. 2 Touch [DISPLAY]
The menu list will be displayed. 3 Touch [3 BACKGROUND COLOR] to select the color The setting changes in the following sequence each time the screen is touched. ORANGE GREEN BLUE PURPLE GRAY Tip Factory default value: ORANGE 4 Press for one second or longer The background color is set and the display returns to the previous screen. Tip The display can also be returned to the previous screen by touching [BACK] twice.
60 Basic OperationsApplication for FCC / IC FCC ID: K6620345X40 / IC: 511B-20345X40
1 2 | User Manual 6 | Users Manual | 3.68 MiB |
Reconfiguring the Settings The settings and memory of this radio can be returned to be default factory settings when it was first shipped. 1 Press for one second or longer The set-up menu will be displayed. 2 Touch [RESET/CLONE]
The menu list will be displayed. The following resets can be selected.
[1 FACTORY RESET]: This restores all settings to the default settings when shipped from the factory.
[4 MEM CH RESET]: This erases only the registered memory channels.
* Settings in the set-up menu will not be erased.
[6 APRS RESET]: This restores the APRS settings to the default value when shipped from the factory. 3 Touch the item to be reset The reset confirmation screen will be displayed. 4 Touch [OK?]
The settings and memory will be reset and restored to the default status when shipped from the factory Tip Touch [Cancel] to stop the resetting.
61 Basic OperationsApplication for FCC / IC FCC ID: K6620345X40 / IC: 511B-20345X40 Using the Memory Frequently used frequencies and settings can be saved in the memory so that you can quickly and conveniently operate on present channel. The radio is also equipped with the following memory functions:
Skips memory channels that you do not wish to receive during scanning ( P.77) Scans only the specified memory channels ( P.76) Programmable Memory Scan (PMS) that scans only the specified frequency range
(in the same frequency band) ( P.79) The operating frequency and other operational information can be registered to each regular memory channel, home channel, or PMS memory channel:
Operating frequency Tone information Memory skip information
(The operating mode information is not registered to the memory channels) Repeater information Transmission power Memory tag DCS information Writing to the memory Tip The information saved in the memory may be lost due to incorrect operation, static electricity or electrical noise. Data may also be lost due to component failures and repairs. Make sure to write down the information registered in the memories on a piece of paper or by using a micro-SD card. A total of 500 channel memories each, can be used for Band A and Band B. 1 Switch to the VFO mode 2 Use to adjust the frequency to be written in the memory 3 Press for one second or longer The memory writing screen will be displayed. The frequency will be automatically displayed in the next empty memory channel. Tip Refer to Steps 3 to 12 in Naming a memory channel
( P.66) when assigning a name to a memory channel. 4 Turn to select a different (if desired) memory channel Tip The memory channel can also be selected by touching it directly. 5 Press When the memory writing is completed, the to save the data to memory frequency and memory channel number will be shown in the display. Tips The frequency that is already written in the memory can also be overwritten by a new frequency. Touch [V/M] to return to the VFO mode. 62
Using the MemoryApplication for FCC / IC FCC ID: K6620345X40 / IC: 511B-20345X40 Using the Memory Tips When shipped from the factory, the frequency in memory channel 1 of Band A is set to 144.000 MHz while the frequency in memory channel 1 of Band B is set to 430.000 MHz. These can be changed to other frequencies but cannot be erased. Names can also be assigned to the memory channels ( P.66). 9 pairs of PMS memory channels can be written for Band A and Band B each ( P.79). Recalling the memory 1 Touch [V/M] to switch the mode The memory channel last used will be shown in the display. 2 Turn to select the memory channel Touch [V/M] again to return to the VFO mode. Tip Non-registered memory channels will be skipped. Recalling the home channel 1 Press 2 Switch the menu using [BACK] and [FWD]
The function menu will be displayed.
63 Using the MemoryApplication for FCC / IC FCC ID: K6620345X40 / IC: 511B-20345X40 Using the Memory 3 Touch [HOME]
mode. The home channel will be shown in the display. Tip Change the frequency using to return to the VFO Touch [HOME] again to return to the VFO mode and display the frequency that was selected before the home channel was recalled.
Tip When shipped from the factory, the frequency in the home channel of Band A is set to 144.000 MHz while the frequency in the home channel of Band B is set to 430.000 MHz.
Changing the frequency of the home channel The default frequency setting of the home channel when shipped from the factory can be changed. 1 Switch to the VFO mode 2 Adjust the frequency using 3 Press The memory writing screen will be displayed. for one second or longer
to select [HOME]
4 Turn 5 Press The overwrite confirmation screen will be displayed. 64
Using the MemoryApplication for FCC / IC FCC ID: K6620345X40 / IC: 511B-20345X40 6 Touch [OK?] to confirm and store the home channel frequency When the writing to the home channel is completed, the updated home channel frequency will be displayed. Tip Touch [Cancel] to stop writing. Erasing the memory 1 Touch [V/M] for 2 to 3 seconds 2 Turn The memory list will be displayed. to select the memory to be erased 3 Touch [DEL]
The erase confirmation screen will be displayed. 4 Touch [OK?] to confirm and delete the data The memory will be erased, and the display will become an empty field. Tips Touch [Cancel] to cancel the memory deletion. Repeat Steps 2 to 4 to erase additional memories. Caution Memory channel 1 and the home channel cannot be erased. Using the Memory
65 Using the MemoryApplication for FCC / IC FCC ID: K6620345X40 / IC: 511B-20345X40 Using the Memory Naming the memory Names (memory tags) such as call signs and the names of the broadcasting stations can be assigned to the memory channels and home channel. Up to eight of the following characters can be entered as a memory tag. English letters (capital/small letters), numbers, symbols Example: Assigning a name like YM Grp01 1 Touch [V/M] for 2 to 3 seconds The memory list will be displayed.
2 Select the memory channel the name is going to be assigned to Tip Select the home channel when assigning a name to the home channel. for one second or longer 3 Press The character input screen will be displayed. Tip Touch the memory channel or press for one second or longer to display the character input screen. 4 Touch [Caps] first, and then touch [Y] and [M]
[Caps] will turn orange, enabling capital letters to be entered. 5 Touch [Space]
6 Touch [G]
7 Touch [Caps] first, and then touch [R] and [P]
[Caps] will turn white, enabling lower case letters to be entered. 66
Using the MemoryApplication for FCC / IC FCC ID: K6620345X40 / IC: 511B-20345X40 8 Touch [123]
The number and symbols input screen will be displayed. 9 Touch [0] and then [1]
10 Touch [ENT]
The name will be stored in memory and displayed on the right side of the frequency. 11 Touch [BACK]
The display will return to the previous screen. Changing the method of the memory tag display Using the Memory
The method of displaying the frequency and name assigned to the memory can be selected for each channel. 1 Switch to the memory mode 2 Select the memory channel that you want to change the memory tag display method on for one second or longer The set-up menu will be displayed. 3 Press 4 Touch [MEMORY]
The menu list will be displayed.
67 Using the MemoryApplication for FCC / IC FCC ID: K6620345X40 / IC: 511B-20345X40 Using the Memory 5 Touch [1 ALPHA TAG SIZE] to select the memory tag display size The setting will switch between SMALL and LARGE each time it is touched. SMALL: Display the memory tag in small-sized characters and the frequency in large-
sized characters. LARGE: Display the memory tag in large-sized characters and the frequency in small-
sized characters.
Tip Factory default value: LARGE for one second or longer 6 Press The size of the memory tag display will be set and the display will return to the previous screen. Tip The display method can also be changed by pressing for one second or longer in the memory mode. LARGE SMALL
Split memory Separate frequencies for transmit and receive can be registered for each memory channel. Simultaneous registration 1 Select the receive frequency in the VFO mode 2 Press 3 Press The memory writing screen will be displayed. for one second or longer for one second or longer The character input screen will be displayed. Tip Refer to Steps 4 to 11 in Naming a memory channel (
P.66) when assigning a name to a memory channel. 4 Touch [TX IN]
The number input screen will be displayed. 68
Using the MemoryApplication for FCC / IC FCC ID: K6620345X40 / IC: 511B-20345X40 5 Enter the transmit frequency The entered frequency will be displayed on the right side of [T] at the top of the screen. 6 Touch [ENT]
The display will return to the memory writing screen. Using the Memory
7 Turn to select the memory channel Tip The memory channel can also be selected by touching it directly. 8 Press When the memory writing is completed, the receive frequency will be shown in the to save the transmit frequency display. Registering transmit frequency at a later time 1 Touch [V/M] for 2 to 3 seconds The memory list will be displayed. 2 Select the memory channel whose transmit frequency is to be registered for one second or longer 3 Press The character input screen will be displayed. Tips Touch the memory channel or press for a second or longer to display the character input screen. Refer to Steps 3 to 12 in Naming a memory channel
( P.66) when assigning a name to a memory channel.
69 Using the MemoryApplication for FCC / IC FCC ID: K6620345X40 / IC: 511B-20345X40
1 2 | User Manual 7 | Users Manual | 2.92 MiB |
Using the Memory 4 Touch [TX IN]
The number input screen will be displayed. 5 Enter the transmit frequency The entered frequency will be displayed on the right side of [T] at the top of the screen. 6 Touch [ENT]
The display will return to the memory list.
7 Press When memory writing is complete, the receive frequency will be shown in the to save the transmit frequency display. Receiving Weather Broadcast Channels (USA version only) This radio includes the preprogrammed VHF Weather Broadcast Station Memory Channel Bank, and can receive the broadcast or the weather alert by recalling or scanning a desired channel. The following channels are stored in the weather station memory bank of this radio. Channel No. WX01 WX02 WX03 WX04 WX05 Frequency 162.550 MHz 162.400 MHz 162.475 MHz 162.425 MHz 162.450 MHz Channel No. WX06 WX07 WX08 WX09 WX10 Frequency 162.500 MHz 162.525 MHz 161.650 MHz 161.775 MHz 163.275 MHz This WX function can only be used through the programmable keys [P1] to [P4] on the microphone. 70 Using the MemoryApplication for FCC / IC FCC ID: K6620345X40 / IC: 511B-20345X40 Using the Memory Assigning the WX function to a programmable key on the microphone The menu list will be displayed. for one second or longer The set-up menu will be displayed. 1 Press 2 Select and touch [CONFIG]
3 Select and touch [10 MIC PROGRAM KEY]
The setting screen for programmable keys on the microphone will be displayed. 4 Touch the key name (P1 to P4) where the WX function is going to be assigned When the [WX] is not displayed, turn 5 Select and touch [WX]
6 Touch [BACK]
The display will return to the setting screen for programmable keys. The functions that can be assigned will be displayed. to scroll the display. Recalling the weather channels Example: When WX is assigned to [P1]
1 Press [P1] on the microphone The WX function is activated, and the weather channel selected last time the WX function was activated will be displayed on the screen. to select the other channels 2 Turn 3 Press the [PTT] button on the microphone to search for louder stations Scanning of the channels stored in the weather station memory bank will start. When the scanning pauses on a station, press the [PTT] button once to halt the scan, or press it twice to restart the scan. 4 Press the [PTT] button to finish the scan 5 Press [P1]
The WX function will be inactivated and the display will return to the previous screen. Listening the weather alert In the event of extreme weather disturbances, such as storms and hurricanes, the NOAA (National Oceanic and Atmospheric Administration) sends a weather alert accompanied by a 1050 Hz tone and subsequent weather report on one of the NOAA weather channels. You may disable to receive the weather alert tone using
[SIGNALING][9 WX ALERT] in the set-up menu. 71 Using the MemoryApplication for FCC / IC FCC ID: K6620345X40 / IC: 511B-20345X40 Scanning Signal Search The FTM-400XDR/DE transceiver is equipped with a scanning function to search for memory channels and VFO frequencies for active signals. Scanning can be performed using the following four methods:
VFO scan Scan for all memory channels Scan for specified memory channels Scanning the programmable memories Tip The band scope function can be used to search for active channels and show a graph. When [SCOPE] in the screen is touched, the strengths of the channels will be displayed in a graph, with the current frequency located in the center of the screen ( P.47). VFO scan 1 Select the band to be scanned, and switch to the VFO mode 2 Press 3 Touch [SCAN]
The function menu will be displayed. briefly Tip When [SCAN] is not displayed in the function menu, touch [BACK] and [FWD] to switch the menu.
The scan will start from low to high frequency. During scanning, the decimal point of the frequency display will blink. When a signal is received, the scan will stop for three
seconds before starting to scan again. Tips The scan can also be started by pressing the [UP] or
[DWN] button on the microphone for one second or longer. The scanning direction (UP/DOWN) can be set using [SCAN][2 SCAN DIRECTION] in the set-up menu. The scanning direction can also be changed by pressing the [UP] or [DWN] button on the microphone or turning The action used to stop the scanning may be set using [SCAN][3 SCAN RESUME] in the set-up menu (refer to the next page). The squelch level may be adjusted using the following procedure during scanning. Touch [SQL] Turn during scanning.
. 72 ScanningApplication for FCC / IC FCC ID: K6620345X40 / IC: 511B-20345X40 To stop the scanning To stop the scanning, either touch [SCAN] or press the microphone [PTT] button (the radio will not transmit in this case). Signal Search Setting the receive operation when the scanning stops Any of the following three methods can be selected as the action to be taken after the scanning stops.
(1) Restarts the scanning after receiving for the set amount of time. Select from one, three or five seconds.
(2) Continues receiving until the signal disappears and then restart the scanning two seconds after the signal disappears (BUSY). for one second or longer The set-up menu will be displayed.
(3) Stops the scanning to receive at that frequency (HOLD). 1 Press 2 Touch [SCAN]
The menu list will be displayed. 3 Touch [3 SCAN RESUME] to select the reception method The reception method will change in the following order each time the screen is touched. BUSY HOLD 1sec 3sec 5sec Tips The reception method can also be selected by pressing
.
Factory default value: 3 sec for one second or longer 4 Press The reception method when the scanning stops will be set and the display will return to the previous screen. Tip The settings here are applicable to VFO Scan, Memory Scan and Programmable Memory Scan. 73 ScanningApplication for FCC / IC FCC ID: K6620345X40 / IC: 511B-20345X40 Signal Search Memory scan The FTM-400XDR/DE transceiver will scan the frequencies registered in the memories in the order of the memory channel number. 1 Switch to the memory mode 2 Press 3 Touch [SCAN]
The function menu will be displayed. briefly
Tip When [SCAN] is not displayed in the function menu, touch [BACK] or [FWD] to switch the menu. The scanning will start from the lowest to the highest memory channel number. During scanning, the decimal point of the frequency display will blink. When a signal is received, the scan will stop for three
seconds before starting to scan again. Tips The scan can also be started by pressing the [UP] or
[DWN] button on the microphone for one second or longer. The scanning direction (UP/DOWN) can be set using [SCAN][2 SCAN DIRECTION] in the set-up menu. The action to be taken when scanning is stopped can be set using [SCAN][3 SCAN RESUME] in the set-up menu (refer to the previous page). The squelch level may be adjusted using the following procedure during scanning. Touch [SQL] Turn
To stop the scanning To stop the scanning, either touch [SCAN] or press the microphone [PTT] button (the radio will not transmit in this case). 74 ScanningApplication for FCC / IC FCC ID: K6620345X40 / IC: 511B-20345X40 Selecting the scanning method Signal Search for one second or longer The set-up menu will be displayed. The scanning may be set for all memories or only specified memories. 1 Press 2 Touch [MEMORY]
The menu list will be displayed.
. 3 Touch [2 MEM SCAN TYPE] to select the scanning method The setting will switch between ALL MEM and SELECT MEM each time it is touched. ALL MEM: Scan all memories. SELECT MEM: Scan only specified memories. Tips The scanning method can also be selected by pressing Factory default value: ALL MEM for one second or longer 4 Press The scanning method will be set and the display will return to the previous screen. Setting the specified memories Specify the memories to be scanned when 2 MEM SCAN TYPE is set to SELECT MEM in the set-up menu. The memory can be specified using either of the following two methods:
(1) Selects channels using the memory list screen
(2) Specifies individual channels using the function menu screen
(1) Specify memory channels using the memory list screen 1 Touch [V/M] for 2 to 3 seconds (until the beep
sounds) The memory list screen will be displayed.
75 ScanningApplication for FCC / IC FCC ID: K6620345X40 / IC: 511B-20345X40 Signal Search 2 Select the memory channel to be specified by turning Tip The memory channel may also be selected by touching it on the screen. 3 Touch [SKIP/SEL] to display SELECT The setting displayed under [SKIP/SEL] will change in the following order each time it is touched. OFF SKIP SELECT Tip Repeat Steps 2 and 3 to specify the other memories next.
4 Touch [BACK]
Return to the previous screen, and will be displayed on the left side of the memory channel number.
(2) Specify individually using the function menu screen 1 Switch to the memory mode, and recall the memory channel to be set as the specified channel The function menu will be displayed. 2 Press 3 Touch [SKIP/SEL] to display SELECT will be displayed on the left side of the memory channel number. Tip When [SKIP/SEL] is not displayed in the function menu, touch [BACK] or [FWD] to change the menu.
The setting displayed under [SKIP/SEL] will change in the following order each time it is touched. OFF SKIP SELECT Scan only the specified memory channels
for one second or longer The set-up menu will be displayed. 1 First, select the band to be scanned, before switch to the memory mode 2 Press 3 Touch [MEMORY]
The menu list will be displayed.
76 ScanningApplication for FCC / IC FCC ID: K6620345X40 / IC: 511B-20345X40 Signal Search
4 Touch [2 MEM SCAN TYPE] and select SELECT MEM The setting will switch betweenALL MEM and SELECT MEM each time it is touched. for one second or longer The display will return to the previous screen. The function menu will be displayed. 5 Press 6 Press 7 Touch [SCAN]
The scan only those memory channels that have been set to SELECT will be started. Tips The scan can also be started by pressing the [UP] or
[DWN] button on the microphone for one second or longer. The scan will be performed in increasing order of the memory channel number. When a signal is received, the scanning stops for three seconds and then the scanning starts again. To stop the scanning, either touch [SCAN] or press the microphone [PTT] button (the radio will not transmit in this case).
Setting the memories to be skipped Memory channels which you do not wish to receive can be skipped during scanning. The channels to be skipped can be set using the following two methods:
(1) Designate channels using the memory list screen
(2) Sets channels individually using the function menu screen
(1) Designating channels to be skipped using the memory list screen 1 Touch [V/M] for two to three seconds (until the beep
sounds) The memory list screen will be displayed. 2 Turn to select the memory to be skipped Tip The memory can also be selected by touching it directly.
77 ScanningApplication for FCC / IC FCC ID: K6620345X40 / IC: 511B-20345X40 Signal Search 3 Touch [SKIP/SEL] to display SKIP The setting displayed under [SKIP/SEL] will change in the following order each time it is touched. OFF SKIP SELECT Tip Repeat Steps 2 and 3 to specify the other memories
next. 4 Touch [BACK]
Return to the previous screen, and a blinking will be displayed on the left side of the memory channel number.
(2) Setting channels to be skipped individually using the function menu screen 1 Switch to the memory mode, and recall the memory channels that have been set to
be skipped 2 Press The function menu will be displayed. 3 Touch [SKIP/SEL] to display SKIP A blinking will be displayed on the left side of the memory channel number. Tip When [SKIP/SEL] is not displayed in the function menu, touch [BACK] or [FWD] to change the menu. The setting displayed under [SKIP/SEL] will change in the following order each time it is touched. OFF SKIP SELECT 78 ScanningApplication for FCC / IC FCC ID: K6620345X40 / IC: 511B-20345X40 Signal Search Scanning the programmable memories (PMS) Using the dedicated memory channel, only the frequencies within the specified frequency range will be scanned. The frequency range is registered beforehand in the PMS memory channel. Writing into the programmable memory Nine pairs (P1L/P1U through P9L/P9U) of frequency ranges can be set up in the PMS memory channels. Register the lower limit of the frequency range to be scanned into the memory channel PL and the upper limit into the memory channel PU. Memories with the same channel number (a number from 1 to 9) are handled as one pair of PMS channel P. Example: Set up a PMS channel by registering a lower frequency of 433.200 MHz and an upper frequency of 433.700 MHz in the P1 memory channel 1 Switch to the VFO mode 2 Select the frequency (433.200) to be set for the lower limit, using Caution The frequency to be set as the lower limit (P1L) must be lower than the upper limit (P1U). for one second or longer The memory writing screen will be displayed. to select [P1L]
The memory channel can also be selected by touching it directly. Tip The memory channel can be assigned with an alpha-tag name ( P.66). 3 Press 4 Turn 5 Press 6 Switch to the VFO mode 7 Select the frequency (433.700) to be set for the upper limit, using 8 Press for one second or longer The memory writing screen will be displayed. 9 Turn to select [P1U]
The memory channel can also be selected by touching it directly. Tip The memory channel can be assigned with an alpha-tag
The display will return to the previous screen, and the memorized frequency and memory channel number will be displayed. name ( P.66). 79 ScanningApplication for FCC / IC FCC ID: K6620345X40 / IC: 511B-20345X40
1 2 | User Manual 8 | Users Manual | 4.85 MiB |
Signal Search 10 Press The display will return to the previous screen, and the memorized frequency and memory channel number will be displayed. Lower frequency P1L Upper frequency P1U
Scanning the programmable memory 1 Switch to the memory mode 2 Recall the PMS memory of the upper frequency or lower frequency 3 Press 4 Touch [SCAN]
The function menu will be displayed. briefly
Tip When [SCAN] is not displayed in the function menu, touch [BACK] or [FWD] to switch the menu.
The programmable memory scan will be started. Tips The scan can also be started by pressing the [UP] or
[DWN] button on the microphone for one second or longer. When a signal is received, the scanning stops for three seconds and then the scanning starts again. To stop the scanning, either touch [SCAN] or press the microphone [PTT] button (the radio will not transmit in this case). The squelch level may be adjusted using the following procedure during scanning. Touch [SQL] Turn
Caution When the upper and lower frequencies are not set correctly, the programmable memory scan will not work. 80 ScanningApplication for FCC / IC FCC ID: K6620345X40 / IC: 511B-20345X40 Monitoring the Home Channel This radio is equipped with a dual receive function (also known as dual watch (DW)) which checks for a signal on the home channel approximately every three seconds while monitoring or scanning. If a signal is detected, the home channel is received for five seconds, and then monitoring or scanning with dual receive is resumed. Example: When checking the home channel while receiving 145.500 MHz
Reception frequency Monitor the home channel at intervals of about three seconds. When the home channel is busy, the radio receives the signal for five seconds and then starts the dual receive again. Caution When shipped from the factory, the default frequency in the home channel of 144 MHz Band is set to 144.000 MHz while the default frequency in the home channel of 430 MHz Band is set to 430.000 MHz. These channels may be changed to a favorite operating frequency ( P.64). Using the dual receive 1 Tune in to the memory channel or a desired VFO receive frequency using 2 Press 3 Touch [DW]
The function menu will be displayed. briefly
Tip When [DW] is not displayed in the function menu, touch
[BACK] or [FWD] to switch the menu. Dual receive will start, and the home channel frequency will be received approximately every three seconds.
When a signal is detected on the home channel, it will continue to be received until the signal disappears. To cancel the dual receive Touch [DW] again. 81 ScanningApplication for FCC / IC FCC ID: K6620345X40 / IC: 511B-20345X40 Monitoring the Home Channel Setting the restart condition of dual receive The dual receive restart condition when the home channel signal is detected can be selected from the following two ways.
(1) Restarts dual receive after five seconds have passed (AUTO).
(2) Stops dual receive and continue to receive the home channel (HOLD). for one second or longer The set-up menu will be displayed. 1 Press 2 Touch [SCAN]
The menu list will be displayed. 3 Touch [1 DUAL WATCH STOP] to select the restart condition The setting switches between AUTO and HOLD each time it is touched. Tip Factory default value: AUTO
4 Press for one second or longer The dual receive restart condition will be set and the display will return to the previous screen. 82 ScanningApplication for FCC / IC FCC ID: K6620345X40 / IC: 511B-20345X40 Using the GPS Function This radio is equipped with an internal GPS reception unit to receive and display the position information at all times. The position information can be used as in the following example. Refer to Using the backtrack function (Page 95) Save the position information in the memory and use it for navigation purposes Save the stations with frequent communications and checks whether they are within the sphere of communications Exchange position information and messages through data communications with other stations Refer to the separate Operating Manual APRS Edition Refer to the separate Operating Manual GM Edition What is GPS?
GPS or Global Positioning System is a satellite location system to determine the current position on earth. It is a military system developed by the US Department of Defense with approximately 30 GPS satellites circumnavigating the earth at an altitude of about 20,000 km, When signals from three or more satellites in space are received, the current position information (longitude, latitude, altitude etc.) may be determined within an accuracy of several meters. The accurate time can also be received from the atomic clock built into the GPS satellite. for one second or longer to switch on the Positioning Using GPS 1 Press power The satellite search will begin and the be displayed at the top right of the screen. Tips It may take several minutes to capture the satellites. icon will When three or more satellites cannot be captured, the icon display will disappear. In this case, positioning is not possible and the position information cannot be used.
83 Using the GPS FunctionApplication for FCC / IC FCC ID: K6620345X40 / IC: 511B-20345X40 Positioning Using GPS About GPS positioning Positioning refers to the calculation of ones own position from the satellites orbit information and the transmission time of the radio waves. Positioning requires that three or more satellites be acquired. When positioning cannot be carried out properly, move to an open space as far away from buildings as possible and where there are fewer obstructions. About the error Depending on the surrounding environment of the receiver location, an error of several hundred meters may occur. Although positioning is possible using only three satellites, depending on the positioning conditions, the positioning accuracy may become worse, or may no longer be possible under the following conditions:
Between high rise buildings, narrow roads between buildings, indoors and under the shade of buildings, below high voltage lines and underneath overhead structures, between trees and shrubs such as in forests and woods, inside tunnels and underground, when used behind a solar-
energy reflecting glass, locations where a strong magnetic field occurs When not using the radio for a long period of time When using the GPS function for the first time after purchasing the FTM-400XDR/DE transceiver, and when turning it on after It has not been used for a long period time, positioning may take several minutes in order to search for the satellites. Also, when using the device again several hours after switching off the power, positioning may take several minutes in order to search for the satellites. Positioning using an external GPS device Commercial GPS receive devices can also be connected to the [EXT GPS] jack on the side of the controller. The [EXT GPS] plug connector is illustrated below. TXD (serial data output [transceiver external device]) RXD (serial data input [transceiver external device]) GND 84 Using the GPS FunctionApplication for FCC / IC FCC ID: K6620345X40 / IC: 511B-20345X40 1 Switch off the power to the radio 2 Plug the connector of the external device into the
[EXT GPS] jack on the side of the controller unit. Positioning Using GPS EXT GPS
for one second or longer The set-up menu will be displayed. 3 Switch on the power to the radio 4 Press 5 Touch [CONFIG]
The menu list will be displayed. 6 Touch [17 GPS DEVICE] to select EXTERNAL Each time this symbol is touched, the setting will switch between INTERNAL and EXTERNAL. for one second or longer 7 Press Return to the previous screen. When the external device captures three or more satellites, the icon will be displayed on the top right of the screen. Tips When connecting to an external GPS device, refer to the operating manual of the connected device as well. When using an external GPS device, keep the radio away from the external GPS device. When using an external GPS device, the data from the in-built GPS will become invalid. 85 Using the GPS FunctionApplication for FCC / IC FCC ID: K6620345X40 / IC: 511B-20345X40 Positioning Using GPS Checking the satellite capture status The satellites acquired at the current location and the strengths of the signals can be observed on the radar-like screen. 1 Press 2 Touch [DISPLAY]
for one second or longer The set-up menu will be displayed. The menu list will be displayed.
3 Touch [1 DISPLAY SELECT]
The screen for setting the various screens on and off will be displayed. 4 Touch [GPS INFO] to select ON Each time this symbol is touched, the setting will switch between OFF and ON. for one second or longer The display will return to the previous screen. twice briefly 5 Press 6 Press The radar-shaped GPS screen will be displayed and the acquired GPS satellite number and signal strength icon will be displayed. The brighter the color of the icon, the stronger is the signal strength. Tips When the Altitude display screen and Timer/Clock screen are both ON, the screen will change in the following order each time Normal frequency display Compass/Lat&Lon display screen Altitude display screen Timer/Clock screen GPS screen When connecting an external GPS device, satellite information may not be output depending on the GPS device (in this case, the icon will not be displayed). is pressed. 86 Using the GPS FunctionApplication for FCC / IC FCC ID: K6620345X40 / IC: 511B-20345X40 Displaying the position information Displaying the current position information of your station Positioning Using GPS for one second or longer The set-up menu will be displayed. 1 Press 2 Touch [DISPLAY]
The menu list will be displayed. 3 Touch [2 TARGET LOCATION] to select NUMERIC Each time this is touched, the setting will switch between COMPASS and NUMERIC. for one second or longer The display will return to the previous screen. 4 Press 5 Press briefly The latitude and longitude display screen will be displayed. 6 Touch [MY]
The latitude and longitude of your station will be displayed in numerical figures. Tip When the Altitude display screen and Timer/Clock screen are both ON, the screen will change in the following sequence each time Normal frequency display Compass/Lat&Lon display screen Altitude display screen Timer/Clock screen GPS screen is pressed.
Displaying the position information of the partner station in the digital mode In the C4FM digital V/D mode, the position and direction to the partner station can be displayed in real time during the communication. The position information obtained from the GPS is transmitted at the same time as the voice signal. 1 Switch the communication mode to AMS (auto mode select function) or digital mode, or activate the GM function Tip Refer to Using the GM function ( P.99) on the basic method of using the GM function. 2 Switch to the latitude and longitude display screen 3 Touch [YR]
The latitude and longitude of the partner station will be displayed in numerical figures. 87 Using the GPS FunctionApplication for FCC / IC FCC ID: K6620345X40 / IC: 511B-20345X40 Positioning Using GPS Explanation of the position information screen Example of a display of your own station position Example of a display of a partner station position
Position information status display The status display will indicate that the data received contains position information. The status display will blink when the GM function is activated. Tip Refer to the separate Operating Manual GM Edition for the details on the GM function (download the manual from the YAESU website). Partner station call sign and time of receipt Distance to a partner station Latitude Displayed as X DDMMSS X: N (north latitude) / S (south latitude) DD: 0 - 90 (degrees) MM: 0 - 59 (minutes) SS: 0 - 59 (seconds) Example: N 3537 23 (latitude 35 degrees 37 minutes & 23 seconds) Tip The DDMMSS and DDMM. MM will switch each time the number section is touched. Longitude Displayed as X DDDMMSS X: E (east longitude) / W (west longitude) DDD: 0 - 180 (degrees) MM: 0 - 59 (minutes) SS: 0 - 59 (seconds) Example: E 13945 02 (east longitude 139 degrees 45 minutes 02 seconds) Tip The DDDMMSS and DDDMM. MM will switch each time the number section is touched. Tip Use [APRS] [12 APRS UNITS] in the set-up menu to change the display units of the various data. 88 Using the GPS FunctionApplication for FCC / IC FCC ID: K6620345X40 / IC: 511B-20345X40 Positioning Using GPS Recording the position information (GPS log function) The position information of your own station can be recorded (saved) in a micro-SD card on a regular basis. 1 Press 2 Touch [CONFIG]
for one second or longer The set-up menu will be displayed. The menu list will be displayed.
3 Select [18 GPS LOG] and touch the screen The screen for selecting the recording interval and switching the GPS log function ON and OFF will be displayed. 4 Touch [ON]
The interval timing will be displayed in green characters. Tips The position information will not be recorded when OFF is selected. Factory default value: OFF
5 Touch [+] and [-] to select the interval timing Each time the screen is touched, the interval timing will change in the following sequence. The interval timing can be selected from the following six levels. 1 sec 2 sec 5 sec 10 sec 30 sec 60 sec Tip Factory default value: 10 sec for one second or longer The interval timing for recording the position information will be set and the display will return to the previous screen. The recording of the position information at the set interval will also be started. 6 Press Tips The position information will continue to be recorded until the power to the radio is switched off or when OFF is selected in Step 4. Recording will be restarted under the same file name when the power to the radio is turned on again, or when the recording interval is selected one more time in Step 5. The position data will be saved under the filename GPSyymmdd.log. yymmdd shows the record start time in yy (year), mm (month) and dd (day) format. 89 Using the GPS FunctionApplication for FCC / IC FCC ID: K6620345X40 / IC: 511B-20345X40 Positioning Using GPS Checking the route using a personal computer Insert the micro-SD card into the personal computer card reader. The route can also be displayed with commercial map software using the log data of the saved position information. 1 Switch off the power to the radio 2 Remove the micro-SD card 3 4 Open the FTM400D folder contained on the micro-SD card 5 Open the GPSLOG folder 6 The data is saved under the file name GPSyymmdd.log. yymmdd refers to the recording start year (yy), month (mm), and day (dd). Import the data into the commercial map software The route will be displayed on the map. Tips Refer to the operating manual of the map software that you are for instructions to import and display the route data on the map. The position information can also be used by connecting the radio directly to a computer
(Connecting to an external device P.155)). Measuring the altitude The changes in the altitude depending on the altitude of the current position and distance travelled can also be displayed in a graph. 1 Press 2 Touch [DISPLAY]
for one second or longer The set-up menu will be displayed. The menu list will be displayed.
3 Touch [1 DISPLAY SELECT]
A list of the various screen setting selections will be displayed.
90 Using the GPS FunctionApplication for FCC / IC FCC ID: K6620345X40 / IC: 511B-20345X40 4 Touch [ALTITUDE] to select ON Each time this symbol is touched, the setting will switch between OFF and ON. 5 Press 6 Press for one second or longer The display will return to the previous screen. twice briefly The altitude graph will be displayed on the screen. Changing the altitude scale 1 Touch [SCALE]
Each time this symbol is touched, the scale value will change in the following order. 5 m 20 m 40 m 80 m Tip The maximum altitude scale will be automatically set based on the present altitude values. Positioning Using GPS
Erasing the previous altitude changes 1 Touch [CLEAR]
The graph on the left side will disappear and the current altitude display will shift to the left end.
91 Using the GPS FunctionApplication for FCC / IC FCC ID: K6620345X40 / IC: 511B-20345X40 Positioning Using GPS Other settings Changing the geodetic reference system Select using [CONFIG] [16 GPS DATUM] in the set-up menu. Select the geodetic reference system which is the positioning standard. WGS-84: Using the global geodetic reference system for positioning. This is being used as a standard all around the world. TOKYO MEAN: Using the Japanese geodetic reference system for positioning. When positioning in Japan (Tokyo), the error can be lowered. Tips When the geodetic reference system is changed, the position information will deviate by about 400 m. Set to WGS-84 normally. Changing the time zone Select using [CONFIG] [3 TIME ZONE] in the set-up menu. The time difference with the UTC (Coordinated Universal Time) can be changed in steps of 30 minutes. 92 Using the GPS FunctionApplication for FCC / IC FCC ID: K6620345X40 / IC: 511B-20345X40 Using the Smart Navigation Function Two navigation methods may be used in the smart navigation function.
(1) Real-time navigation function In the C4FM digital V/D mode, the position and direction of the received partner station can be displayed in real time during the communication because the position information obtained from the GPS is transmitted at the same time as the voice signal.
(2) Backtrack function By registering the departure or other points in advance, the distance and direction from the current position to the registered location can be displayed in real time. Displaying the Compass screen When using the navigation function, use the Compass Screen to display the direction of your station and the partner station on a compass. 1 Press 2 Touch [DISPLAY]
for one second or longer The set-up menu will be displayed. The menu list will be displayed.
3 Touch [2 TARGET LOCATION] to select COMPASS Each time this symbol is touched, the setting will switch between COMPASS and NUMERIC. for one second or longer The display will return to the previous screen. 4 Press 5 Press briefly The screen with the compass panel in the center will be displayed. The direction from your station to the partner station will also be displayed using a compass needle. Tip The compass needle will not be displayed when there is
no position information. 6 Press briefly The display will return to the normal frequency display screen from the Compass screen. Tip When the Altitude display screen and Timer/Clock screen are both ON, the screen will change in the following order each time Normal frequency display Compass/Lat&Lon display screen Altitude display screen Timer/Clock screen GPS screen is pressed. 93 Using the GPS FunctionApplication for FCC / IC FCC ID: K6620345X40 / IC: 511B-20345X40 Using the Smart Navigation Function Changing the direction of the compass panel The compass panel can be selected from Heading UP where the direction of your travel is always displayed at the top, or North UP where north is always displayed at the top. 1 Touch the compass needle
The compass panel will switch between Heading UP and North UP each time the compass needle is touched. The direction of the current compass panel will be Indicated near the top left of the screen. Tip Although the scale on the compass panel has 16 directions, the compass needle can point in 32 directions.
Using the real-time navigation function 1 Switch to the Compass screen 2 Touch [YR]
During transmission in the V/D mode, the distance
and direction of the received partner station is displayed. Tip When a partner station is selected using the GM function and displayed on the compass screen, the on the left hand side of the partner station call sign will blink. When is blinking, the compass display will not be updated even when signals containing position information from stations other than that displayed are received. When [YR] is touched, will light up and the compass display will be updated when signals containing position information from stations other than that displayed are received.
Direction of partner station Partner station information in display
94
Distance to partner station
Using the GPS FunctionApplication for FCC / IC FCC ID: K6620345X40 / IC: 511B-20345X40
1 2 | User Manual 9 | Users Manual | 3.16 MiB |
When a partner station comes within 50 meters of your location, a beep will sound, the compass needle display will disappear, and the scope scale will appear in green Using the Smart Navigation Function
Using the backtrack function Saving the destination A maximum of three locations can be saved in the memory. Registering the current location (departure point) 1 Switch to the Compass screen 2 Touch [MY]
The display will turn orange in color. 3 Touch [MEMORY]
Tip This symbol is not active be touched when there is no position information.
[], [L1] and [L2] will blink.
95 Using the GPS FunctionApplication for FCC / IC FCC ID: K6620345X40 / IC: 511B-20345X40 Using the Smart Navigation Function 4 Touch [], [L1] or [L2]
The position information will be saved in the memory and the touched location will turn orange in color. Tip When position information is already registered in [], [L1] and
[L2], the text will be displayed in green color.
Registering the locations of other stations When position information is included in the data of other stations received through digital communications, it can be saved in the memory. 1 Switch to the Compass screen 2 Touch [YR]
The display will turn orange in color.
3 Touch [MEMORY]
[], [L1] and [L2] will blink.
96 Using the GPS FunctionApplication for FCC / IC FCC ID: K6620345X40 / IC: 511B-20345X40 Using the Smart Navigation Function 4 Touch [], [L1] or [L2]
The position information will be saved in the memory and the touched location will turn orange in color. Tip When position information is already registered in [], [L1] and
[L2], the text will be displayed in green color.
Displaying the position of the destination in real time
1 Switch to the Compass screen 2 Touch [], [L1] or [L2]
Tip This symbol is not active when position information has not been saved in the memory. The direction of the compass needle will change following the position information that has been saved in the memory and a green circle will be displayed at the tip to show the direction of the destination. The distance to the destination will also be displayed. 3 Move while keeping the tip of the compass needle to point towards the top Tip When the destination registered after touching [MY] is selected, the date and time of the registration will also be displayed.
97 Using the GPS FunctionApplication for FCC / IC FCC ID: K6620345X40 / IC: 511B-20345X40 Using the APRS Function What is the APRS Function?
There is a verity of methods to display GPS position information using amateur radios. APRS (Automatic Packet Reporting System) uses a format that is advocated by Bob Bruninga WB4APR. This system performs data communications for messages and position information. When an APRS signal is received from a partner station, the direction, distance, speed etc. of the partner station in relation to your own station will be shown in the display of this radio.
When using the APRS function, the call sign and symbol etc. of your own station need to be set (initial settings). Refer to the separate Operating Manual APRS Edition for details (download the manual from our YAESU website). 98 Using the APRS FunctionApplication for FCC / IC FCC ID: K6620345X40 / IC: 511B-20345X40 Using the GM Function What is the GM Function?
The GM (group monitor) function automatically checks to find if there are any stations with the GM function in operation on the same frequency within communication range. The FTM-400XDR/DE can then display the position and distance and other information for each group member call sign on the screen. Besides letting you know who is within your sphere of communication, this function is also convenient for instantly checking the relative positions of all the members in the group Furthermore, this function can also be used to send data such as messages and images among the group members.
Tips The GM function operates only on Band A. The GM function does not work in the analog mode. When the GM function is activated, Band A will automatically switch to the DN mode. When sending image data with the GM function in operation, the mode will automatically switch to the FR mode (high speed data communication mode). At the end of the data transmission, the mode will automatically revert to the original V/D mode (simultaneous voice/data communication mode). 9999 Using the GM FunctionApplication for FCC / IC FCC ID: K6620345X40 / IC: 511B-20345X40 Basic Methods to use the GM function There are two ways to use the GM function:
(1) Displays all stations where the GM function is in operation in communications range
(maximum of 24 stations can be displayed)
(2) Registers the ID of partners in the group and displays only the partners An explanation of the two methods of starting the GM operation will be given. Refer to the separate Operating Manual GM Edition for other details on how to use the function (download the manual from our YAESU website). Displaying all the stations where the GM function is in operation 1 Tune the frequency in Band A 2 Press Up to 24 stations operating within the sphere of communication where the GM function is in operation. Tips Stations within the sphere of communications are displayed in green. Stations outside the sphere of communications are displayed in grey.
Displaying only partners registered in the group When a group that has been created beforehand is selected from the group list and the screen is touched, the status of the members registered in that group will be displayed. A total of up to 16 groups can be created. Names such as Touring, Camp etc. can be assigned to the groups. Up to 24 stations can be registered as members in each group. 1 Tune in the frequency of Band A 2 Press 3 Touch [GROUP]
100100 Using the GM FunctionApplication for FCC / IC FCC ID: K6620345X40 / IC: 511B-20345X40 Basic Methods of Use or touch the screen to select a group 4 Turn 5 Touch the screen to select the group Up to 24 group members with the GM function in operation at the same frequency will be displayed.
The display will return to the group list. 6 Touch [GROUP]
7 Press The GM function will be turned off and the display will return to the previous screen. Tip The communications mode will automatically switch to the DN mode of the AMS. 101101 Using the GM FunctionApplication for FCC / IC FCC ID: K6620345X40 / IC: 511B-20345X40 Convenient Functions Communicating with Specified Partner Stations Using the tone squelch This radio is equipped with the CTCSS (Continuous Tone-coded Squelch System) which allows audio to be heard only when receiving signals containing the same frequency tone as the tone that has been set in the tone squelch menu. By matching the tone frequency with the partner station in advance, a quiet standby is possible. Caution CTCSS does not work in the digital mode. Use the communication mode to the auto-mode select function (AMS), or to the analog mode. key at the beginning to switch the Setting the tone frequency for one second or longer The set-up menu will be displayed. The tone can be selected from 50 frequencies between 67.0 Hz and 254.1 Hz. 1 Press 2 Touch [SIGNALING]
The menu list will be displayed.
or touch the screen to select [1 TONE SQL FREQ]
3 Turn 4 Touch [1 TONE SQL FREQ]
The characters of the set value will turn orange in color. 5 Turn to select the frequency Tip Factory default value: 88.5 Hz 6 Touch [1 TONE SQL FREQ]
The characters of the set value will turn green in color. 102
Convenient FunctionsApplication for FCC / IC FCC ID: K6620345X40 / IC: 511B-20345X40 Communicating with Specified Partner Stations for one second or longer The tone frequency will be set and the display will return to the previous screen. Tip The display can also be returned to the previous screen by touching [BACK] twice. 7 Press Using the tone squelch 1 Press 2 Touch [SQL] to display T-TRX The function menu will be displayed. Tips When [SQL] is not displayed in the menu, use [BACK]
or [FWD] to change the menu. The squelch type changes in the following sequence each time it is touched. NOISE T-TX T-TRX T-REV D-TRX PRGM PAGER D-TX* TT/DR* DT/TR*
* These squelch types will be displayed when
[SIGNALING] [8 SQL EXPANSION] is set to ON in the set-up menu.
The squelch will open only when receiving a tone signal of the set frequency.
Tip A bell can be rung (beep) when signals containing the same tone code are received ( P.110).
Transmitting the tone signal 1 Press 2 Touch [SQL] to display T-TX The function menu will be displayed.
103 Convenient FunctionsApplication for FCC / IC FCC ID: K6620345X40 / IC: 511B-20345X40 Communicating with Specified Partner Stations 3 Press the microphone [PTT]
Radio waves including the tone signal will be transmitted while [PTT] is being pressed.
Tip When alternating between transmit and receive repeatedly, set [SQL] in the function menu to T-TRX. Using digital code squelch This radio is equipped with a DCS (Digital Coded Squelch) function that allows audio to be heard only when signals containing the same DCS code are received. By matching the DCS code with the partner station beforehand, a quiet receive standby is possible. Caution DCS does not work in the digital mode. Use the mode to the auto-mode select function (AMS) or analog mode. key at the beginning to switch the communication Setting the DCS code for one second or longer The set-up menu will be displayed. The DCS code can be selected from 104 digital codes 023 to 754. 1 Press 2 Touch [SIGNALING]
The menu list will be displayed.
, or touch the screen to select [2 DCS CODE]
3 Turn 4 Touch [2 DCS CODE]
The characters of the set value will turn orange in color.
104 Convenient FunctionsApplication for FCC / IC FCC ID: K6620345X40 / IC: 511B-20345X40
frequency | equipment class | purpose | ||
---|---|---|---|---|
1 | 2015-09-28 | 800 ~ 999 | CSR - Scanning Receiver | Class II permissive change or modification of presently authorized equipment |
2 | 2012-12-11 | 800 ~ 999 | CSR - Scanning Receiver | Original Equipment |
app s | Applicant Information | |||||
---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
1 2 | Effective |
2015-09-28
|
||||
1 2 |
2012-12-11
|
|||||
1 2 | Applicant's complete, legal business name |
Yaesu Musen Co., Ltd.
|
||||
1 2 | FCC Registration Number (FRN) |
0013655220
|
||||
1 2 | Physical Address |
Tennozu Parkside Building
|
||||
1 2 |
Tokyo, N/A 140-0002
|
|||||
1 2 |
Japan
|
|||||
app s | TCB Information | |||||
1 2 | TCB Application Email Address |
t******@timcoengr.com
|
||||
1 2 | TCB Scope |
A1: Low Power Transmitters below 1 GHz (except Spread Spectrum), Unintentional Radiators, EAS (Part 11) & Consumer ISM devices
|
||||
app s | FCC ID | |||||
1 2 | Grantee Code |
K66
|
||||
1 2 | Equipment Product Code |
20345X40
|
||||
app s | Person at the applicant's address to receive grant or for contact | |||||
1 2 | Name |
K******** T******
|
||||
1 2 | Title |
Engineering Division/Quality Assurance Leader
|
||||
1 2 | Telephone Number |
81-3-********
|
||||
1 2 | Fax Number |
81-3-********
|
||||
1 2 |
k******@yaesu.com
|
|||||
app s | Technical Contact | |||||
n/a | ||||||
app s | Non Technical Contact | |||||
n/a | ||||||
app s | Confidentiality (long or short term) | |||||
1 2 | Does this application include a request for confidentiality for any portion(s) of the data contained in this application pursuant to 47 CFR § 0.459 of the Commission Rules?: | Yes | ||||
1 2 | Long-Term Confidentiality Does this application include a request for confidentiality for any portion(s) of the data contained in this application pursuant to 47 CFR § 0.459 of the Commission Rules?: | Yes | ||||
1 2 | If so, specify the short-term confidentiality release date (MM/DD/YYYY format) | 12/27/2015 | ||||
1 2 | 01/25/2013 | |||||
if no date is supplied, the release date will be set to 45 calendar days past the date of grant. | ||||||
app s | Cognitive Radio & Software Defined Radio, Class, etc | |||||
1 2 | Is this application for software defined/cognitive radio authorization? | No | ||||
1 2 | Equipment Class | CSR - Scanning Receiver | ||||
1 2 | Description of product as it is marketed: (NOTE: This text will appear below the equipment class on the grant) | AMATEUR RADIO WITH SCANNING RECEIVER | ||||
1 2 | SCANNING RECEIVER | |||||
1 2 | Related OET KnowledgeDataBase Inquiry: Is there a KDB inquiry associated with this application? | No | ||||
1 2 | Modular Equipment Type | Does not apply | ||||
1 2 | Purpose / Application is for | Class II permissive change or modification of presently authorized equipment | ||||
1 2 | Original Equipment | |||||
1 2 | Composite Equipment: Is the equipment in this application a composite device subject to an additional equipment authorization? | No | ||||
1 2 | Related Equipment: Is the equipment in this application part of a system that operates with, or is marketed with, another device that requires an equipment authorization? | No | ||||
1 2 | Grant Comments | 9/28/2015 - Class II Permissive Change: Changing the GPS Module in the radio. | ||||
1 2 | Is there an equipment authorization waiver associated with this application? | No | ||||
1 2 | If there is an equipment authorization waiver associated with this application, has the associated waiver been approved and all information uploaded? | No | ||||
app s | Test Firm Name and Contact Information | |||||
1 2 | Firm Name |
SGS Japan Inc. Yokohama Lab
|
||||
1 2 |
Timco Engineering, Inc.
|
|||||
1 2 | Name |
T****** I********
|
||||
1 2 |
B****** C******
|
|||||
1 2 | Telephone Number |
81(0)********
|
||||
1 2 |
352-4********
|
|||||
1 2 | Fax Number |
81(0)********
|
||||
1 2 |
352 4********
|
|||||
1 2 |
t******@sgs.com
|
|||||
1 2 |
b******@timcoengr.com
|
|||||
Equipment Specifications | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
Line | Rule Parts | Grant Notes | Lower Frequency | Upper Frequency | Power Output | Tolerance | Emission Designator | Microprocessor Number | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
1 | 1 | 15B | 108 | 137 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
1 | 2 | 15B | 137 | 174 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
1 | 3 | 15B | 174 | 222 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
1 | 4 | 15B | 222 | 420 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
1 | 5 | 15B | 420 | 470 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
1 | 6 | 15B | 470 | 800 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
1 | 7 | 15B | 800 | 999 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Line | Rule Parts | Grant Notes | Lower Frequency | Upper Frequency | Power Output | Tolerance | Emission Designator | Microprocessor Number | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
2 | 1 | 15B | 108 | 137 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
2 | 2 | 15B | 137 | 174 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
2 | 3 | 15B | 174 | 222 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
2 | 4 | 15B | 222 | 420 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
2 | 5 | 15B | 420 | 470 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
2 | 6 | 15B | 470 | 800 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
2 | 7 | 15B | 800 | 999 |
some individual PII (Personally Identifiable Information) available on the public forms may be redacted, original source may include additional details
This product uses the FCC Data API but is not endorsed or certified by the FCC